Home

Function Manual - Service, Support

Contents

1. N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 NO N10 N11 N12 Block path Figure 4 2 Comparison of the G60 and G64 velocity behavior with short travels in the blocks LookAhead takes plannable velocity limits into consideration such as e Velocity limit in the block e Acceleration limit in the block e Velocity limit on block transition Synchronization with block change at block transition e Exact stop at block end during termination Operating principle LookAhead functionality is available only for path axes but not for the spindle For safety reasons the velocity at the end of the last prepared block must initially be assumed to be zero because the next block might be very small or be an exact stop block and the axes must have been stopped by the end of the block With a series of blocks with high set velocity and very short paths the speed can be increased in each block depending on the velocity value currently calculated by the LookAhead function in order to achieve the required set velocity After this it can be reduced so that the velocity at the end of the last block considered by the LookAhead function can be zero This results in a sawtooth shaped velocity profile which can be avoided by reducing the set velocity for the number of blocks considered by the LookAhead function fixed value Velocity profiles In addition to the fixed plannable velocity limitations LookAhead can also take account of the programmed velocity Th
2. e System variable AA_MWl axis Access to measured value in the workpiece coordinate system Read in part program axis stands for the name of the measurement axis X Y References SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Function Manual 138 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 PLC service display SYSTEM PLC 4s VAN The measuring signal can be controlled via the status menu in the lt SYSTEM gt operating area skit ARM gt PLC IS Probe 1 activated DB2700 DBX0001 0 The current measuring status of the axis is shown by the IS Measurement active measuring block with this axis running 12 4 Measurement accuracy and functional testing 12 4 1 Measuring accuracy Accuracy The propagation time of the measuring signal is determined by the hardware used The delay times are in the us range plus the probe response time The measurement uncertainty is calculated as follows Measurement uncertainty measuring signal propagation time x traversing velocity Correct results can only be guaranteed for traversing velocity where not more than one triggering signal arrives per position controller cycle 12 4 2 Probe functional test Example of functional test The functional test for the probe is conducted favorably via an NC program N PRUEF MESSTASTER MPF Testing program probe connection N10 R10 Flag for trigger status N20 R11 messwert in X axis N30 T1 D1 Preselect too
3. Precontroller value T i To the h KV _ gt Following error speed controller Speed setpoint xe monitoring Position controller Figure 3 2 Speed setpoint calculation Effectiveness Speed setpoint monitoring is always active for axes and spindles Effect The following occurs if the maximum speed setpoint value is exceeded e Alarm 25060 Speed setpoint limiting is triggered e The affected axis spindle is brought to a standstill using a rapid stop with open position control loop along a speed setpoint ramp The braking ramp duration is set in MD36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME braking ramp duration for error states e f the axis spindle is involved in interpolation with other axes spindles these are stopped using a rapid stop with following error reduction default for partial position setpoint 0 Note In the Expert mode access level protection level 1 MD36220 CTRLOUT_LIMIT_TIME can be used to set a delay time after the expiration of which an alarm is output and the axes are brought to a standstill The default value of this time is zero Using speed setpoint limiting will turn the control loop into a non linear control loop This generally causes contour deviations if speed setpoint limiting is continued for an axis A control margin must therefore be set Causes of errors e A measuring circuit error or drive error is present e Setpoints are too high accelerations velocities reducing factors e O
4. ST Variable numMachAxes r DB120x DBB1000 DB120x DBB1001 fe DB120x DBw1002 o O DB120x DBWw1004 o O DB120x DBD1008 o O Function Manual 20 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 Variable rpa R parameters Po Variable pa rt DB120x DBB1000 DB120x DBB1001 J o O DB120x DBW1004 J o Variable actLineNumber Line number of the current NC block e 0 Prior to program start e 1 Not available due to error e 2 Not available due to DISPLOF Po Variable actLineNumber S DB120x DBB1000 6 DB120x DBB1001 o O DB120xpBw1002 e o O DB120xpBw1004 L o O DB120x 0B01008 o O 2 8 Signals from PLC Commissioning mode The ramp up modes are signaled via bit 0 and bit 1 DB1800 DBB1000 in the user interface DB1800 DBX 1000 1 DB1800 DBX1000 0 Normal rampup C Ramp up with default values U a Ramp up with saved data ES ey 3 Axis Monitoring 3 1 Overview of monitoring functions Overview of monitoring functions e Motion monitoring functions Contour monitoring Position monitoring Standstill monitoring Clamping monitoring Speed setpoint monitoring Actual velocity monitoring Encoder monitoring functions e Monitoring of static limits Limit switch monitoring Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 21 3 2 Running monitoring 3 2 1 Contour monitoring Function The principle on which the contour monitoring function works is the constant comparison of the measured
5. color RED ORANGE BLACK BLUE GREEN YELLOW WHITE Uploading a machine manufacturer s online help using a USB stick To upload a machine manufacturer s online help using a USB stick proceed as follows 1 Create your own file s for an online help and save the file s in the USB stick The possible file formats are txt png and omp Because the machine manufacturer s online help supports multiple languages you need to create folders for different languages You can create folders of for example the following structure in the USB stick First level ichs DIR Geng DIR Second level Comilling DIR Di turning DIR Third level Cojnmanual DIR For details on how to name a first level folder see Section Multi language support for the machine manufacturer s HMI data Page 179 2 Copy the two first level folders to the OEM online help folder For how to find this folder see the subsequent steps 3 Insert the USB stick into the USB interface at the front of the PPU 4s Pa 4 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM Function Manual 182 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 5 Press these softkeys in succession to open the USB window Oo Sys ce data 6 Use this hardkey on the PPU to select one or more online help files and then copy the file s with the following Copy Hane Type Length Bsb8scri6 pa 17 46 KB Bl GH6scri17 png 18 47 KB 5 GH6scri18 png 17 58 KB 5 GH6scri
6. 20201 CHFRND_MODE_MASK Specifications regarding the chamfer rounding behavior Axis specific machine data 32000 MAX_AX_VELO Maximum axis velocity 35100 SPIND_VELO_LIMIT Maximum spindle speed Channel specific setting data 42100 DRY_RUN_FEED Dry run feedrate 42010 THREAD _RAMP_DISP Acceleration behavior of the feedrate axis when thread cutting 42110 DEFAULT_FEED Default value for path feed 16 4 2 Interface signals Number Bit Name Channel specific 0B3200 DBx0000 6 Activate dry run feed o DB3200 DBX0004 Feed override DB3200 DBX0005 Rapidtraverseoveride 0 DB3200 DBX0006 Feed disable DB3200 DBX0006 Rapid traverse override active DB3200 DBX0006 Feed rate override active DB3200 DBX1000 l Feed stop geometry axis 1 DB3200 DBX1004 l Feed stop geometry axis 2 DB3200 DBX1008 l Feed stop geometry axis 3 DB1700 DBX0000 Dry run feed rate selected DB1700 DBX0001 Feed rate override selected for rapid traverse DB3300 DBX0001 Revolutional feed rate active Axis spindle specific DB380x DBB0000 DB380x DBB2003 Spindle override S DB380x DBX2001 0 Feedrate override for spindle valid SSS od NO Feed override i i DB380x DBX0004 Feed stop spindle stop DB390x DBX2002 Constant cutting rate active spindle DB390x DBX2002 i i Tapping without compensation chuck active spindle Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 175 17 Tool Tool Compensation 17 1 Tool and tool co
7. If the reference cam is not calibrated precisely an incorrect synchronizing pulse zero mark may be evaluated In this case the control assumes an incorrect machine zero and moves the axes to incorrect positions Software limit switches act on incorrect positions and are therefore not able to protect the machine 14 3 Secondary conditions for absolute encoders Calibration time The calibration process determines the offset between the machine zero and the encoder zero and stores it in a non volatile memory Normally calibration need only be performed once i e during first commissioning The control then knows the value and can calculate the absolute machine position from the encoder absolute value at any time This status is identified by MD34210 ENC_REFP_STATE z2 The offset is stored in MD34090 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR The calibration process must be repeated in the following situations e After mounting removal or replacement of encoder or of motor with built in encoder e After change of an existing gear unit between motor with absolute encoder and load e Generally speaking every time the mechanical connection between the encoder and load is separated and not reconnected in exactly the same way Note The control may not always recognize the need for recalibration If it detects such a need it sets MD34210 to 0 or 1 The following is detected changeover to another gear speed with a different gear ratio between the encoder and
8. Only when the spindle is stationary i e the actual spindle speed is below a value defined in MD36060 STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL is IS Axis spindle stationary DB390x DBX0001 4 set Functions such as tool change open machine door path feed can be activated using the PLC user program Monitoring is effective in the three spindle modes 15 6 3 Spindle in setpoint range The Spindle in setpoint range monitor checks whether the programmed spindle speed has been reached whether the spindle is stationary IS Axis spindle stationary or whether it is still in the acceleration phase In the spindle control mode the speed setpoint programmed speed with spindle override including the active limits is compared with the actual speed If the deviation of the actual speed from the speed setpoint is greater than the spindle speed tolerance set in MD35150 SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL e IS Spindle in setpoint range DB390x DBX2001 5 is set to zero e The next machining block is not enabled if MD35500 SPIND_ON_SPEED_AT_IPO_START is set Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 163 15 6 4 Maximum spindle speed Maximum spindle speed A maximum speed is defined for maximum spindle speed spindle monitoring which the spindle may not exceed The maximum spindle speed is entered in MD35100 SPIND_VELO_LIMIT The control limits an excessive spindle speed setpoint to this value If the actual spindle speed exceeds the maximum spindle speed despite allo
9. This ensures that in normal operation the leading and synchronized axes move in positional synchronism even during acceleration and braking Load effects are compensated by the appropriate drive of the leading or synchronized axis Disturbance characteristic When a disturbance occurs which causes shutdown of one gantry axis owing for example to cancellation of the controller enabling signal example EMERGENCY OFF the coupled gantry axes are also shut down Separation of forced coupling In certain situations e g one gantry axis is no longer referenced owing to an encoder failure it may be necessary to correct or reduce the misalignment between the gantry axes prior to referencing To do this it must be possible to traverse the leading or the synchronized axis manually in the uncoupled state The forced coupling between the gantry axes can be separated by making the following MD setting and then performing a RESET MD37140 GANTRY_BREAK_UP 1 break up gantry grouping The gantry axes can then be traversed separately by hand the monitoring of the warning and trip limits is not operative in this state Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 43 NOTICE Mechanical coupling of gantry axes If the gantry axes remain mechanically coupled there is a risk of damage to the machine when the leading or synchronized axes are traversed in this operating state 6 3 Referencing and synchronizing gantry axes 6 3 1 Introducti
10. e The affected axis spindle is brought to a standstill with rapid stop with open position control loop along a speed setpoint ramp The braking ramp time is set in MD36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME duration of the braking ramp for error states e If the axis spindle is involved in interpolation with other axes spindles these are stopped by rapid stop with following error reduction default for position partial setpoint 0 Cause of error remedy e Position control gain too high control loop oscillation gt change machine data for control gain MD32200 POSCTRL_GAIN servo gain factor e Standstill window too small gt change machine data MD36030 STANDSTILL_POS_TOL standstill tolerance e Axis is mechanically pushed out of position gt eliminate cause 3 2 4 Clamping monitoring Function If the axis must be clamped once it has been positioned the clamping monitoring function can be activated via IS Clamping in progress DB380x DBX2 3 This may be necessary as the axis can be forced further from the setpoint than the standstill tolerance permits during the clamping process The amount by which the axis may leave the command position is specified in MD36050 CLAMP_POS_TOL clamping tolerance for interface signal Clamping active Effectiveness Clamping monitoring is activated by the interface signal Clamping active It replaces standstill monitoring during clamping Clamping monitoring is active on axes and position
11. 41200 JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO JOG velocity for the spindle Spindle specific 43230 SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS Programmable spindle speed limit G96 15 8 3 Interface signals Number Bit Name DB30x DBD0000 J sid M function for the spindle DINT axis specific DB30x DBD0004 J si S function for the spindle REAL axis specific DB380x DBB0000 Feed override S Axis spindle disable DB380x DBX2001 6 DB380x DBX2002 6 DB380x DBX2002 4 Ose llationvia PLC S O DB380x DBB2003 Spindle override S D 3 Resynchronize spindle during positioning 1 spindle Invert M3 M4 Set direction of rotation counterclockwise Set direction of rotation clockwise Oscillation speed Oscillation via PLC DB390x DBX0000 6 DB390x DBX0001 6 DB390x DBX2000 3 Change gear stage S Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 167 Speed control loop active o Speed control loop active Name DB390x DBX2001 0 Speed limit exceeded DB390x DBX2002 Active spindle control mode DB390x DBX2002 6 Active spindle mode oscillation mode o o lt DB390x DBx2002 0 Constantcuttingrate active G96 16 Feed 16 1 Path feedrate F 16 1 1 Path feedrate F Functionality The feedrate F is the path velocity of the tool along the programmed workpiece contour The individual axis velocities therefore result from the portion of the axis path in the overall distance to be traversed The feedrate F is effective for the interpolation types G1
12. The first output of the M command for counting after resetting the counter applies as start point This M command is set in MD27880 PART_COUNTER or MD27882 PART_COUNTER_MCODE for the relevant counter Function Manual 100 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Display o Ta Sett The contents of the counters are visible on the screen in the lt OFFSET gt operating area orrset gt SD data gt Tine counter Parts in total B Parts reguired Part count z e Part total AC_TOTAL_PARTS e Part required 4C_REQUIRED_PARTS e Part count AC_ACTUAL_PARTS AC_SPECIAL_PARTS not available for display M Part count is also visible in the information line of the AUTO window of the lt MACHINE gt operating area macnine References SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual 9 7 Data table 9 7 1 Machine data NC specific machine data Identifier Pp Name General 10702 IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK Prevent single block stop 11450 SEARCH_RUN_MODE Block search parameter settings 11602 ASUP_START_MASK Ignore stop conditions for ASUP 11604 ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL Priorities for ASUP_START_MASK Basic machine data of the channel Identifier Po Name Channel specific 20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB n Assignment between geometry axis and channel axis GEOaxis no 0 2 20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB n Geometry axis name in channel GEOaxis no 0 2 20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USEDJ n Machine axis number v
13. e Reduced wear to mechanical parts of the machine e Reduction of the excitation of high frequency difficult to control vibrations of the machine 5 2 Jerk limitation on interpolator level Selection and deselection of jerk limited acceleration MD32431 MAX_AX_JERK maximum axis specific jerk during path motion can limit the change in acceleration per machine axis individually It only acts on the axes interpolated by the path when SOFT is active Jerk limitation is implemented entirely on the interpolator level Acceleration with jerk limitation is activated by The program code SOFT in the part program SOFT is modal and causes deselection of the abrupt acceleration profile BRISK If SOFT is programmed in a block with path axes the previous block is ended with exact stop Acceleration with jerk limitation SOFT is deactivated by The program code BRISK in the part program BRISK is modal If path axes are programmed in a block with BRISK the previous block is ended with exact stop BRISK activates the profile with abrupt acceleration changes associated with v t linear velocity control Applicability Path related jerk limitation is available for interpolating path axes in operating modes AUTO and MDA The SOFT and BRISK acceleration profiles can be used in traverse modes exact stop G9 G60 continuous path modes G64 and with LookAhead The profiles are also active with the dry run feedrate function With alarms that trigger
14. gt lt Open FORM s gt lt SOPTKEY u gt lt SOFTKEY gt lt MENU gt NAVIGATION This tag defines the menu to be called This tag can only be set within a softkey block Syntax lt NAVIGATION gt menu name lt NAVIGATION gt Example lt menu name main gt lt softkey POSITION 1 gt lt caption gt sec form lt caption gt lt navigation gt sec_ menu lt navigation gt lt softkey gt lt menu gt lt Mmenu Name Sec menu gt lt open form name sec form gt lt SOPL Key Dack gt lt navigation gt main lt navigation gt lt softkey back gt lt menu gt Function Manual 230 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 aoe Meng OOOO OPEN_FORM PROPERTY Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 The tag opens the dialog form given under the name Attribute e name Name of the dialog form Syntax lt OPEN FORM name lt form name gt gt Example lt menu name main gt lt open form name main form gt lt softkey POSITION 1 gt lt caption gt main form lt caption gt lt navigation gt main lt navigation gt lt softkey gt lt menu gt lt form name marin Torm gt lt init gt lt init gt lt paint gt lt paint gt lt form gt This tag can be used to define additional properties for an operator control Attributes max lt maximum value gt min lt minimum value gt default lt pre assignment gt factor conversion factor col
15. 2 Vano s Interface woe 1 keene ne ee ee ee ee eee eee ee ee nee 2 1 cener ean eee eee nS E eee eee ee ee 2 2 Signals from PLC to NCK setecccctecccestecesnccttecdencctdtcsceasteccesdvetenssntecbanccadicansevanaseonnciieiat ad s ieir Eniri 2 2 1 ACCESS UN OZ NON acetic cetera ee ees esis acess a aoa end eae eednet ceaeseeeate 2 2 2 Gonera NS pec era etc c seco E E E E E 2 2 3 Signals for digital drives tO AXIS SPINIE cc ceccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesseeeeeseeeeesseeeeseeeeeesaneeessneeessaeees 2 3 Signals TOM NGKO PLG oh gs pcre peace cre enone Era ARAE RESER EE aR eae geen oh EET aE 2 3 1 eee e e A E T ease desis se ee E E 13 2 3 2 Signals for digital drives from AXIS SPINIE cccceeecceceeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeesaeueeeseaeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeseeeeesaeees 2 4 Signals from PLC to HMI ccccccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeseeeesseeeeseaseeessaeeeesaaeees 2 5 nae O ANIO FLC e oeae E E E E E 2 6 Usar IMET ACE ene eee E E E eee eee 2 6 1 TT MO E E E E E E E E E E A E 2 6 2 FSGS FP E E E E E E 2 6 3 Reading variables from the NCK af a ccccccccccseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeeessaeeeesaaeeeeaeeeeesaees 2 6 4 Writing variables from the NCK afea ccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseaeeessaeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeas 2 1 NORUL IO ETE 2 8 na On ag EC a E E E eres 3 AS MONON a E E A E A O ee e
16. DB120x DBW1002 gt s O DB120x DBW1004 f DB120x DBD1008 f 0 O DB120x DBW3004 Read Data from NCK variable x data type of the variables WORD Variable linShift Translation of a settable work offset channel specific settable frames They only exist if MD18601 MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES gt 0 There are the frame indices e 0 ACTFRAME current resulting work offset e 1 IFRAME current settable work offset e 2 PFRAME current programmable work offset 3 EXTFRAME current external work offset 4 TOTFRAME current total work offset total of ACTFRAME and EXTFRAME e 5 ACTBFRAME current total base frame 6 SETFRAME current 1st system frame PRESET scratching 7 EXTSFRAME current 2nd system frame PRESET scratching 8 PARTFRAME current 3rd system frame TCARR and PAROT with orientable tool carrier e 9 TOOLFRAME current 4th system frame TOROT and TOFRAME e 10 MEASFRAME result frame for workpiece and tool gauging e 11 WPFRAME current 5th system frame workpiece reference points e 12 CYCFRAME current 6th system frame cycles The max frame index is 12 The value of numMachAxes is contained in the variable with variable index 4 Pp Variable tin shift in DB120x DBB1000 DB120x DBB1001 fe DB120x 0BW1004 o O DB120x DBD1008 S O Variable numMachAxes No of the highest existing channel axis If there are no gap between channels this corresponds to the number of existing axes in the channel
17. DB2500 DBD4008 Sfunction 2 REAL forma S DB2500 DBB4012 Extended address of S function 2 BYTE Z lt o lt lt DB2500 DBD5000 DB2500 DBW6004 DB2500 DBD6000 DB2500 DBW6012 DB2500 DBD6008 a od DB370x DBD0000 M function forthe spindle DINT axis specific o o o o o o o o DB370x DBD0004 S function for the spindle REAL axis speciic 9 Operating Modes Program Operation 9 1 Brief description Program operation The execution of part programs or part program blocks in the AUTO or MDA mode is referred to as program operation During execution the program sequence can be controlled by PLC interface signals and commands Channel A channel constitutes a unit in which a part program can be executed A channel is assigned an interpolator with program processing by the system A certain mode is valid for it The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system has one channel Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 a 9 2 Operating modes 9 2 1 Operating modes Activating The required operating mode is activated by the interface signals in the DB3000 DBBO000 If several modes are selected at the same time the priority of the operating modes is as follows e JOG high priority The axes can be traversed manually with the handwheel or the traversing keys Channel specific signals and interlocks are not observed e MDA Program blocks can be processed e AUTO lower priority Automatic proces
18. DB3300 DBX0001 0 Each machine axis assigned to the channel can be referenced with channel specific referencing this is achieved internally on the control by simulating the plus minus traversing keys Axis specific MD34110 REFP_CYCLE_NR axis sequence for channel spec referencing can be used to define the sequence in which the machine data is referenced If all axes entered in MD34110 REFP_CYCLE_NR have reached their end points the All axes referenced interface signal DB3300 DBX0004 2 is enabled Special features e Referencing is aborted with Reset interface signal DB3000 DBX0000 7 All axes that have not reached their reference point by this time are considered to be not referenced IS Referencing active is reset and alarm 20005 is signaled e Working area limiting and software limit switches are not active for non referenced machine axes e The defined axis specific accelerations are observed at all times during referencing except when alarms occur e The reference point approach can be started only with the direction key for the direction stored in MD34010 REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS Referencing in the part program One or more axes that have lost their reference can be referenced at the same time The sequence of the individual phases is identical to axis specific referencing except that the process is started with the G74 command instead of the plus minus traversing keys and is done via the machine axis identifiers Reference
19. Gantry trip limit exceeded IS is also output if the gantry grouping is jammed no servo enable gantry grouping in Hold state The monitoring functions are deactivated while the grouping is operating in Follow up mode Extended monitoring An extended monitoring function can be activated with the following machine data MD37150 GANTRY_FUNCTION_MASK gantry functions Referencing and synchronization of gantry axes As the example Gantry type milling machine shows the forced coupling between gantry axes must remain intact in all operating modes as well as immediately after power ON In cases where an incremental measuring system is being used for the leading or the synchronized axis the reference point must be approached while maintaining the axis coupling immediately after machine power ON After every axis in the gantry grouping has approached its reference point any misalignment that may exist between the axes must be eliminated this is known as the gantry synchronization process As soon as this has been carried out the following interface signal is sent to the PLC DB390x DBX5005 5 gantry grouping is synchronized The operational sequence for referencing and synchronizing gantry axes is described in detail under the section Referencing and synchronizing gantry axes Page 44 Closed loop control The dynamic control response settings for the coupled gantry axes must be identical see Start up of gantry axes Page 50
20. Press this hardkey on the PPU and the following horizontal softkey appears after you import the _ desired files into the control Then press this softkey PROGRAM User Cycle 05 10 05 2011705715 YCLE888 6 66060 6 660600 MT CYCLE888 6 60606 6 60006 MT _N_SC COM f SPATH _N_CST_DIR f VERSION 84 03 03 80 Feb 68 2010 1 CHANGE 804 01 10 808 Jan 24 2007 1 Zyklenunterstuetzung_fuer_862D_P2 1 CN1 User_CYCLE1 1 1 1 Z CN2 User_CYCLE2 1 1 1 CN3 User_CYCLE3 1 1 1 Z CN4 User_CYCLE4 1 1 1 Z CNS CYCLE888 1 R71 80 10 6 6 6 856046 85840 VAR11 1 user r A Re user Cycle_2 user Cycle_3 user Cycle_4 user Cycle888 wae 2 Press this softkey to open the following window iR m Biss Cancel 3 Set the parameters as desired and then press one of the following two softkeys OK Save the settings Cancel Quit the cycle Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0O 08 2013 201 18 7 9 Editing the user cycle screens You can edit the softkeys identifiers bitmaps or parameters for user cycles To do so export the relevant files and edit them on a PC After that import them back to the respective folders and restart the control system 18 8 Loading machine manufacturer s MD description files Perform the following operations to access the OEM MD description file folder SYSTEM 4s N gt Sus 888D lt SYSTEM gt operating are
21. SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Note MD20700 REFP_NC_START_LOCK 1 prevents a part program from being started alarm output if not all required axes are referenced 14 2 Referencing with incremental measuring systems Time sequence The referencing sequence for incremental measuring systems can be subdivided into three phases 1 Phase Traversing to the reference cam 2 Phase Synchronization with the zero mark 3 Phase Traversing to the reference point Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 147 IS Deceleration of reference point approach DB380x DBX1000 7 IS Traverse command plus DB390x DBX0004 7 IS Traverse command minus DB390x DBx0004 6 9 IS Traversing key plus minus DB380x DBX0004 7 and 6 IS Referenced synchronized DB390x DBX0000 4 Position measuring system zero mark Velocity MD 34020 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM Reference point approach velocity MD 34070 REFP_VELO_POS s _ s Reference point positioning velocity MD 34040 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER Reference point creep velocity Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Figure 14 1 Referencing sequence with incremental measuring system example Characteristics of traversing to the reference point cam phase 1 The feedrate override and feedrate stop is in effect The machine axis can be stopped started The cam must be reached within the traversing distance in MD34030 REFP_MAX_C
22. are stored in the data for the probe triggering points not in the tool offsets Note The internal NC programs for measuring or calibrating are configured so that measuring is carried out with the rising edge of the probe Measuring sequence The JOG mode is selected The measuring feed is entered The probe is calibrated or the precise measuring trigger points are entered Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 141 Heas 1 Depending on the tool type the measuring sequence is controlled via this softkey and further kd tool i softkeys HEER 2 The IS Measuring in JOG is active DB1700 DBX0003 7 is transmitted to the PLC from the d toal HMI by pressing this softkey PLC can specify a different T number to the active one via the IS E T number for tool measuring in JOG DB1900 DBD5004 If the probe switches when the selected axis is traversed NCK outputs the IS Probe 1 active DB2700 DBX0001 0 The PLC then sets IS Feed disable DB3200 DBX0006 0 and NCK stops the axis movement Feed disable is maintained as long as a traverse key is depressed in JOG and the IS Measuring in JOG is active DB1700 DBX0003 7 is set After this the PLC outputs the IS Reset DB3000 DBX000 7 The traverse movement in JOG is thereby cancelled 3 HMI recognizes switching of the probe and outputs the change mode to AUTO IS command AUTOMATIC mode DB1800 DBX0000 0 after the traverse key has been released immediately after handwhee
23. caption gt main dialogue lt navigation gt sub menu 8 lt navigation gt c lt softkey gt sub menu 1 lt menu gt lt OPEN_FORM name dialogue 1 gt lt menu gt Co Co CI lt menu name sub menu 1 gt dialogue1 E CI C Cc COCICICICICICI lt menu name sub menu 8 gt lt OPEN_FORM name dialogue 8 gt lt menu gt Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 221 PRAE Menn OOOO O FORM This tag contains the description of a user dialog Attributes e color Background color of the dialog box color coding see Chapter color coding name Identifier of the form xpos X position of the top left corner of the dialog box optional ypos Y position of the top left corner optional width Extension in the X direction in pixels optional height Extension in the Y direction in pixels optional Dialog messages INIT PAINT TIMER CLOSE FOCUS_IN FORM continued Syntax lt FORM name lt dialog name gt color ff 0000 gt Example lt FORM name R Parameter gt lt INIT gt lt DATA ACCESS type true gt lt CAPTION gt R Parameter lt CAPTION gt lt CONTROL name editl xpos 322 ypos 34 refvar nck Channel Parameter R 1 gt lt CONTROL name edit2 xpos 322 ypos 54 refvar nck Channel Parameter R 2 gt lt CONTROL name edit3 xpos 322 ypos 74 lt INIT gt lt PAINT gt lt
24. e g External processing the axes stop at that last possible block boundary e Emptying of the buffer If the NC part program requests that the run in be synchronized with the main run empty the buffer e g STOPRE this involves an implicit block related velocity reduction or exact stop Stopping because of synchronization does not cause contour violations However stopping is undesirable especially in continuous path mode because it can cause backing off 4 3 Exact stop With the exact stop function G60 G9 all the path axes must reach the programmed block end point Only when all path axes have reached the exact stop criterion is the block change performed The velocity at the block transition is practically zero That is e The path axes at the block end point are decelerated almost to rest without overshoot e The delay for fulfilling the exact stop criterion prolongs the machining time e The delay for fulfilling the exact stop criterion can cause backing off The use of the exact stop function is suitable for precise traversing of contours Exact stop is not suitable if e Exact traversing of the contour on the basis of the criterion e g exact stop fine can deviate from the programmed contour in order to achieve faster machining e An absolutely constant velocity is required Function Manual 30 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 Activate exact stop The Exact stop function can be selected in the NC part program by
25. e g table Since the actual position acquired by the encoder also leads the real actual position of the table the table travels too short a distance see diagram below The backlash compensation value must be entered as a positive value here normal case ns Table Backlash Encoder actual value leads the real actual value table The table does not traverse far enough Figure 10 1 Positive backlash normal case Negative backlash The encoder lags behind the machine part e g table the table then travels too far The correction value entered is negative High backlash compensation values The user has the option of applying the backlash compensation value gradually in several increments when the relevant axis reverses direction This prevents an excessive setpoint step change from causing specific axis errors The contents of the axis specific MD36500 ENC_CHANGE_TOL determine the increment with which the backlash compensation value MD32450 BACKLASH is applied Please note that the backlash compensation is fully calculated only after n servo cycles n MD32450 MD36500 An excessive time span can cause the triggering of standstill monitoring alarms If MD36500 is greater than MD32450 the compensation is performed in a servo cycle Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 105 10 3 Interpolatory compensation 10 3 1 General Terminology Compensation value The difference between the axis position measured by the
26. rated output voltage must be checked e Check optimization of the speed controller e Check smooth running of the axes e Check machine data for traversing movements feed override acceleration max speeds 3 2 2 Position monitoring Function In order to ensure that an axis reaches the required position within the specified time the timer that can be configured in MD36020 POSITIONING_TIME time delay exact stop fine is started at the end of each motion block setpoint has reached target and when the timer runs out a check made to ascertain whether the axis has reached its setpoint within the tolerance of MD36010 STOP_LIMIT_FINE exact stop fine For details on Exact stop coarse and fine see Chapter Continuous Path Mode Exact Stop and Look Ahead Page 29 Function Manual 22 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Vors Effective tolerance for standstill and clamping monitoring Actual value ee es Ge Interface signal Clamping in progress V380x MD CLAMP_POS_TOL Setpoint MD STANDSTILL_POS_TOL MD STOP_LIMIT_ COARSE SS SS MD STOP_LIMIT_FINE J MD Exact stop fine interface signal STANDSTILL_ Exact stop course interface signal DELAY_TIME MD POSITIONING_TIME Figure 3 1 Relation between position standstill and clamping monitoring Effectiveness Positioning monitoring is always activated after the termination of motion blocks according to the setpoint setpoint ha
27. you can assign licenses to hardware in a standard Web browser To conclude the assignment you must manually enter the License Key at the control system through the HMI user interface 19 1 1 Assigning licenses Requirements The following prerequisites must be met when you assign a license to a piece of hardware via direct access and HMI user interface e The control system is powered up e The login data for direct access e g per CoL is available License number Dispatch note number e The type of the control system is available e The CF card serial number from the CompactFlash Card system is available Note Ensure that the CF card serial number displayed is just the one you want to make the assignment for The assignment of a license to a piece of hardware cannot be reversed via the Web License Manager Operating sequences TAN 1 Select the desired operating area ALARM SHIFT Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 247 1y bie Serv 2 Ua displ gt Version gt License key 3 4 5 1y bie Serv 6 Um displ gt Version gt License key T v OK 8 Note Press these three softkeys in succession Then you can find the CF card serial number on the displayed screen Enter the licence key to activate the optiont The option is activated after Restartt CF card serial number PG2H1267H6H6716 Order No of the HCU module 6FC5612 16746 60AH G
28. 08 2013 16 3 2 Feedrate disable and feedrate spindle stop General The Feed disable or Feed spindle stop brings the axes to a standstill The path contour is maintained exception G33 block Feed disable The channel specific interface signal Feed disable DB3200 DBX0006 0 will stop all axes geometry and special axes in all operating modes This feed disable is not effective if G33 is active it is however active with G63 G331 G332 Feed stop for axes in the WCS The Feed stop interface signals DB3200 DBX1000 3 DB3200 DBX1004 3 and DB3200 DBX1008 3 are used to stop the geometry axes axes in the WCS during traversing in the workpiece coordinate system WCS in the JOG mode Axis specific feed stop The axis specific Feed stop interface signal DB380x DBX0004 3 is used to stop the relevant machine axis In the AUTO mode If the Feed stop is performed for a path axis all the axes traversed in the current block and all axes participating in the axis group are stopped Only the current axis is stopped in JOG mode The axis specific Feed stop is active when G33 is active but contour deviations thread error Spindle stop The Spindle stop interface signal DB380x DBX0004 3 is used to stop the spindle Spindle stop is active with G33 and G63 Note Contour deviations thread error 16 3 3 Feedrate override via a machine control panel General The operator can use the feedrate override switch
29. 0BAO 08 2013 251 19 2 3 Manual Machine Plus To activate the Manual Machine Plus function proceed as follows 4s N 1 Select the desired operating area ALARM SHIFT kursga 2 Press these three softkeys in succession Then the following window is displayed II displ 21 mme Aoa rae g Option Set Licensed Additional NC Axis Version 6FC5800 0AK70 OYBA a Bidirectional GFCS800 BANS4 GVB0 Oo Harai Nan API GFCSea0 APG BVED T it Tracyl Options ercseae LORESO YB 5 Gantry BASIC GFCSe00 OnSs1 GVBe Oo If you have entered the license key of this function the corresponding box is ticked as shown below Hanual Machine Plus 6FCS860 8APH BYE6 L 3 Press this hardkey to activate the function Then the corresponding box is ticked as shown below Hanual Machine Plus 6FCS860 8APH B Eh Ca NEK reset 4 Press this softkey and a warm restart is triggered on the control system After the restart is po finished the corresponding software function is active Function Manual 252 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 19 2 4 Transmit Tracyl To activate the Transmit Tracyl function proceed as follows 4s WN 1 Select the desired operating area ALARM SHIFT huess 2 Press these three softkeys in succession Then the following window is displayed tT dis 1 d aea BA A ate 2013705721 Ei Option Set Licensed Additional NC Axis Version 6FC5800 8AK70
30. 0BAO 08 2013 5 10 5 Friction compensation quadrant error COMPENSATION cece eeeccceececeeceeceececeececeeeeeseeeeseeceseeeesseeesseeeees 10 5 1 General function description cccceeccceececeeeeceeeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeseaceseeceeseeeeseeeeseaeessaeessaeeeseeessaeessaeeeseneesens 10 5 2 Supplementary conditions cccccsscccseeccseeccsececaeeeceueeseaneeeaueesaueeseuaeeesneesaueecaueeseueeseseeseaeeecaueesauaesnanes 10 5 3 Friction compensation with a constant compensation value cccceccceecceeceaeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeaees 10921 P nchonacivaNO Mesene a OEA a Na 10372 COMM ION e r a a E a 10 5 4 Friction compensation with acceleration dependent compensation value 10 5 4 141 Description Of functions nsennnenneennnennnennnennnrrnnnrrnnrrnnrrnnrrnnrrsrirsrirsnrrsnirenirenirenrrsrinerinerrnerinnrrnnrrnnrrnnnnne 10 5 4 2 UNCON SCHV ALON cscasapevaceyevedersuncesiauneraidacsswestsaunvyedencsane aaws ured coesnes EGINE E UES EEEE IANN ENEKO AEn Eia 10 543 Camme SIO TC esse aa a a aii 10 5 5 Compensation value for short traversing blocks ccccceecceeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeeas 10 6 Daa DE a E E E E 10 6 1 Machine dala ene ene ee ee eee ee re ee ee ee een ee 10 6 2 1 119 6 9 2 a e eee ec nen en es er Cee ee eee ee ee E 10 6 3 internace Signals esskan EEEa iS AASER AEE REENA DAEA basa cecinnecioeas eenetencantuinneebaeseaedceereceumacnee
31. 10 3 Configuration files EasyXLanguage Loading the configuration files SYSTEM 4s N The generated configuration files must be copied from a USB stick to the lt SYSTEM gt operating area 2 a j Sys SHED Ire data gt FS data _ menu gt HMI data gt EasyXLanguage scripts folder See the screen below E Customized bitmaps DiUser cycle files Oo CI0EM online help txt png bnmp Q Extended user text file falme txt C70EM HD description file md_descr txt CI0EM manual Coemmanual pdf CIPLC alarm texts falcu txt CI0EM slideshow bnp pnq 70EH R variable name file Crparan_nanme txt Service planner task name file svc_tasks txt Files for configuration The following files in the control system s EasyXLanguage scripts folder are needed to configure the user dialogs File type Name of the file Meaning S Script file xmidial xml This script file uses XML tags to control the process image of the configured softkey menus and dialog aes forms in the custom operating area on the HMI Text file almc txt This text file contains the texts for the menus and dialog forms for individual languages Bitmaps bmp E g text bmp Archive with the bitmaps png E g text png The control system supports BMP and PNG formats XML files inserted in the E g machine_settings xml These files also contain programmed instructions for xmidial xml control file displ
32. 125 The compensation value for the end position is AA_ENC_COMPI0 k AXi Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 107 The compensation value of interpolation point k is used for all positions larger than the end position exception table with modulo function Compensation values which are greater than k are inactive e Compensation with modulo function A4A_ENC_COMP_IS_MODULO 0 AXi 1 When compensation with modulo function is activated the compensation table is repeated cyclically i e the compensation value at position A4A_ENC_COMP_MAxX interpolation point 4A_ENC_COMP 0 k AXi is immediately followed by the compensation value at position AA_ENC_COMP_MIN interpolation point AA_ENC_COMPJ 0 0 AxXi For rotary axes with modulo 360 it is therefore suitable to program 0 SAA_ENC_COMP_MIN as the starting position and 360 AA_ENC_COMP_MAX as the end position In this case both compensation values must be entered directly When the compensation values are entered it is important that all interpolation points within the defined range be assigned a compensation value i e there should be no gaps Otherwise the compensation value that was left over from previous entries at these positions is used for these interpolation points Note Table parameters that contain position data are interpreted through MD10240 SCALING _SYSTEM_IS_METRIC 0 in inches The position data can be automatically re calculated by performing
33. 17 3 Tool offset Tool compensation through D function A tool can have up to nine cutting edges The nine tool cutting edges are assigned to the D functions D1 to D9 Up to 128 data fields D numbers for tool compensation blocks can be stored in the control system simultaneously The tool cutting edge is programmed with D1 edge 1 to D9 edge 9 The tool cutting edge always refers to the currently active tool An active tool cutting edge D1 to D9 without an active tool TO is inactive Tool cutting edge DO deselects all tool offsets of the active tool Function Manual 176 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Selection of the cutting edge when changing tool When a new tool new T number has been programmed and the old one replaced the following options are available for you to select the cutting edge e The cutting edge number is programmed e The cutting edge number is not programmed D1 is active automatically Activating the tool offset D1 to D9 activates the tool compensation offset for a cutting edge on the active tool Tool length compensation and tool radius compensation can be activated at different times e Tool length compensation TLC is performed on the first traversing motion of the axis on which the TLC is to act This traversing motion must be a linear interpolation GO G1 e Tool radius compensation TRC becomes active when G41 G42 is programmed in the active plane G17 G18 or G19 The selection of tool radius comp
34. 20001 is output Alarm 20001 can occur if the reference cam is too short and the machine axis travels over it when decelerating in phase 1 If the reference cam extends to the end of travel of the axis an inadmissible starting point for referencing after the cam can be excluded Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 149 Reference cam adjustment The reference cam must be calibrated exactly The following factors influence the response time of the control when detecting the reference cam Reference point approach delay interface signal e Switching accuracy of the reference cam switch e Delay of the reference cam switch NC contact e Delay at the PLC input e PLC cycle time e Internal processing time Practice has shown that the signal edge of the reference cam which is required for synchronizing is aligned between two synchronized pulses zero marks This can be achieved by e Set MD34080 REFP_MOVE_DIST MD34090 REFP_MOVE_DIST CORR MD 34100 REFP_SET POS 0 e Reference axis e n JOG mode traverse the axis to half the path length between the two zero marks This path is independent of the pitch of the leadscrew S and the gear ratio n e g S 10 mm rev n 1 1 produces a path of 5 mm e Calibrate the cam switch so that switching is done at exactly this position IS Reference point approach delay DB380x DBX1000 7 e Alternatively the value of MD34092 REFP_CAM_SHIFT can be changed instead of moving the cam switch
35. 25 gt oo 15 2 2 opde CONTO MOJE epee eel em ane ec ee ee ee ee 15 2 3 Spindle oscillation mode cece eeeccceececeeeecceeeeceeeeceaeeeseeeeceeeeseeeesseeeeseeeeseaeessaeeeseeeeseueessaeessaeeeseeesaaeessaees 15 2 4 Spindle positioning MOUE sesso een nce ee oe ee eae ene nae eee ee Pee ea enter E eae eee 15 3 SVNECMONL ANON gee emtemeere ere emcee ena ce E Pre eer eee eee ene eee 15 4 CCTs Lite 2 8 ame r g 9 ae Nene eo eR nt ee ee ee eee ee eee 15 5 POOL AMIN vaascatddcasstatiesmutea Sa A EN E E E E E E enetans E R E 15 6 Spindle MMOMIGOMING srersiceriiirnnia saniar a a i aea aai a rae iaai 15 6 1 SIF TOM COMING sessen sari ir EAA EA EAA EEA EEA E EAEE ESENE EAEE 15 6 2 Axis spindle stationary sucsenee vied ciavediuresvaccicaesetauneruindl ine vetiunserivousnevatadtiesindlatesndescieracaisnardeitierncdbienseincevice 15 6 3 Spindle in setpoint FANGE cece ecccseccceeeeeceeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeceeeessaeeeseeeeseeeessaeeesaeeeseusessaeessaeeesaeeeseneesaaees 15 6 4 Maximum Spindle SCC ssri oiii 15 6 5 Minimum maximum speed for gear stage ccccceccccseeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseneeesaeeeesaeeeeeas 15 6 6 Max encoder limit frequency cccecccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaeeeneas 15 6 7 Target point MONItOYINg sestrunctecenttceareiararuneiticderois tinned i A Ea SE ed EEE EAE Eni E EAEE 15 7 PRVANOG PN a E E a E 15 8 REEE e EE
36. 3 Interface SION ANS se acicciceececdecsatehcineueseeceeaduwiaesnaseieceaatoloesaxvoisdaghawseeeoieasseneadieinieeaseiedeadeobeeuieeecdenddyiieben oiadegtactes PROC CIC ALON cease te eS oes rts e eam se evet R tiene sedan teas ceeenieaeniena Geese R anes 5 1 Acceleration profiles cccccccccsecccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesseeeeseeeeseeeeseeesseeesaeceseueessneetseeesaeeesaes 5 2 Jerk limitation on interpolator leVEl ccccceccsecccssececcceeeceeeceueecaeeceeeceueesseecsueeseecseeceueesueesaeessuessaeeseeesaass 5 3 Jerk MUON INT MOJE ca asec ces sea Scesiaed Sacre tu sedate sa tides eto ard be geaese ad kdate ba se seteeo maid be eeieasadene 5 4 Beel Co ea eer es ee ER Rn ee RO ne ee a ee ae O ete re ee eee Ree eee SONY AX OS oniinn aaRS AEA E AEAEE OAA gnsnnnonaeonenantinae tats aseuasap onsmunonameaoiastnecssteniaeanapansaens 6 1 Brier deSerip UO 9 pene ee ee nee ee een eee ee ee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee ee 6 2 Sane AXES UNCION sesia Eaa eaaa 6 3 Referencing and synchronizing gantry AXES cceccccceeeceeceeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeesseeeesaeeeesaeeeeeas 6 3 1 Tigh tore 6 ed a p MEAE ert ee tense tte A ie et arc ts TEE EAEE EEEE E E E EE E E EE EEE 6 3 2 Automatic synchronization sccneicsarasassscsautincarantviaciatinesreieiieientineinaititiandinnid et eeereieindinsiseititess 6 3 3 POMS VOTO ea eco ads acts eo cn seme a E acces EE E Semana ae ee Seeger oes E E EEEE seeeeede aentees 6 4
37. 9 6 WOT DIECE COUNIOT eee ee ene a ene eee e nE cee eee ee ee eee ee eee eee eee ee 9 7 TA AO spac cast esceoraes senate cate e deed on Gigi yeasidas tou bocneeascdaet aaceaehscaseeeiens 9 7 1 Machine da lene ete ere aE oie en cee ee een oe eee 9 7 2 GENIC ON EE E E E yaminaex tne E E A E E 9 7 3 a 9 2 et s e c 6 9 2 cae renee eee EEE E E E 10 ONDE IS QUOI eis ccatecandescoeere ca nianascacsig cesta natitaatanuat idan putecteabacide sptesuatoimeat aai 10 1 Brier desorintO seseina ee eee ee eee 10 2 Backlash COMMONS OM s srana R E RAEE AEAEE EAA EERE E R A EASRA EARE 10 3 Interpolatory compensation ccccceccceeccecccececueceuceceesuecsueeceecuecsueeceesaueesueesaeeseueesueeseeessueeaaeesaeesaass 10 3 1 Ener ee E ere ene ee ee eee eee 10 3 2 A S TE EE EEEE A pane basen OEE PET A ET E A E E E E TTE 10 3 3 Direction dependent leadscrew error compensation cccceeccceecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeeseeees 10331 Descriphon Of TUMGUIOMS secie EEEE EE Uaa Commissionig eeren rera aE E AE a ends aa 27 gt 99 gt e E eer 10 4 Following error compensation feedforward control ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeas 10 4 1 Sy ge nee a eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ae 10 4 2 Speed feedforward control nego sci cs cece ceneie den st wceeSanadedewss icteceiie dances uccesenaicseusenuetecenteeveuccaanesdanassianceanesedenteche Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40
38. BYB a A Bidirectional GFCS800 BANS4 BVB0 o Manual Machine PL GFCSAa0 OAPE BVEO O Tr mit T 1 Options GFCSea0 OASSO 8VBO O Gantry BASIC DEERE O If you have entered the license key of this function the corresponding box is ticked as shown below Transnit Tracyl 6FCS866 6ASS6 87B8 a 3 Press this hardkey to activate the function Then the corresponding box is ticked as shown below Transnit Tracyl 6FCS866 6ASS6 87B8 D NEK reset 4 Press this softkey and a warm restart is triggered on the control system After the restart is po finished the corresponding software function is active Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 253 19 2 5 Gantry BASIC To activate the Gantry BASIC function proceed as follows 4s WN 1 Select the desired operating area ALARM SHIFT kursga 2 Press these three softkeys in succession Then the following window is displayed Ji displ 1241 A eaten e g Option Set Licensed Additional NC Axis Version 6FC5880 GAK70 BYBO a Bidirectional 6FCS800 AMS4 OVBO gi Manual Machine P1 6FC5800 0APO7 BVBO m T it Tracyl Options 6FC5889 GASEO YB 0O Gantry BASIC 6FC5800 GASS1 8YBO m KI If you have entered the license key of this function the corresponding box is ticked as shown below Gantry BASIC 6FCS8660 80ASS1 6786 L 3 Press this hardkey to activate the function Then the corresponding box is ticked as sh
39. C70EM HD description file md_descr txt Oo CIPLC alarm texts Calcu txt C70EH slideshow bnp pnq C70EH R variable name file rparan_name txt C7Service planner task name file svc_tasks txt Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 187 8 Press this hardkey to access the OEM manual folder and then enter the manual folder that is the above mentioned third level folder Paste the copied file s under this folder with the following Paste gt Q images DIR 5 exti txt 5 helpi txt 5 helpz png 2 mnanual_zZ txt 5 oennanual pdf D 9 Press these two keys in succession HELP Then you can view your own machine manufacturer s manual gt DEH Hanual 10 Use this softkey to exit the machine manufacturer s manual Exit 18 3 Calling a standard cycle with auxiliary functions For the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control you can call user cycles with M codes or T codes With this function you can perform operations such as changing machine tools Note M codes or T codes for calling user cycles must not be in the same program segment Calling cycles with M6 Configure the parameters shown in the table below to activate an M code for calling a standard cycle No Name Unit Value Description 22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE rn a Activating tool parameters with an M code 22560 TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE 206 The M code for activating tool parameters 10715 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE 0
40. Commissioning Page 117 A sufficiently large number of measured values for large path velocities and small circle radii is particularly important For the evaluation of the determined value pairs it is recommended that these are displayed graphically Anopt f a with Anopt optimum compensation value and a acceleration at the quadrant transitions The parameters of the adaptation characteristic determined from the measurement results must then be entered in the machine data Characteristic parameters Acceleration values The acceleration which arises at the quadrant transitions of the axis changing direction is calculated as follows a v r with v path velocity and r circle radius Note The path velocity and therefore the axial acceleration a can be varied simply via the feedrate override switch The acceleration values a1 a2 and a3 determined as characteristic parameters must be entered in the following machine data The following condition must be satisfied a1 lt a2 lt a3 e MD32550 MA_FRICT_COMP_ACCEL1 acceleration value 1 e MD32560 MA_FRICT_COMP_ACCEL2 acceleration value 2 e MD32570 MA_FRICT_COMP_ACCEL3 acceleration value 3 Compensation values The compensation values Anmin Anmax determined as characteristic parameters must be entered in the following machine data e MD32520 MA_FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX maximum compensation value e MD32530 MA_FRICT_COMP_CONST_MIN minimum compensation value Functio
41. DATA name PLC qb11 gt 15 lt DATA gt lt CONDITIION gt plc ib9 0 lt CONDITION gt lt DO WHILE gt 18 10 6 3 Color coding The color attribute uses the color coding scheme for the HTML language In terms of syntax color specifications consist of the hash character and six digits from the hexadecimal system with each color represented by two digits R Red G Green B Blue RRGGBB Example color ff0011 18 10 6 4 Special XML syntax Characters with special meanings in XML syntax have to be rewritten if they are to be displayed correctly by a general XML editor Function Manual 218 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 The following characters are affected Notation in XML 18 10 6 5 Operators The operation instruction processes the following operators Operator Meaning S O Soo Asome O ee att lt amp lt Ao OR operationinbits o L frog oRopeaton t e O OOO O O po Subtraction S O po Mutiphication tooo M fe Notegualto o O Operation instructions are processed from left to right It may make sense to place terms in parentheses under certain circumstances in order to define the priority for executing subterms 18 10 7 Addressing components Address identifiers for the desired data must be created to address NC variables PLC blocks or drive data An address consists of the subpaths component name and variable address A slash should be used as a separating character 18 10
42. Gantry grouping is synchronized 1 the dimensional offset between the leading and synchronized axes must be checked to ensure that it equals 0 Corrections may need to be made in the machine data mentioned above Input of gantry warning limit Once the reference point values for the leading and synchronized axes have been optimized so that the gantry axes are perfectly aligned with one another after synchronization the warning limit values for all axes must be entered in the following machine data MD37110 GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING gantry warning limit To do this the value must be increased incrementally until the value is just below the alarm limit exceeded response limit It is particularly important to check the acceleration phases This limit value also determines the position deviation value at which gantry synchronization is automatically started in the control Calculating and activating compensations In cases where the gantry axes require compensation sag or leadscrew error the compensation values for the leading axis and the synchronized axis must be calculated and entered in the appropriate parameters or tables Refer to the section titled Compensation Page 104 Function generator measuring function The activation of the function generator and measuring function using the startup tool will be aborted on the synchronized axis with an error message When an activation of the synchronized axis is absolutely necessa
43. NC MPF Reset ROY Reference point T F 5 nh MAlo UW BBE T Mh MZ 1o UW BBB F WC 6 6008 Tim S 1 Note To use the additional axis function after activating it set the following MDs first e MD10000 1 e MD20070 3 4 e MD20080 3 4 When necessary set the following MDs e MD30300 e MD30310 e MD30320 e MD30330 Function Manual 250 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 19 2 2 Bidirectional LEC To activate the bidirectional LEC function proceed as follows 4s N 1 Select the desired operating area ALARM SHIFT huess 2 Press these three softkeys in succession Then the following window is displayed tT dis 1 d aea BA Pied a A ate 2013705721 Ei Option Set Licensed Additional NC Axis Version 6FC5800 8AK70 BYB a A Bidirectional GFCS800 BANS4 BVB0 a Mardial Machine bt GFCSAa0 OAPE BVEO O T it Tracyl Options ercseas LORESO YB O i Gantry BASIC GFCSe00 OnSs1 BYBe o If you have entered the license key of this function the corresponding box is ticked as shown below Bidirectional screw 6FCS866 BANS4 8YBe m a Press this hardkey to activate the function Then the corresponding box is ticked as shown below Bidirectional screw 6FCS866 8ANS4 6YB6 D NCK 4 Press this softkey and a warm restart is triggered on the control system After the restart is reset ee f po finished the corresponding software function is active Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40
44. Page 44 e Inthe manner described below If a gantry grouping is switched to follow up mode monitoring of the actual values between the leading and synchronized axes is deactivated The grouping is no longer synchronized as a result The leading axis sets IS Gantry grouping is synchronous to 0 regardless of the positions of the axes If the gantry grouping is switched from follow up mode to position control mode axis synchronism is automatically restored provided the actual value monitoring function does not detect a difference between the positions of the leading and synchronized axes that is greater than the setting in MD36030 In this case a new setpoint is specified for the synchronized axis without interpolation The positional difference detected earlier is then corrected by the position controller The correction causes only the synchronized axis to move The motion sequence of the synchronized axis is similar to the situation in which the grouping switches from the Hold state to position control mode In this case the position specified by the position controller before the grouping is halted is set again on condition that the zero speed monitor has not activated alarm 25040 with follow up as alarm reaction in the meantime The same tolerance window is used for this type of automatic synchronization as for the standstill monitoring function MD36030 STANDSTILL_POS_TOL standstill tolerance Parameter set dependent loading t
45. Parameter Manual 9 5 Timers for program execution time Function Timers are provided under the Program execution time function and these can be used for monitoring technological processes in the program or only in the display These timers are read only There are timers that are always active Others can be deactivated via machine data Timers always active e Time since the last Control powerup with default values in minutes AN_SETUP_TIME The timer is automatically reset to zero in the case of Control power up with default values e Time since the last control powerup in minutes AN_POWERON_TIME It is reset to zero automatically with each power up of the control system Timers that can be deactivated The following timers are activated via the machine data default setting The start is timer specific Each active run time measurement is automatically interrupted in the stopped program state or for feedrate override zero The behavior of the activated timers for active dry run feedrate and program testing can be specified using machine data e Total execution time in seconds of NC programs in the AUTO mode in seconds AC_OPERATING_TIME In the AUTO mode the runtimes of all programs between NC start and end of program RESET are summed up The timer is zeroed with each power up of the control system e Runtime of the selected NC program in seconds AC_CYCLE_TIME The runtime between NC Start and End of
46. Start angle for thread 42010 THREAD_RAMP_DISP Starting and deceleration distance of feed axis in thread a oo G33 42100 DRY_ DRY RUNFEED o FEED Dry run feedrate ss s is SSCid run feedrate 9 7 3 Interface signals Operating mode signals Number Bit Name S PLC to NCK DB3000 DBX0000 0 AUTO mode DB3000 DBX0000 MDA mode DB3000 DBX0000 JOG mode Function Manual 102 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Number Bit Name DB3100 DBx0000 0 DB3100 DBX0000 DB3100 DBX0000 Active JOG mode DB3100 DBX0000 808D READY DB3100 DBX0001 Active machine function REF Channel signals Number Bit S PLC to NCK DB3200 DBX0000 DB3200 DBX0000 DB3200 DBX0000 DB3200 DBX0001 DB3200 DBX0001 DB3200 DBX0002 DB3200 DBX0006 DB3200 DBX0006 DB3200 DBX0006 DB3200 DBX0006 DB3200 DBX0006 i DB3200 DBX0006 Rapid traverse override active DB3200 DBX0006 f Feed rate override active DB3200 DBX0007 NC Start disable DB3200 DBX0007 NC Start DB3200 DBX0007 NC Stop at block limit DB3200 DBX0007 NC stop DB3200 DBX0007 NC Stop axes plus spindles DB3200 DBX0007 NCK to PLC DB3300 DBX0000 DB3300 DBX0000 DB3300 DBX0000 l DB3300 DBX0000 DB3300 DBX0001 DB3300 DBX0001 DB3300 DBX0001 Activate single block Activate M01 Activate dry run feed Activate referencing N Activate program test Block skip Feed disable Read in disable Delete distance to go Delete UP number of passes Program level abort Reset
47. You can create a user cycle file according to different machining functions It is a subroutine program that can be used at calling a cycle Naming rule CYCLExxx SPF Here xxx refers to the cycle number It must not exceed four digits Note The name of a user cycle must not be same with that of a standard Siemens cycle It is recommend to use a cycle number with the range of 100 to 800 Programming example Create the program with a wordpad or notepad As a cycle screen always also transfers values as call parameters to the user cycle the transfer interface is defined as follows PROC CYCLE100 REAL DIA REAL DIAF REAL STAP REAL ENDP REAL MID REAL UX INT MACH REAL VRT SAVE SBLOF DISPLOF PROC is a keyword followed by the cycle name with the cycle number All the transfer parameters for the screen are contained within brackets with the data type and name separated by commas PROC CYCLE100 REAL DIA REAL DIAF REAL STAP REAL ENDP REAL MID REAL UX INT MACH REAL VRT SAVE SBLOF DISPLOF DEF REAL VAR IF P_EP X lt DIA GOTOF LL1 LL3 IF DIAF gt DIA GOTOF END2 START IF MACH 0 GOTOF ROUGHING1 IF MACH 1 GOTOF FINISHING IF MACH 2 GOTOF ROUGHING1 DEF REAL VAR1 ROUGHING1 R101 DIA DIAF 2 UX R102 R101 MID R103 TRUNC R102 R104 0 VAR1 DIA IF R103 lt 1 GOTOF ROUGHING2 LL2 SBLON G90 G0 X VAR1 Z STAP 2 G1 Z ENDP G91 X MID G0 G91 X VRT Z VRT G90 G0 Z STAP 2 SBLOF VAR1 VAR1 2 MID R104 R104 1 IF R104 lt R
48. a manual switchover The compensation table can only be loaded when MD32700 ENC_COMP_ENABLE 0O has been set The value 1 causes the compensation to be activated and write protection to be applied output alarm 17070 Example The following example shows compensation value inputs for machine axis X1 as a program 3 N AX EEC INI CHANDATA 1 SAA ENC COMP 0 0 X1 0 0 lst compensation value interpolation point 0 0 mm SAA ENC COMP 0 1 X1 0 01 2nd compensation value interpolation point 1 10 mm SAA ENC COMP 0 2 X1 0 012 3rd compensation value interpolation point 2 12 mm SAA ENC COMP 0 120 X1 0 0 last compensation value interpolation point 120 AA ENC COMP STEP 0 X1 2 0 distance between interpolation points 2 0 mm SAA ENC COMP MIN 0 X1 200 0 compensation starts at 200 0 mm SAA ENC COMP MAX 0 X1 40 0 compensation ends at 40 0 mm SAA ENC COMP IS MODULO 0 X1 0 r compensation without modulo function M17 Values for more than 125 interpolation points result in alarm 12400 Element does not exist Error curve Compensation __ ____ Compensation curve value linear interpolation between interpolation points X Compensation values of compensation table Starting position End position AA_ENC_COMP_MIN AA_ENC_COMP_MAX ki Compensation value for Point spacing interpolation point 5 4 AA_ENC_COMP S 200 j 4 198 196 194 oN Reference point 38 40 Axis position 0 1 2 3 4 5
49. actual position value with that calculated from the NC position setpoint For the precalculation of the following error a model is used that simulates the dynamics of the position control including feedforward control So that the monitoring function does not respond incorrectly on slight speed fluctuations caused by changes of load a tolerance band is allowed for the max contour deviation If the permissible actual value deviation entered in MD36400 CONTOUR_TOL tolerance band contour monitoring is exceeded an alarm is signaled and the axes are stopped Effectiveness Contour monitoring is active for axes and position controlled spindles Effect If the contour deviation is too large this has the following effect e Alarm 25050 Contour monitoring is triggered e The axis spindle is brought to a standstill via a speed setpoint ramp with rapid stop with open position control loop The braking ramp time is set in MD36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME braking ramp time for error states e If the axis spindle is involved in interpolation with other axes spindles these are brought to a standstill with rapid stop with following error reduction position setpoint 0 Remedy e Increase tolerance band of monitoring in MD36400 e The actual servo gain factor must correspond to the desired servo gain factor set via MD32200 POSCTRL_GAIN servo gain factor With analog spindles MD32260 RATED_VELO rated motor speed and MD32250 RATED_OUTVAL
50. and measuring system error compensation LEC e Following error compensation speed feedforward control e Friction compensation quadrant error compensation These compensation functions can be set for each machine individually with axis specific machine data Position display The normal actual value and setpoint position displays ignore the compensation values and show the position values of an 4s N 9 Serv ery ideal machine To view the compensation values enter the lt SYSTEM gt operating area _suier ALARM gt i displ gt Service axes and navigate to the item Abs compens value meas system 1 Function Manual 104 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 10 2 Backlash compensation Effect In the case of axes spindle with indirect measuring systems mechanical backlash results in corruption of the traverse path causing an axis for example to travel too much or too little by the amount of the backlash when the direction of movement is reversed see following figure Compensation To compensate for backlash the axis specific actual value is corrected by the amount of backlash every time the axis spindle changes direction This quantity can be entered for each axis spindle at the commissioning phase in MD32450 BACKLASH backlash compensation Effectiveness Backlash compensation is always active in all operating modes after reference point approach Positive backlash The encoder leads the machine part
51. available and additional values can be entered An allocated auxiliary function is defined in the following machine data e MD22000 AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUP In auxiliary function group e MD22010 AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE n auxiliary function type e MD22020 AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION n auxiliary function extension e MD22030 AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUEJn auxiliary function value Predefined auxiliary function groups Group 1 The auxiliary functions MO M1 and M2 M17 M30 are by default allocated to group 1 The output is always made at the end of the block Group 2 The M functions M3 M4 and M5 M70 are by default allocated to group 2 The output is always made before the movement Group 3 The S function is by default contained in group 3 The output is made with the movement User defined groups The other user defined groups are issued with the movement Ungrouped auxiliary functions The output of auxiliary functions that are not assigned to groups is made with the movement Configuring example Distribute 8 auxiliary functions to 7 groups Group 1 MO M1 M2 M17 M30 by default should be kept Group 2 M3 M4 M5 M70 by default should be kept Group 3 S functions by default should be kept Group 4 M78 M79 Group 5 M80 M81 Group 6 H1 10 H1 11 H1 12 Group 7 all T functions Password for protection level 2 is set Function Manual 14 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 Make entry in MD11100 AUXFU_MA
52. axes XM ZM must be mutually perpendicular The rotary axis CM must travel parallel to the linear axis ZM rotating around ZM The linear axis XM intersects the rotary axis CM center of rotation Function Manual 128 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Machine with Y axis Legend XM _ Infeed axis perpendicular to rotary axis YM Additional axis ZM Axis is parallel to rotary axis CM Rotary axis ASM _ Work spindle Figure 11 5 Machining grooves on a cylinder surface with X Y Z C kinematics Extended machine kinematics The YM linear axis is also available to enable the machine kinematics requirements to be met see above This is arranged perpendicular to XM and ZM respectively and with these forms a right handed Cartesian coordinate system This type of kinematics is typical for milling machines and makes it possible to machine grooves where the groove wall and groove base are mutually perpendicular provided the milling tool diameter is less than the groove width groove wall offset These grooves can otherwise only be machined using milling tool diameters which fit precisely Grooves in transverse section Longitudinal groove Transverse groove Longitudinal groove with parallel limitation and groove wall offset ithout id ti without groove side correction use of YM axis without YM axis Figure 11 6 Grooves with and without groove wall offset Activation deactivation of TRACYL The TRACYL fun
53. axes can be traversed simultaneously with the handwheels 1 and 2 Note A separate channel specific PLC interface supplies geometry axes Transverse axis in turning technology A geometry axis is defined as a transverse axis If radius programming DIAMOF is selected instead of diameter programming DIAMON the following must be noted when traversing in JOG e Continuous traversing There are no differences when a transverse axis is traversed continuously e Incremental traversing Only half the distance of the selected increment size is traversed e Traversing with the handwheel As for incremental travel with the handwheel only half the distance is traversed per handwheel pulse Spindle manual travel The spindle can also be traversed manually in the JOG mode Essentially the same conditions apply as for manual traverse of machine axes With JOG the spindle can be traversed via the traverse keys IS continuous or INC The mode is selected and activated via the axis spindle specific PLC interface as for the axes Spindle manual travel is possible in positioning mode spindle in position control or in open loop control mode The parameter set machine data of the current gear stage applies Velocity The velocity of the axes spindle during manual traverse in JOG is defined by the following default values e For linear axes with the general SD41110 JOG_SET_VELO JOG velocity with G94 or for rotary axes with SD41130 JOG_ROT_A
54. be capable of the same dynamic response to setpoint changes The same dynamic response means The following errors are equal in magnitude when the axes are operating at the same speed The dynamic response adaptation function in the setpoint branch makes it possible to obtain an excellent match in the response to setpoint changes between axes which have different dynamic characteristics control loops The difference in equivalent time constants between the dynamically weakest axis and the other axis in each case must be specified as the dynamic response adaptation time constant Example When the speed feedforward control is active the dynamic response is primarily determined by the equivalent time constant of the slowest speed control loop Leading axis MD32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME n 5 ms Synchronized axis MD32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME n 3 ms Time constant of dynamic response adaptation for synchronized axis MD32910 DYN_MATCH_TIME n 5 ms 3 ms 2 ms time constant of dynamic response adaptation Dynamic response adaptation must be activated axially with the following machine data MD32900 DYN_MATCH_ENABLE dynamic response adaptation Note Checking dynamic response adaptation For the purpose of fine tuning it may be necessary to adjust servo gain factors or feedforward control parameters slightly to achieve an optimum result Referencing gantry axes The positions of the reference points for the leading and
55. be suppressed Definition of the spindle A machine axis is declared a spindle by setting the following machine data e MD30300 IS_ROT_AX e MD30310 ROT_IS_ MODULO e MD30320 DISPLAY_IS_MODULO e MD35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX The IS Spindle no axis reports the spindle mode DB390x DBX0000 0 Function Manual 152 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 15 2 Spindle modes 15 2 1 Spindle modes Spindle modes The spindle can have the following modes Positioning mode see Section Axis mode Tapping without compensating chuck see also Chapter Page 168 Oscillation mode Gearbox changed Gearbox Changing Control mode Positioning mode M3 M4 M5 M41 45 SPOS SPCOF M3 M4 M5 M41 45 M70 Y Axis name Axis mode Tapping without compensating chuck Figure 15 1 Switching between spindle modes Switching between spindle modes Control mode gt oscillation mode The spindle changes to oscillation mode if a new gear stage has been specified using automatic gear stage selection M40 in conjunction with a new S value or by M41 to M45 The spindle only changes to oscillation mode if the new gear stage is not equal to the current actual gear stage Oscillation mode gt control mode When the new gear stage is engaged the IS Oscillation mode DB390x DBX2002 6 is reset and the spindle is switched to control mode with the IS Gear changed DB380x DBX2000 3 The last p
56. brown dog lt let gt lt function name SsString cmp return rval gt strl SEL lt functLon gt Result rval 0 String icmp Two strings are compared from a lexicographical perspective the comparison is not case sensitive The function gives a return value of zero if the strings are the same a value less than zero if the first string is smaller than the second string or a value greater than zero if the second string is smaller then the first string Parameter str1 string str2 Comparison string Syntax lt function name Sstring icmp return lt int var gt gt strl Stre lt function gt Example lt let name rval gt 0 lt let gt lt let name Strl1 type String gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt let name str2 type String gt A brown Bear hunts a brown Dog lt let gt lt function name SsString icmp return rval gt strl str2 lt function gt Result rval 0 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 237 Function name String left The function extracts the first nCount character from string 1 and copies this to the return variable Parameter str1 String nCount Number of characters Syntax lt function name SsString left return lt result strange gt stril nCount lt ftunct iron Example lt let name Sstrl1 type string gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt let name str2 type string gt lt let gt lt function n
57. change request 9 2 3 Functional possibilities in the individual modes Overview of the functions You see from the following table which function can be selected in which operating mode and in which operating state Table 9 2 Functional possibilities in the individual modes Mode of operation AUTO JOG JoGe MD Functions OU de bB h Bh bis hB h h2 h 7 Loading a part program from outside ML Services Block search oo ea SO B B a Oe i one S Reference point approach via part program command G74 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 19 Mode of operation AUTO JOG JOG MO Functions Oa d2 hB h 3 fe h js jas h1 2 7 Function can be started in this status Function can be processed in this status Channel in reset Channel interrupted Channel active Channel interrupted JOG during AUTO interruption Channel interrupted JOG during MDA interruption Channel active JOG in MDA during MDA interruption Channel active JOG in MDA NO OBRWBN OO 9 2 4 Monitoring functions in the individual modes Overview of monitoring functions Different monitoring functions are active in individual operating modes Table 9 3 Monitoring functions and interlocks Mode of operation AUTO YOG M Functions st 2 B h ls 4 ls 5 ls it 2 3 e 7 Axis specific monitoring functions or when positioning the spindle SW limit switch o e e e T eee SW limit switch o kliki ki kI i kbh HW limit switch
58. controlled spindles Effect If the axis is pushed out of position beyond the clamping tolerance during clamping the following occurs e Alarm 26000 Clamping monitoring is triggered Function Manual 24 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 e The affected axis spindle is brought to a standstill with rapid stop with open position control loop along a speed setpoint ramp The braking ramp time is set in MD36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME duration of the braking ramp for error states e lf the axis spindle is assigned to an interpolatory grouping with other axes spindles then these are also braked by rapid stop with following error reduction default for partial position setpoint 0 3 2 5 Speed setpoint monitoring Function Speed setpoint monitoring checks whether the setpoint specification does not exceed the maximum permissible drive speed in MD 36210 CTRLOUT_LIMIT maximum speed setpoint If required the speed is limited to this value and the axis spindle stopped and an alarm output The maximum speed for the axes in percent exceeds the speed at which the velocity in MD32000 MAX_AX_VELO is reached 100 This also determines the control margin On an analog spindle the maximum speed that can be output must not exceed the speed reached at the maximum setpoint output voltage of 10 V 100 The speed setpoint consists of the speed setpoint of the position controller and the feedforward control parameter if feedforward control is active
59. cutting time can only be counted after being activated with MD27860 No Name Vae Descriptions S PROCESSTIMER_MODE Actual value Activation of counting for following program runtime e Run time e Cycle time e Cutting time i 1 Select the desired operating area OFFSET Gett 2 Press these two softkeys in succession Then the time counter can be displayed counting SD data following Run tine H6O6HH BHM Bs Time Cycle tine H666H HEM HAs etal Cutting time OHHOH HAM GAs Setup time H1Z8H dim Power on tine HAHAH ASM M 3 Enter the desired operating mode and select the desired operating area AUTO gt MACHINE Time 4 After you press this softkey the time counter can also be displayed counting the following t o Cycle time 6880 08 00h Time left 6666 66 66h Displaying the part counter The part counter is available for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED to count the following information Function Manual 190 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Corresponding system variable Required parts AC_REQUIRED_PARTS Required parts to be counted Activated by setting MD27880 BITO 1 e BIT 1 0 if Part count Parts required alarm or interface DB3300 DBX4001 1 1 Parts in total AC_TOTAL_PARTS Total number of counted parts Activated by setting MD27880 BIT 4 1 BIT 5 0 M02 M30 increases Parts in total to 1 BIT 5 1 the M code defined by MD27882 increases Parts in total to 1 BIT 6 0 1 the
60. enabled When stationary the spindle IS Axis spindle stationary DB390x DBX0001 4 can be activated with the IS Oscillation speed DB380x DBX2002 5 see Section Spindle oscillation mode Page 154 When the new gear stage is engaged the PLC user sets the IS Actual gear stage DB380x DBX2000 0 to 2 and IS Gear changed DB380x DBX2000 3 The gear stage change is considered completed spindle mode Oscillation mode is deselected and the spindle is switched to the parameter block of the new actual gear stage The spindle accelerates at the new gear stage to the spindle speed last programmed if M3 or M4 are active The IS Change gear DB390x DBX2000 3 is reset by the NCK which causes the PLC user to reset the IS Gear changed DB380x DBX2000 3 The next block in the part program can be executed Typical time sequence for the gear stage change IS Control mode LL IS Oscillation mode Pf Programmed S value 1000 1300 gq IS Gear changed _ f a Sy A IS Spindle in setpoint range IS Spindle is stationary J a i A NO IS Actual gear step gt a Ge ae ia IS Oscillation speed e i a 1st gear stage engaged lt vN e 2nd gear stage engaged mo Internal feed disable T1 T2 Spindle speed _ AHH IS Spindle stop 0 UUU t1 t2 t3 t4 t1 When S1300 is programmed the NCK detects a new gear stage 2nd gear stage enables IS Change gear and inhibi
61. functions In contrast to COMPON and COMPCURYV the specified tolerances are not used in different directions in neighboring paths with COMPCAD In fact COMPCAD attempts to achieve under similar conditions also similar deviations from the programmed points The common objective of compressor functions is to optimize the surface quality and machining speed by achieving continuous block transitions and increasing the path length for each block COMPCAD is very CPU time and memory intensive It is recommended that COMPCAD is only used there where surface improvements were not successful using measures in the CAD CAM program General e The position data in the blocks to be compressed can be realized as required e g X100 X AC 100 X R1 R2 R3 e The compression operation is then interrupted by every other command e g auxiliary function output in and between the blocks to be compressed Availability For the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED NC block compression is only available for the milling versions Parameterization The following machine and setting data must be set for the parameterization of the NC block compression Channel specific machine data identifier MC_ Meaning S MD20170 COMPRESS_BLOCK_PATH_LIMIT Maximum traversing length of NC block for compression MD20172 COMPRESS_VELO_TOL Maximum permissible deviation from path feed for compression MD20482 COMPRESSOR_MODE Setting the mode of operation of the compressor Channel spec
62. let gt lt control name editl xpos 322 ypos Smy_ypos refvar nck Channel Parameter R 1 gt lt op gt my_ypos my_ypos 20 lt op gt lt control name edit2 xpos 322 ypos Smy_ypos refvar nck Channel Parameter R 2 gt lt print name field name text edit d gt 3 lt print gt lt op gt my ypos my _ypos 20 lt op gt lt control name field name xpos 322 ypos Smy_ypos refvar nck Channel Parameter R3 gt lt caption gt S field name lt caption gt Function Manual 236 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 18 10 9 Predefined functions The script language offers various string processing and standard mathematical functions The function names listed below are reserved and cannot be overloaded Function name Meaning String cmp Two strings are compared with one another from a lexicographical perspective The function gives a return value of zero if the strings are the same a value less than zero if the first string is smaller than the second string or a value greater than zero if the second string is smaller than the first string Parameter str1 string str2 comparison string Syntax lt function name Sstring cmp return lt int var gt gt Stiri str lt tunctron Example lt let name rval gt 0 lt let gt lt let name Strl1 type String gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt let name Str2 type String gt A brown bear hunts a
63. list write the backed up values are copied to the relevant machine data id The identifier is used to identify the temporary memory Syntax lt DATA LIST action lt read write append gt id lt list name gt gt NC PLC Address compilation lt DATA_ LIST gt Example lt DATA LIST action read id lt name gt gt nck channel parameter r 2 nck channel parameter r 3 nck channel parameter r 4 MN USER DATA INT 0 lt DATA LIST gt lt DATA LIST action write id lt name gt gt ELSE Instruction for situations where the condition has not been met IF THEN ELSE Function Manual 210 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 TA Menng OOS FORM The tag contains the description of a user dialog The relevant tags are described in the section on generating menus and dialog forms Syntax lt FORM name lt dialog name gt color ff 0000 gt Attributes e color Background color of the dialog form color coding see Section Color coding Page 218 Default white name Identifier of the form xpos X position of the top left corner of the dialog box optional ypos Y position of the top left corner optional width Extension in the X direction in pixels optional height Extension in the Y direction in pixels optional HMI_RESET The tag initiates an HMI restart The interpretation is cancelled after this operation IF Conditional statement IF THEN ELSE The THEN and ELSE tags are encl
64. load In all other cases the user must overwrite MD34210 Data backup When machine data is backed up the status of MD34210 ENC_REFP_STATE is also saved By loading this data set the axis is automatically deemed calibrated If the data set has been taken from another machine e g series startup calibration must still be carried out after loading and activating the data Function Manual 150 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 14 4 Data table 14 4 1 Machine data Identifier Name Channel specific Magnitude of modulo range BERO delay time in plus direction REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE Reference point creep speed 34050 REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERSE 0 Direction reversal to reference cam 34060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST 0 Maximum distance to reference marker maximum distance to 2 reference markers with distance coded scales 34070 REFP_VELO POS Reference point positioning velocit 34080 REFP_MOVE_DIST 0 Reference point distance destination point for distancecoded system 34090 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR 0O Reference point absolute offset distancecoded 34092 REFP_CAM_SHIFT 0 Electronic reference point cam shift for incremental measuring systems with equidistant zero marks 34110 Encoder frequency limit _ S 36300 ENC FREQ _ LIMITO Encoder frequency limit 36302 ENC FREQ LIMIT _LOW J0O Encoder limit frequency resynchronization 36310 ENC ZERO MONITORINGJO Zero mark monitoring 14 4 2 Interface signals Oo Number OBO Name Speci
65. manufacturer can therefore be assumed Function Manual 144 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 13 3 EMERGENCY STOP acknowledgment Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP The EMERGENCY STOP state is reset only if IS Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP DB2600 DBX0000 2 followed by IS Reset DB3000 DBX0000 7 are set It must be noted in this respect that IS Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP and IS Reset must be set together for a long enough period for IS EMERGENCY STOP active DB2700 DBX0000 1 to be reset see Fig 1 1 IS EMERGENCY STOP DB2600 DBX0000 1 IS Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP DB2600 DBX0000 2 IS EMERGENCY STOP active DB2700 DBX0000 1 IS RESET DB3000 DBX0000 7 1 IS Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP has no effect IS RESET has no effect IS Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP and RESET reset EMERGENCY STOP active Figure 13 1 Reset emergency stop Resetting the EMERGENCY STOP state has the following effects e IS EMERGENCY STOP active is reset e The controller enable is switched in e S Position control active is set e IS 808D READY is set e Alarm 3000 is cleared e The part program is aborted PLC I O The PLC user program must switch the PLC I O to the correct state for operation of the machine Reset The EMERGENCY STOP state cannot be reset solely by IS Reset DB3000 DBX0000 7 see diagram above Power off on Power off on POWER ON cancels the EMERGENCY OFF state unless IS EMERGENCY OFF DB
66. marking Xs X Start position Ys Y start position Xe X end position Ye Y end position Circle C XS yS Xe ye CC_X CC_y r C circular sector marking Xs X start position Ys Y start position Xe X end position Ye Y end position Cc_x X coordinate circle center point CC_y Y coordinate circle center point Radius R Point P x y P point marking X X position Y Y position Deleting the graphic The content is deleted using the function empty Function Manual 228 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 TAE Men OOOO CONTROL continued Example lt let name item string type string gt lt let gt lt let name s z type double gt 100 lt let gt lt let name s x type double gt 50 lt let gt lt let name itemdata gt lt let gt K lt CONErO l names gbox xpos TET yoos Z24 wirdth 326 height 350 fieldtype graphicbox gt lt print Name item String text pr SE ci gt s z 5 x lt princ gt sfu unctrion Meame COntrol AddItem gt Lo gpox y bem ster ng itemdata lt function gt Example itemlist lt CONTROL name itemlisti xpos 10 ypos 10 fieldtype itemlist gt lt ITEM value 10 gt text1 lt ITEM gt lt ITEM value M20 gt Rext2 lt LTEMS lt ITEM value 12 gt text3 lt ITEM gt lt ITEM value 1 gt text4 lt ITEM gt lt CONTROL gt HELP_CONTEXT This tag defines the help topic to be called It should be programmed in the INIT block The name
67. mm if the basic system setting is metric The PLC user program transfers a user specific machine function queued at the machine control interface to the relevant PLC NCK interface Here the axis specific NCK PLC interface should be used for a machine axis spindle and the channel specific NCK PLC interface should be used for a geometry axis or valid for all axes spindles and geometry axes Signals in the operating mode range see also following section Handwheel jogging The axes can also be traversed via the handwheel in MCS or WCS Incremental traversing INC must be set to evaluate the handwheel pulses see Section Handwheel traversal in JOG Page 64 Traversing the geometry axes If workpieces whose workpiece coordinate system is not parallel to the machine coordinate system are being machined inclined clamping programmed rotation active in the contour traversing can be done along the axes of the workpiece coordinate system via the traverse keys or handwheel In the stopped state switch from the operating mode AUTO to JOG and traverse a geometry axis instead of a machine axis Depending on the active rotation of the workpiece coordinate system between one and three machine axes move If a machine axis is traversed this cannot also be moved via the traverse keys of a geometry axis The traversing motion of the machine axis must first have been completed otherwise alarm 20062 Axis already active is output Two geometry
68. number 1 Tool type TC_DP3 Tool number 1 Tool s geometrical parameter tool length 1 TC_DP6 Tool number 1 Tool s geometrical parameter tool radius TC_DP12 Tool number 1 Tool wear the direction of length 1 TC_DP15 Tool number 1 Tool wear the direction of radius TC_DP24 Tool number 1 Tool s dimension 0 normal 1 oversize TC_DP25 Tool number 1 Number of the tool turret _TM n Global user data integral _ZSFR n Global user data float NOTE Since this data has been used in the Siemens standard technology cycles ensure that there is no conflict with the technology cycles when you are using this data Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 189 18 4 Display function Displaying the part timer The part timer is available for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED to count the following time periods Cutting time G01 G02 G03 of a selected program Setup time 1 AN_SETUP_TIME Time elapsed since the last power on with default values AN_POWERON_TIME Time elapsed since the last normal power on Remain timed Remaining time for running the current program 1 The remaining time has no corresponding system variable and can be counted only after a cycle of a part program has successfully run 2 Both the setup time and the power on time are counted automatically after the controller has been powered on By default the run time the cycle time the setup time and the power on time are displayed The
69. of a complete PLC cycle e Each time MD20108 PROG_EVENT_MASK is reconfigured _N_ CMA_DIR CYCPE1MA SPF and _ N_CMA_DIR CYCPE_MA SPF must be loaded or enabled Otherwise the alarm 14011 Program _N_PROG_EVENT_SPF does not exist or not enabled for execution is output e The display can be suppressed in the current block display using the DISPLOF attribute in the PROC statement e A single block stop can be disabled with SBLOF attribute command or via MD10702 IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_MASK prevent single block stop with Bit 0 Function Manual 88 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 The response to read in disable and single block processing can be controlled separately through the machine data MD20106 PROG_EVENT_IGN_SINGLEBLOCK Prog events ignore the single block and MD20107 PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT Prog events ignore the read in disable MD20106 PROG_EVENT_IGN_SINGLEBLOCK CYCPE1MA SPF and CYCPE_MA SPF cause a block change despite single block without a further start when Bit 0 1 is set after Part program start event Bit 1 1 is set after Part program end event Bit 2 1 is set after Operator panel reset event Bit 3 1 is set after Ramp up event Bit 4 1 is set after First start after search run event MD 20107 PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT CYCPE1MA SPF and CYCPE_MA SPF cause a block change despite read in disable when Bit 0 1 is set after Part program start event Bit 1 1 is set after Part program end event Bit 2 1 is set after O
70. of the PPU 4s N 3 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM Function Manual 198 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 mo Sys data gt 4 USB 888D data Importing the bitmap file SYSTEM N ALARM mo Sys a data SHIFT gt 4 USB 888D data oS Press these two softkeys in succession Then select a user cycle alarm file for example alc_eng txt with sect and copy it with Copy Press this softkey and access the folder HMI data gt User cycle files gt User cycle alarm file Then paste the file with the following Paste Save the required file on a USB flash disk Insert the USB flash disk into the USB interface at the front of the PPU Select the desired operating area Press these two softkeys in succession Then select a bitmap file for example cn1 bmp with saret and copy it with PY Press this softkey and access the folder HMI data gt User cycle files gt User cycle bitmap file Then paste the file with the following Paste Length 12 61 06 63 11 37 DIR 12 61 86 63 11 37 DIR 12 61 86 63 11 37 DIR 12 61 86 63 11 37 DIR 12 61 86 63 11 37 Importing the user cycle file 1 2 SYSTEM SN gt ALARM SHIFT Function Manual Save the required file on a USB flash disk Insert the USB flash disk into the USB interface at the front of the PPU Select the desired operat
71. only take effect after power ON Response to setpoint changes and disturbances The gantry axes can only operate in exact synchronism if the parameters for the control circuits of the leading and synchronized axes are set to the same dynamic response value The axial control loops position speed and current controllers should each be set to the optimum value so that disturbances can be eliminated as quickly and efficiently as possible The dynamic response adaptation function in the setpoint branch is provided to allow differing dynamic responses of axes to be matched without loss of control quality The following control parameters must be set to the optimum axial value for both the leading axis and the synchronized axis e MD32200 POSCTRL_GAIN servo gain factor e MD32620 FFW_MODE precontrol parameter Function Manual 50 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 e MD32610 VELO_FFW_WEIGHT precontrol factor for acceleration speed precontrol e MD32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME equivalent time constant speed control loop for precontrol The following control parameters must be set to the same value for the leading axis and synchronized axis e MD32400 AX_JERK_ENABLE axial jerk limitation e MD32410 AX_JERK_TIME time constant for the axial jerk filter e MD32420 JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE basic setting for axial jerk limitation e MD32430 MA_JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK axial jerk Dynamics matching The leading axis and the coupled synchronized axis must
72. position actual value encoder and the required programmed axis position axis position of the ideal machine The compensation value is often also referred to as the correction value Interpolation point A position of the axis and the corresponding offset value Offset table Table containing interpolation points Compensation table Because dimensional deviations between the leadscrew pitch and the measuring system directly affect the accuracy of workpiece machining they must be compensated for by the relevant position dependent compensation values The compensation values are derived from measured error curves and entered in the control in the form of compensation tables during installation A separate table must be created for each compensation relation The compensation values and additional table parameters are entered in the compensation tables using special system variables Entry of compensation table Compensation tables can be loaded to the backed up NC user memory by two different methods e The compensation values are loaded when an NC program tables is started with the compensation e The compensation values can also be loaded by transferring the tables from a personal computer PC through the serial interface on the HMI Note The compensation tables can be output via the serial interface on the HMI from operating area lt SYSTEM gt 2 SYSTEM Oo Sys co 88D ALARM gt Em data l gt ES data gt NCK PLC data Le
73. produced by rotation of the handwheel is dependent on the following factors e Number of handwheel pulses received at the interface e Active increment machine function INC1 INC10 INC100 An increment is evaluated with 0 001 mm if the basic system setting is metric e Pulse weighting of the handwheel using general MD11320 HANDWH_IMP_PER_LATCH handwheel pulses per locking position Motion command While the axis is moving the Travel command or Travel command interface signal is transmitted to the PLC depending on the direction of motion e For geometry axes DB3300 DBX1000 7 6 DB3300 DBX1004 7 6 DB3300 DBX1008 7 6 e For machine axes spindle DB390x DBX004 7 6 If the axis is already being moved using the traversing keys the handwheel cannot be used Alarm 20051 Jogging with the handwheel not possible is output Velocity The velocity results from the pulses generated by the handwheel and the pulse evaluation Traverse path per time unit This velocity is limited by the value in the axis specific MD32000 MAX_AX_VELO Abortion interruption of traversing movement The traversing movement is aborted as the result of a RESET or the axis specific IS Deletion of distance to go DB380x DBX0002 2 The setpoint actual value difference is deleted NC STOP only interrupts the traversing movement NC START releases the handwheel motion again Movement in the opposite direction Depending on MD11310 HANDWH_REVERSE th
74. specified in the attribute is supplemented by the prefix XmlUserDlg_ and is transferred to the help system The associated structure of the help file should be taken from the topic generating an online help Sequence when activating the help system Press the Info key The dialog supplies the expression my_dlg_help Parser converts the expression into XmlUserDIg_my_dlg_help Activating the help system Submitting the search term XmlUserDlg_my_dlg_help Syntax lt HELP CONTEXT name lt context name gt gt Example lt INIT gt lt CAPTION gt my dialogue lt CAPTION gt lt HELP CONTEXT name my dlg help gt lt INIT gt Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 229 sree Menn OOOO O DATA_ACCESS The tag controls the behavior of the dialog forms when user inputs are being saved The behavior should be defined within the INIT tag If the tag is not used inputs are buffered in each case Exception The attribute hotlink is set to true Attribute e type TRUE the input values are not buffered The dialog form copies the input values to the reference variables directly e type FALSE the values are only copied to the reference variable with the UPDATA_DATA type FALSE tag Example lt DATA ACCESS type true gt MENU The tag defines a menu containing the softkey description and the dialog to be opened Attribute e name Menu name Syntax lt MENU name lt menu name gt
75. spindle is closed The axis spindle is then subject to position control When the controller enable is removed the position control loop and with a delay the speed control loop of the axis spindle are opened IS Position controller active DB390x DBX1 5 is set to 0 signal checkback Activation The controller enable for the drive can be set and removed from the following places 1 From the PLC user program with interface signal Controller enable in normal cases Application Removal of controller enable before clamping an axis spindle 2 The controller enable is cancelled internally by the control when certain faults occur in the machine the drive the position measuring system or the control when faults occur Application The traversing axes must be brought to a standstill by a rapid stop due to a fault 3 By the control if the following event occurs IS EMERGENCY STOP DB2600 DBX0 1 is active Removal of controller enable for a moving axis spindle e The spindle is braked to standstill with rapid stop taking account of MD36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME duration of the braking ramp in error states Alarm 21612 Controller enable reset during movement is then triggered e The position control loop of the axis spindle is opened Checkback signal to PLC with IS Position controller active DB390x DBX1 5 0 state The timer for the controller enable delay time MD36620 SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME shutdown delay of controller en
76. still present when the operator panel is reset or after rampup then CYCPE1MA SPF and CYCPE_MA SPF will only be processed after EMERGENCY STOP has been acknowledged or the error has been acknowledged in the channel Assignment example MD20106 PROG_EVENT_IGN_SINGLEBLOCK H1F MD20107 PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT HC MD20109 PROG_EVENT_MASK_PROPERTIES H1 Event programs Example for call by all events MD20108 PROG_EVENT_MASK HOF event driven program call i e call of CYCPE1MA SPF and CYCPE_MA SPF during part program start part program end operator panel reset and ramp up Sequence for part program start IF SP PROG EVENT 1 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 89 N20 RO SW k Transfer parameters for machining cycles N 20 M17 ENDIF Sequence for part program end and operator panel reset IF P_PROG EVENT 2 OR P_PROG EVENT 3 N10 R20 5 N20 ENDIF N30 M17 ENDIF Sequence for powerup IF P_PROG EVENT 4 N10 SA SPIND S Ax4 0 Speed for spindle start through virtual interface N20 ENDIF N30 M17 ENDIF M17 Start with RESET key One of the following part programs is automatically started with the RESET key e N_CMA_DIR CYCPE1MA SPF e N_CMA_DIR CYCPE_MA SPF Control via MD20107 PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT If the following machine data settings are present MD20107 PROG_EVENT_IGN_INHIBIT H04F MD20108 PROG_EVENT_MASK H04F The program started with the RESET key is executed ri
77. synchronized axes must first be set to almost identical values To ensure that the synchronization compensatory motion of the gantry axes is not started automatically during first commissioning the gantry warning limit must be set to 0 before referencing MD37100 GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING gantry axis definition This will prevent a warning message being output during traversing motion In cases where an excessively high additional torque is acting on the drives due to misalignment between the leading and synchronized axes the gantry grouping must be aligned before the axes are traversed After this the gantry axes must be referenced as outlined in the section titled Referencing and synchronizing gantry axes Once the leading and synchronized axes have been referenced the difference between them must be determined by SYSTEM 4s N comparing the actual position value display on the corresponding screen under lt SYSTEM gt operating area E a 1y Serv Service gt displ axes This difference must be applied as the reference point offset MD34080 REFP_MOVE_DIST reference point distance MD34090 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR reference point offset absolute offset Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 51 Synchronizing gantry axes The gantry synchronization process must be activated with IS Start gantry synchronization see Section Referencing and synchronizing gantry axes Page 44 Once the axes have been synchronized IS
78. table e g negative traversing direction X axis MD18342 2 21 21 interpolation points for the 3rd table e g positive traversing direction Y axis MD18342 3 21 21 interpolation points for the 4th table e g positive traversing direction Y axis MD18342 61 number of interpolation points for the 62nd table 2 Perform the series machine startup Generate an NC archive with the entries in MD18342 lt t gt Read in the generated NC archive Note The NC memory is configured as a result The compensation tables are now available 3 Generate the tables with compensation values for the particular axes and traversing directions as part program see section Example Page 112 Program BI_SSFK_MESS_AX1_X MPF 4 Execute the part program with compensation values in the control AUTOMATIC mode gt select program gt CYCLE start Note Each time before reading in the compensation tables the following parameters should always be set to 0 and then to activate always be set to 1 MD32710 MA_CEC_ENABLE lt AxXi gt enable sag compensation 0 gt 1 SD41300 SN_CEC_TABLE _ENABLE lt t gt enable the compensation table 0 gt 1 The backlash should always be set to 0 MD32450 MA_BACKLASH lt e gt backlash 0 with lt e gt Position measuring system The use of the program template BI_SSFK_TAB_AX1_X MPEF see section Example Page 112 automates these tasks When manually entering machine da
79. the files shown below e User cycle file e Extended user text file e User cycle alarm file e User cycle softkey index file e User cycle parameter file e User cycle bitmap file Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 193 18 7 1 Creating the extended user text file The extended user text file is required for the display of respective screen texts cycle messages and softkey texts Naming rule almc_ lt LANG gt txt Here lt LANG gt refers to the language denotation for example eng For details on how to name an extended user text file see Section ee j EO Text definition rules When defining the texts you must follow the rule below lt Identifier gt lt Text gt lt chars amp lines gt e lt lidentifier gt here you define the identifier with a number The number ranges from 83000 to 84999 e lt Text gt here you define the actual text e lt chars amp lines gt here you specify the available space for the text in the GUI in number of characters and lines You can new line by inserting the character of n A maximum of 2 lines with 9 characters each are available for softkey Examples 83000 User nCycles 2 9 two lines Each line with nine characters space 83002 CYCLE10 9 gt one line with nine characters space 18 7 2 Creating the user cycle softkey index file The user cycle softkey index file cov com file is required to define the softkeys for the user cycle You can create the cov
80. the system monitors the distance from the spindle with reference to the actual position to the programmed spindle set position target point Two limit values can be defined as incremental path starting at the spindle set position in the following machine data e MD36000 STOP_LIMIT_COARSE exact stop limit coarse e MD36010 STOP_LIMIT_FINE exact stop limit fine Regardless of the two limit values the positioning of the spindle is always as accurate as the connected spindle measurement encoder the backlash the transmission ratio etc Speed Set position Position Exact stop limit fine Exact stop limit coarse g Figure 15 10 Exact stop zones of a spindle for positioning IS Position reached with exact stop When the limits MD 36000 and MD 36010 are reached IS Position reached with exact stop coarse DB390x DBX0000 6 and IS Position reached with exact stop fine DB390x DBX0000 7 are output to the PLC Block change with SPOS If the spindle is being positioned with SPOS the block change will be dependent on the end point monitoring with the IS Position reached with exact stop fine All other functions programmed in the block must have achieved their end criterion e g axes ready all auxiliary functions acknowledged by the PLC 15 7 Analog spindle Function In the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED an analog spindle is designed for machine running The spindle is controlled through the rated analo
81. the target point and is stationary The position control is active and stops the spindle in the programmed position The IS Position reached with exact stop fine DB390x DBX0000 7 and coarse DB390x DBX0000 6 are set if the distance between the spindle actual position and the programmed position spindle setpoint position is less than the settings for the exact stop fine and coarse limits MD36010 STOP_LIMIT_FINE and MD36000 STOP_LIMIT_COARSE Positioning from standstill spindle is synchronized The spindle has already been turned by one spindle revolution with M3 and M4 and was then brought to a standstill with M5 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 157 Speed rev min Phase 1 to 4 MD 35300 SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO position control activation speed Start with SPOS Position reached Brake application point Time s Figure 15 5 Positioning with stationary synchronized spindle Sequence The spindle travels to the programmed end point optimally in terms of time Depending on the appropriate secondary conditions the operational sequences in phases 1 2 3 4or 1 3a 4a are executed Phase 1 SPOS will switch the spindle to position control mode The acceleration from MD35210 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL acceleration in the position control mode is activated The direction of rotation is determined by the relevant distance to go type of path setting with SPOS The speed entered in MD35300 SPIND
82. to determine that the value of the IS Feedrate override DB380x DBBO0000 should apply The spindle override is active with G33 but it should not be actuated for reasons of accuracy also active with G331 G332 In the case of G63 the spindle override is set to a fixed value of 100 Override active The set override values are effective in all operating modes and machine functions This applies if the IS Rapid traverse override active Feedrate override active or Override active are set An override factor of 0 acts as a feedrate disable Override inactive When the override is inactive i e the above interface signals are set to 0 the override factor 1 is used internally for all switch positions except from the 1st position i e the override is 100 Note The 1st switch position of the Gray coded interfaces for the value represents a special case In this case the override factor of the 1st switch position is also used if the IS Rapid traverse override active Feedrate override active Override active are not set Thus 0 is issued as the override value for axes acts the same as Feed disable The following applies to the spindle if the IS Override active is not set Override value 50 Function Manual 174 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 16 4 Data table 16 4 1 Machine setting data Identifier Name General machine data 10240 SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC Basic system metric Channel specific machine data
83. to increase or decrease the path feedrate relative to the programmed feedrate in percent with immediate effect The feedrates are multiplied by the override values An override between 0 and 120 can be programmed for the path feedrate F The rapid traverse override switch is used to reduce the traversing velocity when testing a part program An override between 0 and 100 can be programmed for the rapid traverse The spindle override can be used to modify the spindle speed and the cutting rate with G96 The override can be between 50 and 120 The override is not permitted to exceed the machine specific acceleration and speed limits or generate a contour error The override acts on the programmed values before limits intervene Channel specific feedrate and rapid traverse override One enable signal and one byte are provided on the PLC interface for the override factor in percent for feedrate and rapid traverse e S Feedrate override DB3200 DBB0004 e S Feedrate override active DB3200 DBX0006 7 e S Rapid traverse override DB3200 DBB0005 e S Rapid traverse override active DB3200 DBX0006 6 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 173 The interface for the override value is supplied by a machine control panel via the PLC to the NC and it is Gray coded An active feedrate override acts on all path axes An active rapid traverse override acts on all axes traversing with rapid traverse If there is no dedicate
84. user DLL All parameters listed after the parameter ID are transferred to the function called Parameter class_name name of the function class id of the function parameter maximum seven function parameters string variables Syntax lt PUnCtTLON Tame dl ll funetaon gt class name id parameterl parameter2 lt function gt Example lt TUnC LOM Neme dLietunceLon gt UV Ccustomer y 290 J par I para lt FUNCELON gt File processing doc readfromfile doc writetofile doc remove 244 The function loads the contents of the file specified to a string variable Attribute Return name of the local variable Parameter Progname file name Syntax lt function name doc readfromfile return lt string var gt gt progname lt function gt Example lt let name my var type sString gt lt let gt lt function name doc readfromfile return My var gt TP sprt rest mpr lt runction gt The function writes the contents of a string variable to the file specified Parameter progname file name str1 string Syntax lt function name doc writetofile gt progname strl lt function Example sler Mame ity var Types String ELLS content lt let gt lt runction Name docwritetorile gt DT spr test cmpe my var lt fu unction gt The function removes the file specified from the directory Parameter progname file name Syn
85. with respect to length compensation is possible Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 133 11 3 3 Programming example TRACYL Machining grooves with groove wall compensation MD24100_TRAFO_TYPE_1 513 Contour It is possible to machine a groove which is wider than the tool by using address OFFN to program the compensation direction G41 G42 in relation to the programmed reference contour and the distance of the groove side wall from the reference contour Tool radius The tool radius in relation to the groove side wall is automatically taken into account with G41 G42 The full functionality of the plane tool radius compensation is available steady transition at outer and inner corners as well as solution of bottleneck problems 50 100 115 N100 Z Path Milling tool N70 N60 N105 X l 70 Z gt a N110 Path Il N120 D x Pi Pie 40 x 3 1415 ies Gate es 125 664 Y Programmed path Peripheral surface Figure 11 11 Groove with groove wall offset figure as example Program example for X Y Z C machine kinematics TRACYL is used for the milling of grooves on a peripheral cylinder surface During this process the Path and Path II sections are processed using different OFFN values CC is the channel axis name of the rotary axis milling radius of T1 D1 8 345 mm N1 SPOS 0 Transfer of spindle to position control only for lathes N5 T1 D1 Tool selection N10 G500 GO G64 X50 YO Z11
86. 03 7 Figure 9 2 Time sequence of the interface signals for program status and channel status 2 Note IS DB3300 DBX0003 4 Program status aborted and DB3300 DBX0003 7 Channel status reset are only received if CYCPE1MA SPF and CYCPE_MA SPF have been completed Neither IS DB3300 DBX0003 4 Program status aborted nor DB3300 DBX0003 7 Channel status reset are received between the program end and the start of the program event This is also the case between an operator panel reset and the start of the program event Special points to be noted The following must be noted for user programs CYCPE1MA SPF and CYCPE_MA SPF e Itis run with the lowest priority and can therefore be interrupted by the user ASUP e The PLC can be advised of the processing status of CYCPE1MA SPF and CYCPE_MA SPF via user M functions e The triggering event can be defined at the interface via the PLC program DB3300 DBB4004 offers the information below 0 No active event Bit 0 1 Part program start from channel status RESET Bit 1 1 Part program end Bit 2 1 Operator panel reset Bit 3 1 Ramp up Bit 4 1 First start after the search run Bit 5 7 reserved currently always 0 With the general request to 0 it is possible to determine whether an event is present If a running event disappears upon RESET the associated display bit in the interface extinguishes For very brief events the corresponding bit remains for at least the duration
87. 08 2013 233 PEA Menn OOOO O FUNCTION 234 Function call The tag executes the function body which is specified under the attribute name Attributes e name Name of the function body e return Variable name for saving the result of the function Values List of variables to be transferred to the function body The variables must be separated by a comma A maximum of 10 parameters can be transferred It is also possible to specify constants or text expressions as call parameters The identifier _T should be placed at the start as a means of identifying text terms Syntax lt FUNCTION name lt function name gt gt Calling function expects a return value lt FUNCTION name lt function name gt return lt Variablenname gt gt Parameter transfer lt FUNCTION name lt f nctron name gt Y gt varl var2 vars lt FUNCTTON gt lt FUNCTION name lt f nctIom Tames TTS 0 L lt APFUNCTION gt Examples See FUNCTION_BODY Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Tag identifier meaning OOOO OOOO FUNCTION_BODY Function body The tag contains the function body of a subfunction The function body needs to be programmed within the DialogGui tag Attributes e name Name of the function body e parameter Parameter list optional The attribute lists the transfer parameters that are required The parameters must be separated by a comma When the function body is called the values of
88. 1 General Axis specific following error The following error can be reduced to almost zero with the help of the feedforward control This feedforward control is therefore also called following error compensation Particularly during acceleration in contour curvatures e g circles and corners this following error leads to undesirable velocity dependent contour violations The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control is equipped with the Speed feedforward control feedforward control type Function Manual 114 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Activation deactivation in part program The feedforward control can be activated and de activated by means of the following high level language elements in the part program e FFWON Feedforward control ON e FFWOF Feedforward control OFF activation setting With MD32630 FFW_ACTIVATION_MODE the activation via FF WON or de activation via FFWOF of a specific axis can be determined e FFWON and FFWOF are used to activate and de activate respectively the feedforward control of all axes spindles for which MD32630 1 is set e MD 32630 should therefore have identical settings for axes that interpolate with each other The feedforward control should only be switched on or off while the axis spindle is stationary to prevent jerk This is the responsibility of the programmer Conditions The following points should be noted before the feedforward control is applied e Rigid machine behavior e Precise kno
89. 1 bmp gt insert a bitmap 1 in the text from the folder Images HL2 How to open the Online Help 1 Press the right arrow key and you can view the Online Help you have created 2 Press the INPUT key or softkey Show to show it XREF Chapter 1 text 1 Go to Chapter 1 gt create a hyperlink to Chapter 1 Note You must end the text by pressing the Enter key otherwise the online help does not work properly The table below gives the detailed information about the commands you can use in your help texts Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 181 XE BookmarkName Will create a bookmark named BookmarkName The command must be followed by an HL command which will be used as description in the help index These bookmarks will be displayed in the help content list HL depth Defines a headline The parameter depth defines the depth 1 5 headline ee aeo NPAGE Starts a new Starts a new help page s s sS page BOOKMARK BookmarkName Sets a hidden bookmark named BookmarkName which occurs in the help index It can be used in the XREF command to create a hyperlink XREF BookmarkName file name Display text of Will create a hyperlink in the help text The destination hyperlink BookmarkName can be a bookmark created via BOOKMARK or XE command BITMAP no_ref omp Inserts a bitmap in the text SCOLOR color Changes the color of the following text to the specified one
90. 10 mm behind the limitation these 10 mm must be traversed in the opposite direction before the axis traverses again If a movement in the opposite direction is to be performed immediately after a limit the fictitious distance to go can be deleted via IS Delete distance to go DB380x DBX0002 2 or by deselecting of the handwheel assignment e MD value gt 0 All handwheel pulses leading to an end point behind the limitation are ignored Any movement of the handwheel in the opposite direction leads to an immediate movement in the opposite direction i e away from the limitation 7 5 Fixed point approach in JOG 7 5 1 Introduction Function The machine user can use the Approach fixed point in JOG function to approach axis positions defined using machine data by actuating the traversing keys of the Machine Control Panel or by using the handwheel The traveling axis comes to a standstill automatically on reaching the defined fixed point Applications Typical applications are for example e Approaching a basic position before starting an NC program e Travel towards tool change points loading points and pallet change points Requirements e The Approaching fixed point in JOG can be activated only in the JOG mode The function cannot be enabled in the JOG REPOS and JOG REF sub modes and in JOG in the AUTO mode e The axis to be traversed must be referenced e A kinematic transformation may not be active e The axis to be trave
91. 1020 ENC_RESOLJ 0 encoder pulses per revolution The associated machine data are described in Chapter Velocities Setpoint Actual Value Systems Closed Loop Control G2 For analog spindle only e Output voltage output speed relation MD32260 RATED_VELO rated motor speed MD32250 RATED_OUTVAL rated output voltage 3 5 Data table 3 5 1 Machine data Number___ Identifier Name O OO OOOO O O Axis spindle specific 32250 RATED_OUTVAL Rated output voltage ar RATED a O Rated motor op 32300 MAX_AX MAX AX ACCEL n Axis acceleration COCY acceleration 32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME n Equivalent time constant speed control loop for feedforward control Function Manual 28 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 Number___ Identifier Name Time delay exact stop fine Encoder limit frequency resynchronization Zero mark monitoring Tolerance band contour monitoring 36500 ENC_CHANGE_TOL High backlash values Maximum tolerance for actual position value changeover 36600 BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE Braking behavior at hardware limit switch 36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME Length of the braking ramp for error states 36620 SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME Cutout delay controller enable 3 5 2 Interface signals Number Bit Name Axis spindle specific DB380x DBX 1 Position measuring system 1 DB380x DBX2 Clamping in progress 4 Continuous Path Mode Exact Stop and LookAhead 4 1 Brief description For continuous path control the CNC p
92. 103 GOTOB LL2 IF R104 gt R103 GOTOF ROUGHING2 ROUGHING2 SBLON Function Manual 196 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 G90 GO X DIAF UX G1 Z ENDP GO G91X VRT Z VRT G90 GO X DIA 2 Z STAP 2 IF MACH 2 GOTOF FINISHING SBLOF RET FINISHING SBLON GO X DIAF G1 Z ENDP G1 X DIA VRT GO G91X VRT Z VRT G90 Z STAP 2 SBLOF RET LL1 IF P_EP Z lt STAP GOTOF END1 GOTOB LL3 END1 SETAL 65000 STOPRE MO RET END2 SETAL 65001 STOPRE MO RET 18 7 5 Creating the user cycle alarm file The user cycle alarm file is required to display alarm numbers and alarm messages for user cycles Naming rule alc_ lt LANG gt txt Here lt LANG gt refers to the language denotation for example eng For details on how to name a user cycle alarm file see Section ita Pone 79 Text definition rules When defining the texts you must follow the rule below lt AlarmNumber gt lt Text gt lt chars amp lines gt e lt AlarmNumber gt here you define the alarm number The number ranges from 65000 to 79999 e lt Text gt here you define the actual alarm text e lt chars amp lines gt here you specify the available space for the text in the GUI in number of characters and lines You can start a new line by inserting the character of n Examples 65000 Current tool position is incorrect 34 gt one lines with thirty four characters space 65001 DIAF is bigger than DIA 23 gt one line with tw
93. 16 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 10 5 3 2 Commissioning Circularity test It is recommended that the circularity test be used for the commissioning of the friction compensation with constant injected value as described above The commissioning sequence is divided into the following steps 1 Perform circularity test without friction compensation 2 Perform circularity test with friction compensation and initial parameter values 3 Perform circularity tests with friction compensation and modified parameter values A Complete circularity tests with friction compensation and optimized parameter values Circularity test without friction compensation A circularity test without friction compensation should be performed to determine the initial quality of the circular contour at the quadrant transitions To do this switch off the friction compensation temporarily MD32500 FRICT_COMP_ENABLE lt axis gt 0 The following figure shows a typical example of quadrant transitions without friction compensation Counter 2 Counter 1 Quadrant transition IV Figure 10 5 Quadrant transitions without friction compensation Then switch on the friction compensation with constant compensation value MD32500 FRICT_COMP_ENABLE lt axis gt 1 Circularity test with friction compensation and initial parameter values It is recommended that a relatively small compensation value as well as a time constant of just a few position control cyc
94. 1800 DBX0000 0 AUTO mode request by HM 0S O DB1800 DBX0000 MDA mode request by HMI DB1800 DBX0000 JOG mode request by HMI DB1800 DBX0000 Change mode disable request by HMI DB1800 DBX0000 le Start measuring in JOG request by HMI REF machine function request by HMI HMI signals from PLC to HMI DB1900 DBD 5004 oo Tool number for tool measuring in JOG input by PLC General from NCK to PLC DB2700 DBX0001 0 Probetisactuated o oo O 13 EMERGENCY OFF 13 1 Brief description Note It is the duty of the machine manufacturer to observe national and international standards see the notes on standards in the following paragraph The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED supports the machine manufacturer in the implementation of the EMERGENCY STOP function in accordance with the specifications in this Description of Functions The responsibility for the EMERGENCY STOP function its triggering execution and acknowledgment rests exclusively with the machine manufacturer Note Particular reference should be made to the following standards for the EMERGENCY STOP function e EN ISO 12100 1 e EN ISO 12100 2 e EN 418 e EN 60204 1 EMERGENCY STOP in the control system The control system supports the machine manufacturer in implementing an EMERGENCY STOP function on the basis of the following features e Activation of EMERGENCY STOP sequence in the NC via a PLC input e The EMERGENCY STOP procedure in the NC reduces the speed o
95. 19 png 34 68 KB B GH6scre2 png 2 33 KB 5 GH6scr3 png 15 21 KB 5 SH6scr4 png 28 73 KB 5 SH6scr5 png 18 464 KB 5 GH6scr6 png 16 65 KB Bl Gh6scr png c4 H8 KB 5 GH6scrd png 14 58 KB 5 GH6scr9 png 14 56 KB B 5 Helpz png 21 67 KE Bl SinunerikArchitectureT ppt cH 98 HB mS alr tant m oO T Press this softkey and then access the HMI data folder with the following 868d FE data A Then select the OEM online help folder by using keys A and v Hane Type Length Date E Customized bitmaps DUser cycle files D EasysLanguage scripts i Q Extended user text file falme txt GDEH WD description file md_descr txt CI0EM manual Coemmanual pdf3 CIPLC alarm texts falcu txt CI0EM slideshow bnp pnq Cj0EM R variable name file Crparan_nanme txt Service planner task name file svc_tasks txt Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 183 Press this hardkey to access the OEM online help folder and then enter the manual folder that is the above mentioned third level folder Paste the copied file s under this folder with the following Paste gt 0 images DIR Bexti txt E elp txt helpz png B manual_z txt 9 Press these two hardkeys on the PPU in succession Then you can view your own online help as shown in the following example SIEHEHS manual HExtension Manual HTurning Part 1 Operation HOnline help for turning cycles HHanual Machine Plus Turning HOn
96. 20x DBB3000 Job variable specific part NC variable The NC variable is selected in the variable index DB120x DBB1000 see Section NC variable Page 19 Area number column line index DB120x DBB1001 DB120x DBB1005 Various variables are declared as fields For flexible addressing the relevant field index must be specified as a column and or line index e g R parameter no Values The values to be written must be entered in the range DB120x DBB1008 11 in the data type specific for the appropriate variable If necessary the values are converted e g NCL floating point values 64 bit into the PLC format 32 bit and vice versa A loss of accuracy results from the conversion from 64 bit to 32 bit REAL The maximum accuracy of 32 bit REAL numbers is approximately 107 Result variable specific part A result is reported for each variable in the job If the read process was successful Variable valid DB120x DBX3000 0 is set to 1 the access result DB120x DBB3001 is 0 When reading the data as of DBB120x DBB3004 is entered type specifically In case of error DB120x DBX3000 0 remains 0 and an entry is made in the access result DB120x DBB3001 Function Manual 18 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 e 0 No error e 3 Illegal access to object e 5 Invalid address e 10 Object does not exist Values The range DB120x DBB3004 07 is not relevant for writing Relevant interface signals S Address Name Valid valu
97. 2600 DBX0000 1 is still set Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 145 13 4 Data table 13 4 1 Machine data Identifier Name Axis specific 36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME Length of the braking ramp for error states 36620 SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME Shutdown delay controller enable 13 4 2 Interface signals Number Bit Name S General DB2600 DBx0000 0 Braking on the contour with EMERGENCY STOP DB2600 DBX0000 EMERGENCY STOP DB2600 DBX0000 Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP DB2700 DBX0000 EMERGENCY STOP active Operating mode signal area DB3000 DBX0000 14 Reference Point Approach 14 1 Fundamentals Why reference The control must be synchronized with the position measurement system of each machine axis so that the control can detect the exact machine zero when it is switched on This process is known as referencing The spindle process synchronizing is largely described in Chapter Spindle Page 152 Position measurement systems The following position measuring systems can be mounted on the motor e Incremental rotary measuring system e Absolute rotary measuring system The referencing for the mounted position measuring systems can be set with MD34200 ENC_REFP_MODE referencing mode Output cam An output cam for referencing may be required for linear axes and its signal has the following tasks e Selection of the direction of travel when approaching the zero mark synchronized pulse e Selecti
98. 2900 Signals from fast inputs and outputs poo inputs putz input a oo eo Applications of the fast inputs outputs Fast inputs In the PLC application program you can directly read each bit value from the address DB2900 DBX0 0 In a part program you can read each bit value from the address DB2900 DBX0 0 via corresponding system variable Fast outputs From the address DB2900 DBX4 0 you cannot assign a value to the fast output otherwise the PLC application program will stop with an error However you can assign a value to the fast output from address DB2800 DBX5 0 and DB2800 DBX6 0 In the PLC application program you can trigger the address DB2800 DBX5 0 with a rising edge or a negative edge at the address DB2800 DBX6 0 and thus the address DB2900 DBX4 0 will vary with the address DB2800 DBX6 0 For example if you want to use 10 0 to trigger or deactivate the set reset of the address DB2900 DBX4 0 you can write as follows in the PLC application program Hetwork T 10 0 DE2800 DE6 0 Hetwork DE2800 DE6 0 DE2800 D65 0 DA2S00 0846 0 n In a part program you can set or reset the fast output via its corresponding variable The system variable is A4_OUT 1 For example A_OUT 1 1 gt set DB2900 DBX4 0 1 M30 18 7 Creating user cycles The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED is integrated with standard Siemens cycles If necessary you can also create your own cycles To create a customized cycle you must prepare
99. 32510 Friction compensation adaptation active 32520 Maximum friction compensation value 32530 Minimum friction compensation value 32540 Friction compensation time constant 32550 Adaptation acceleration value 1 32560 Adaptation acceleration value 2 32570 Adaptation acceleration value 3 32580 FRICT_COMP_INC_FACTOR Weighting factor for friction compensation value for short traversing motion 32630 Feedforward control can be activated from the program 32700 Interpolatory compensation active 32710 Enabling of sag compensation 38000 MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_POINTS 0 Interpolation points for encoder spindle compensation LEC for display only 10 6 2 Setting data Number Identifier Name General 41300 CEC_TABLE_ENABLE t Enable evaluation of beam sag compensation table Function Manual 122 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 10 6 3 Interface signals Number Bit Name Axis spindle specific DB390x DBX0000 Referenced synchronized 1 11 Kinematic Transformation 11 1 Brief description Application range The control transforms the programmed traversing instructions from a Cartesian coordinate system into a real machine axis system The TRANSMIT transformation is used for the face end milling of turned parts on lathes without any Y machine axis The TRACYL transformation is used to machine the peripheral surfaces of cylindrical bodies The main application is the milling of grooves A TRACYL variant is provided for lathes A secon
100. 5 CC 200 DIAMOF Positioning of machine Y in center of rotation N20 TRACYL 40 Transformation selection reference diameter for surface 40 mm N30 G19 G90 G94 G1 F500 Machining plane is cylinder surface Y Z N40 OFFN 12 35 Y70 Z115 Define groove wall offset starting position Y is now transformer axis Function Manual 134 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 N50 X20 M2 3 S2 300 Feed tool to groove base switch on milling spindle Approach of groove wall N60 Gl G42 Y70 2100 TRC selection to approach groove wall Machining groove section path I N70 z250 Groove part parallel to cylinder plane N80 Y10 Groove part parallel to circumference N90 OFFN 11 5 Change groove wall offset Machining groove section path II N100 Gl G42 Y10 250 TRC selection to approach groove wall for path II N105 Y70 Groove part parallel to circumference N110 2100 Revert to initial value Retraction from groove wall N120 Gl G40 Y70 Z115 TRC deselection retract from groove wall N130 GO X25 M2 5 Retraction stop milling spindle N140 TRAFOOF Switch off TRACYL N N Ne Ne 150 GO X50 YO 2115 CC 200 OFFN 0 Return to starting point 160 M30 11 4 Special features of TRANSMIT and TRACYL POWER ON RESET The system response after POWER ON or RESET program end is determined by the settings stored in the following machine data e MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK access to this MD only in protection level 1 1 e MD20140
101. 6 Calling the standard cycle with M06 10716 M_NO_FCT_CYCLE_NAME 0 TOOL Name of the standard cycle For the format of a standard cycle refer to the example shown below Function Manual 188 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 _N_TOOL_SPF PATH _N_CUS_DIR PROC TOOL SAVE DISPLOF IF P_ISTEST GOTOF _END IF P_SEARCH lt gt 0 GOTOF _END IF P_ TOOLNO P_TOOLP GOTOF _NO G500 DO G75 Z 0 SPOS MN_USER_DATA_FLOAT O MSG Ready to change tool Original tool number T lt lt P_TOOLNO M206 STOPRE G153 G01 Z0 F2000 G153 MSG Ready to change tool Original tool number T lt lt P_TOOLP GOTOF _END _NO MSG No action Reason programming tool number spindle tool number _END M17 Calling cycles using the T function Configure the parameters shown in below table to activate a T code for calling a standard cycle No Name Unit Value Description 22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE e ie Activating tool parameters with an M code 10717 T_NO_FCT_CYCLE 0 TOOL Calling the standard cycle with M06 The format of the standard cycle is the same with that of M codes The tool number for programming will be saved into system variable C_T Descriptions of frequently used system variables P_TOOLNO P_TOOLP Programming tool number P_TOOLP is inactive when the program code T calls a tool changing cycle that is defined with MD10717 The tool number is then represented with C_T TC_DP1 Tool
102. 620 SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME shutdown delay controller enable the controller enable is cancelled It must be noted that MD36620 must be specified at least as long as MD36610 OF tee O N Sequence on the machine The sequence of EMERGENCY STOP functions on the machine is determined solely by the machine manufacturer Attention should be paid to the following in connection to the sequence on the NC e The sequence of operations in the NC is started with IS EMERGENCY STOP DB2600 DBX0000 1 When the axes and spindles have come to a halt the power supply must be interrupted in compliance with EN 418 e The PLC I O digital outputs are not affected by the sequence in the NC If individual outputs are required to attain a particular state in the event of an EMERGENCY STOP the machine manufacturer must include functions for this purpose in the PLC user program Note The interruption of the power feed to the equipment is the responsibility of the machine manufacturer If the internal functions in the NC should not be executed in the predetermined sequence in the event of an EMERGENCY STOP then IS EMERGENCY STOP DB2600 DBX0000 1 may not be set at any time up to the point that an EMERGENCY STOP defined by the machine manufacture in the PLC user program is reached As long as the EMERGENCY STOP interface signal has not been set and no other alarm is active all interface signals are effective in the NC Any EMERGENCY STOP state defined by the
103. 6200 AX_VELO_LIMIT threshold value for velocity monitoring e Check signal setpoint cable for analog spindles 3 3 Static limitation monitoring 3 3 1 Limit switch monitoring 2 SW limit switch HW limit switch Mechanical can be activated via PLC end of traversing range 1 SW limit switch EMERGENCY STOP Figure 3 3 Overview of travel limits of a linear axis 3 3 2 Hardware limit switches Function Every axis has a hardware HW limit switch for each traversing direction which prevents the slide from moving out of the slide bed If the hardware limit switch is crossed the PLC signals this to the NC via IS Hardware limit switch plus minus DB380x DBX1000 1 or 0 and the movement of all axes is stopped The braking method can be specified via MD36600 BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE braking behavior at hardware limit switch Effectiveness HW limit switch monitoring is active after the control has started up in all modes Function Manual 26 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 Effect e When a hardware limit switch is passed in either direction alarm 21614 Hardware limit switch or is triggered e The axis is stopped according to the setting in MD36600 BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE braking behavior at hardware limit switch e f the axis is assigned to an interpolatory grouping with other axes then these are also stopped according to the method selected in MD36600 BRAKE_MODE_CHOICE braking behavior at hardware limit switch e The direction k
104. 7 1 PLC addressing Addressing the PLC starts with the path section plc Table 18 4 The following addresses are permissible DBx DBXx b Data block Qxb Output Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 219 Table 18 5 Data format f Double word Data format identification is not applicable to bit addressing Address x Valid S7 200 address identifier Bit addressing b Bit number Examples lt data name plc mb170 gt 1 lt data gt lt data name i0 1 gt 1 lt data gt sopa MIos ds Xoo 18 10 7 2 NC variable addressing Addressing the NC variables starts with the path section nck This section is followed by the data address its structure should be taken from the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Parameter Manual Example lt LET name tempStatus gt lt LET gt lt OP gt tempStatus nck channel state chanstatus lt OP gt 18 10 7 3 Addressing machine and setting data Setting data is identified by the character followed by the name of the data Machine data Mx_ lt namel index AX lt axis_number gt gt Setting data Sx_ lt name index AX lt axis_number gt gt x N General machine or setting data C Channel specific machine or setting data A Axis specific machine or setting data Index For a field the parameter indicates the index of the data AX lt axis_number gt The required axis lt axis_number gt has to be specified for axis specific data Alternatively t
105. 7 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Note As a supplement to the more general description given here of features of start up and dynamic control response of drives a complete example of a concrete constellation defined on the basis of its machine data can be found in Chapter Example Start up support for gantry groupings The commissioning functions of the function generator and measuring functions are assigned parameters via PI services All parameterized axes commence traversing when the Fa key on the MCP panel is pressed in JOG mode A window is displayed in the Measuring function and function generator in gantry grouping operator interface Two amplitude values each with an offset and bandwidth must be entered in this window The first amplitude value applies to the measuring axis and the second to the other coupled axes 6 5 PLC interface signals for gantry axes Special IS for gantry axes The special PLC interface signals of the coupled gantry axes are taken via the axial PLC interface of the leading or synchronized axes Table below shows all special gantry PLC interface signals along with their codes and indicates whether the IS is evaluated on the leading axis or the synchronized axis Table 6 2 Assignment of gantry PLC interface signals to leading and synchronized axes PLC interface signal PLC NCK Synchronized axis Start gantry synchronization gt DB380x DBX50 x 05 4 Automatic synchronization locking gt DB380x DBX50 x 05 5
106. ALARM he Serv 2 Press these three softkeys in succession Then the following window is displayed Tera a Mm AS keb 2013 08 21 Options me Option Set Licensed Additi 1 NC Axi Version GFCS800 BAK70 O BO a L Bidi ti I srcso0 oM ov00 o Manual Machine P1 srcso0 onr7 0 B0 o T it T 1 Options GFCS800 BASSO B BO a Gantry BASIC 6FC5866 6AS51 6YBa LI KI k If you have entered one or two license keys the corresponding box is set to 1or 2 respectively indicating that one or two additional axes are available Otherwise O is displayed in the box Additional HC Axis BFCS8H4 6AK 76 6Y8H a D Additional HC Axis BFCS8H4 6AK 76 6Y6H a 3 When one license is available you can activate 0 or 1 additional axis by setting the corresponding box respectively to 0 or 1 Additional NC Axis 1 6FCS866 GAK76 8YBE C When two licenses are available you can activate 0 1 or 2 additional axes by setting the corresponding box respectively to 0 1 or 2 Additional HC Axis 2 BFCS886 6AK 76 6YBH C Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 249 4 Press this softkey and a warm restart is triggered on the control system After the restart is HCK reset ce po finished the corresponding software function is active After you assign one additional axis and set the relevant parameters correctly the additional axis name will be displayed in some operating areas as shown in the following example Fol M Ref Point
107. AM_DIST otherwise a corresponding alarm is triggered The machine axis must come to a halt at the cam otherwise a corresponding alarm is triggered Characteristics when synchronizing with the zero pulse phase 2 Feedrate override is not active Feedrate override 100 is active Termination occurs at feedrate override 0 Feedrate stop is active the axis comes to a halt and a corresponding alarm is displayed The machine axis cannot be stopped and restarted with NC stop NC start Monitoring of the zero mark is active with MD34060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST Characteristics of traversing to the reference point phase 3 The feedrate override and feedrate stop is in effect The machine axis can be stopped and re started with NC stop NC start If reference point offset is smaller than the braking distance of the machine axis from the reference point positioning velocity to stop the reference point is approached from the opposite direction Function Manual 148 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Different motion sequences during referencing Referencing type Synchronizing pulse Motion sequence zero mark BERO With reference cam MD34000 Synchronizing pulse before cam REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE 1 reference coordinate before synchronizing pulse without reversal MD34050 REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERS E 0 Start Output cam Synchronizing pulse Synchronizing pulse on cam reference coordinate after synchronizing pulse on cam wit
108. Action block active Approach block active M00 M01 active Last action block active o1 Referencing active Block search active M2 M30 active al DB3300 DBX0001 Program test active DB3300 DBX0003 Program status Running DB3300 DBX0003 2 Program status Stopped DB3300 DBX0003 l Program status Interrupted DB3300 DBX0003 4 Program status Aborted Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 103 Number Bite Name DB3300 DBX0003 Channel status Active DB3300 DBX0003 6 Channel status Interrupted DB3300 DBX0003 7 Channel status Reset DB3300 DBX4001 AE Workpiece target reached HMI to PLC M01 selected DB1700 DBX0000 l6 Dry run feed rate selected Feed rate override selected for rapid traverse Program test selected DB1700 DBX0002 o Skip block selected DB1900 DBX0000 6e Simulation active ASUP signals Number Bit PLC to NCK DB3400 DBX0000 0 INTI Start DB3400 DBX0001 0 INT2 Start DB3400 DBX1000 0 ASUP ended 1 ASUP is being executed 2 3 Interrupt no not allocated ASUP version not possible DB3400 DBX1001 1 DB3400 DBX1001 2 DB3400 DBX1001 3 ASUP is being executed Interrupt no not allocated DB3400 DBX1001 0 ASUP ended ASUP version not possible 10 Compensation 10 1 Brief description Compensations For the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED the following axis specific compensation functions can be activated e Backlash compensation e Interpolatory compensation leadscrew error
109. Axis specific interlocks Spindle disable pix fx fx x fx fx fx x x fx x fe xe x Controller disable xx x fk x k p k x e x e e Axis disable x fe dk fx bk fx x ix x fe x x fe x Spindle specific interlocks x Interlock can be activated in this status 1 Channel in reset 2 Channel interrupted 3 Channel active 4 Channel interrupted JOG during AUTO interruption 5 Channel interrupted JOG during MDA interruption 6 Channel active JOG in MDA during MDA interruption 7 Channel active JOG in MDA 9 3 Processing a part program 9 3 1 Program mode and part program selection Definition Program mode applies if a part program is processed in the AUTO mode or program blocks are processed in the MDA mode Channel control The Program mode can be controlled even while being executed via interface signals from the PLC These can be either mode group specific or channel specific interface signals The channel reports its current program operation status to the PLC with interface signals Selection A part program can be selected only if the relevant channel is in the Reset state The part program can be selected via EAL SYSTEM M N operator input lt MACHINE gt operating area EE crocran MANAGER gt operating area A e the PLC Selection of a program via the program number in Program list see the Programming and Operating Manual Reselection of an active program via the PLC HMI interface see Section Si
110. Bit DB3200 DBX1000 DB3200 DBX1004 DB3200 DBX1008 DB3200 DBX1000 DB3200 DBX1004 DB3200 DBX1008 DB3200 DBX1000 DB3200 DBX1004 DB3200 DBX1008 DB3200 DBX1000 DB3200 DBX1004 DB3200 DBX1008 DB3300 DBX1000 DB3300 DBX1004 DB3300 DBX1008 DB3300 DBX1000 DB3300 DBX1004 DB3300 DBX1008 DB3300 DBX1001 DB3300 DBX1005 Traversing key lock for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 for geometry axis 3 Rapid traverse override for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 for geometry axis 3 Traversing keys plus or minus for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 for geometry axis 3 Machine function INC1 to continuous for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 for geometry axis 3 Handwheel active 2 1 for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 for geometry axis 3 Traverse command plus or minus for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 for geometry axis 3 Active machine function INC1 to continuous for geometry axis 1 for geometry axis 2 DB3300 DBX1009 j for geometry axis 3 Axis spindle specific DBB380x DBX0000 Feed override DB380x DBX0000 Override active DB380x DBX0002 Delete distance to go DB380x DBX0004 Activate handwheel 2 1 DB380x DBX0004 Traversing key lock DB380x DBX0004 Rapid traverse override DB380x DBX0004 Traversing keys plus or minus DB380x DBX0005 Machine function INC1 up to continuous in axis range DB380x DBX1002 Activated fixed point approach in JOG binary coded fixed point 1 to 4 DB390x DB
111. C nhandwheel Traverse keys and travel command As for continuous traversing see Section Continuous travel Page 63 Abort traversing movement If you do not want to traverse the whole increment the traverse movement can be aborted with RESET or Delete distance to go interface signal DB380x DBX0002 2 7 4 Handwheel traversal in JOG Selection JOG mode must be active The user must also set the increment INC1 INC10 etc which applies to handwheel travel Up to 2 handwheels can be connected This means that up to 2 axes can be traversed by handwheel simultaneously and independently A handwheel is assigned to the geometry or machine axes WCS or MCS via interface signals The axis to be moved as a result of rotating handwheel 1 to 2 can be set e Via the PLC user interface with IS Activate handwheel 1 to 2 For machine axis traverse in MCS DB380x DBX0004 0 to 2 For geometry axis traverse in WCS DB3200 DBX0000 0 to 2 DB3200 DBX0004 0 to 2 DB3200 DBX0008 0 to 2 The assignment is linked to the PLC interface through the PLC user program Only here can several machine axes be assigned to one handwheel simultaneously e Using menu assisted operation HMI Pressing the Melee softkey in the JOG mode basic menu displays the Handwheel window This enables an axis WCS or MCS to be assigned to each handwheel A separate user interface between the HMI and PLC is provided to allow activation of the hand
112. CODE 24110 24120 24200 24210 24800 TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 Deviation of rotary axis from zero position in degrees 1st TRACYL 24810 TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 Sign of rotary axis for TRACYL 1st TRACYL 24820 TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 Distance of tool zero point from origin of geo axes 1st TRACYL 24900 TRANSMIT_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 Deviation of rotary axis from zero position in degrees 1st TRANSMIT 24910 TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 Sign of rotary axis for TRANSMIT 1st TRANSMIT 2491 1 TRANSMIT_POL_SIDE_FIX_1 Limitation of working range in front of behind pole 1st transformation 24920 TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 Distance of tool zero point from origin of geo axes 1st TRANSMIT 11 5 2 Interface signals Number Bit Name 24220 TRAFO_GOEAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 Geo axis assignment for 2nd transformation Channel specific DB3800 DBX0001 6 Transformation active 12 Measurement 12 1 Brief description Channel specific measuring A measurement mode is programmed in a part program block with or without DDTG A trigger event edge of the probe is defined additionally which will trigger the measurement process The instructions apply to all axes programmed in this particular block The program with the measurement process in AUTO mode is executed and can be employed for workpiece or tool measuring Tool measuring in JOG The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED includes operator support for the measurement process in JOG mode specially for measuring tools Ch
113. Cata cccccccssccssscccescccesecensececeueeceueceeeecenseeeseueesseceseecesseeesegeessaeceseseseueessueesnaesenseeeneas 16 4 2 internace signalo sssri E EE E Pee E EE 17 FOOL ToOlCOMPENSAUOM ariris a cn nea re vane tease ncn pe ane ate tae gee 17 1 TOO ANd tool COMPENSATION OVEFVIEW ccccceccceccceeeceeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeesaeeeseeeseeeseeeeaees 17 2 TOO eee tetee Scents E E E Seeeepenes fem eesateemetnatenaeuaauesatcese EEEE ER EEE 17 3 fF 2 6 i ae ane ier E ee en ee ee ee nee eee eee 17 4 Special handling of tool COMPENSALION ccceeccceecccseececeeceeeeeeeeeececeeeeseucesseeeeseeceseecessueessueesseeeeseneesanees 17 5 EM ROS se rads E eee eee PE cies cect cae onesie cece ns ance E A ES EEE ATA 17 5 1 Bee FN AGA es cle en te tae cieeeetstom canna eee aed ane necseenecindecet ena yenewaced deananes baesiacedseeeeaae baeesicecaaseaaaueaeseeedeeeeaee 17 5 2 mtenace Signal Seesen A E EAE AE 18 SOC FAN TIC ola PNE N A A E E A N ou E A A E E E oye eeteemnmsamanaetee se acear 18 1 Multi language support for the machine manufacturer s HMI data Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 T 19 18 2 Calling ai online MGIB errereen a E E 18 3 Calling a standard cycle with auxiliary functions ccccecccecseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeesaeeeessaeeeeeas 18 4 POTS TAY TUN E ETA E A TE E EE EE EEE E E E mesa eadeoreeenaseceeeie 18 5 ROO E yon ING UON a EE 18 6 Pa s
114. D41200 JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO JOG velocity for the spindle The machine and setting data are divided into the following areas Range Dataarea Meaning S O Explanations for the technical data Data types The following data types are used in the control e DOUBLE Floating point value 64 bit value Input limits from 4 19 10 99 to 1 67 1090 e DWORD Integer values 32 bit values Input limits from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 648 decimal as hexadecimal value 0000 through FFFF e BYTE Integer values 8 bit values Input limits from 128 to 127 decimal as hexadecimal value 00 through FF e BOOLEAN Boolean value TRUE 1 or FALSE 0 e STRING Consisting of max 16 American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII characters upper case letters numbers and underscore Detailed explanations e Detailed explanations for the machine setting data and interface signals used can be found in the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Parameter Manual e Detailed explanations of the alarms which may occur can be found in the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Diagnostics Manual Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 9 2 Various Interface Signals 2 1 General Brief description This chapter describes the functionality of various interface signals which are of general relevance but are not described in the function specific chapters Interfaces The exchange of signals and data between the PLC user program and the NCK
115. DBX1001 3 5 This display signal is also reported if the axis reaches the fixed point position in the machine coordinate system using other methods e g NC program synchronized action at the setpoint end and comes to a standstill at the actual value end within the Exact stop fine tolerance window MD36010 STOP_LIMIT_FINE Movement in the opposite direction The response while traversing in the opposite direction i e in the opposite direction to the one used when approaching the fixed point depends on the setting of bit 2 in the following machine data MD10735 JOG_MODE_MASK settings for JOG mode Traversing in the opposite direction is only possible if bit 2 is set Traversing in the opposite direction is blocked if bit 2 is not set and the following channel status message is output if an attempt is made using the traversing keys or the handwheel to traverse in the opposite direction to the one used when approaching the fixed point JOG lt Axis gt direction blocked Approaching other fixed point If a different fixed point is set during the fixed point approach the axis motion is stopped and the following alarm is signaled Alarm 17812 Channel 1 axis 2 fixed point approach in JOG Fixed point changed The message signal JOG Approaching fixed point active displays the number of the newly selected fixed point The JOG traverse must be triggered again to continue traversing Note To avoid the alarm message the machin
116. E iet 7 6 2 SEES 2 e eee ee nee T A ee eee eee ee ee ee eee ee 7 6 3 interface SOM ea Serisine niea RAREN EREEREER AEE AAEREN Auxillary function Outputs to PLO sacccscsecsccadaxstcnndnnnnsuncdbacsenactascdadasaannssennsdenedbacssqedsanntcdasssnussinendeidesecasauceaaatsdantaeucen 8 1 Buer desc ipio eessen E E E E E E E 8 2 Programming of auxiliary FUNCTIONS cccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeessaeeeeseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeas 8 3 Transfer of values and signals to the PLC interface 8 4 Grouping of auxiliary functions Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 8 5 BloCk Search TOSPONS O areias SE asa Er 8 6 Description of auxiliary FUNCTIONS ccccceccccseeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeessaeeeeseaeeeeseeeeessaeeeesaeeeeseeeeeas 8 6 1 MEO ONON eer E E E E EE 8 6 2 TT MG ION eee cscs case nlc ees eee nates eae ese ese eae aust eeeneeeee 8 6 3 PS TMG WO WN ec se pncee seen e E E E E E E E E E ase 8 6 4 PU MVC OON seere E E E a E ene E E S E ae E ES 8 6 5 STNO a eon re Oe ee ene reece ee oe ee rere eee eee 8 7 DA TADIG areire ce dec E E E E E 8 7 1 PNAC FAM NGA aane a r E ea ene ace eE N aa a aide E EE 8 7 2 iterace Signals sss E E N 9 Operating Modes Program Operation cccccccceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeecaeeeeaeesaeeesaeesseeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaassaeessaeeseeesaeeesaeessanenes 9 1 Brecdecen ION eee a r Te E ne et r a eee ere 9 2 ODS PAU MOG C5 s EEE E 9 2 1 DS AUN IN sea ee enna a
117. EA menn OOOO MSGBOX The instruction opens a message box whose return value can be used for branching Syntax lt MSGBOX text lt Message gt caption lt caption gt retvalue lt variable name gt type lt button type gt gt Attributes e text Text caption Header retvalue Name of the variables to which the return value is copied 1 OK 0 CANCEL type Acknowledgement options BTN_OK BTN CANCEL BTN _OKCANCEL If an alarm number is used for the text or caption attribute the message box displays the text which is saved for the number Example lt MSGBOX text Test message caption Information retvalue result type BIN OK gt The tag executes the specified operations For the purpose of accessing the NC PLC and drive data the complete variable name should be placed in quotation marks PLC PLC MB170 NC NC Channel Example lt LET name tmpVar type INT gt lt LET gt lt OP gt tmpVar plc mb170 lt OP gt lt OP gt tmpVar tmpVar 2 lt OP gt lt OP gt plc mb170 tmpVar lt OP gt Character string processing The operation instruction is able to process character strings and assign the results to the string variable specified in the equation The identifier _T should be placed at the start as a means of identifying text terms Formatting of variable values is also possible The identifier _F should be placed at the start of the formatting regulation f
118. EE PE E E EE E EE E NEA A T EEE A E EE E 15 8 1 BUN INN GATA oie ntti ancacie ateins RAR ERAEN AA EE EE EE EAE E EARE AREE EAEE 15 8 2 Se Eo 2 EA E A AE E A E N AE E AE A AE A A E E ere een S 15 8 3 LIS Mea Gl ONS spse e E Ra EE 16 PS OEE eas ee oot scree cee nee ete A A P ANAE E ET E AEE A asthe son E EA E T 16 1 Pa WCCO ale F aon E TE EA eE EE E RE EE E E RERE 16 1 1 PaM TEE raO P rrer EE E AE EEEE AREE 16 1 2 Feedrate with G33 G34 G35 thread cutting ccc cccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeas 16 1 3 Feedrate for G63 tapping with compensation CHUCK ccccceececceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeesaeeeesneeeeeas 16 1 4 Feedrate for G331 G332 tapping without Compensation CHUCK ccccseeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeaeeeeens 16 1 5 Feedrate for chamfer rounding FRC FROM ccccccecccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee cess cesaueeeseeeeseeeesseeesaeeeseeeesees 16 2 Rapid traverse GU sacar ccs aoe de geste A gets es IREE EAE Ee RANEE EEr EREE EEEE RE 16 3 FESE TONTO keer a a 16 3 1 OVIE W eea E EE E EE E E ace tensniendene 16 3 2 Feedrate disable and feedrate spindle Stop cccccccccecccceececeeeeeaeeeseeceseecesseeeeaueeeseeeeseesesseessaeeeseeeesees 16 3 3 Feedrate override via a machine control panel cccccccceeceeeeeceeeceeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeaeeeseees 16 4 Bca E AET A AIS T E EE S A E E A EE E A EE A E E TT 16 4 1 Machine setting
119. EOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 n Geometry axes for transformation 1 MD24200 TRAFO_TYPE_2 Def for second TRACYL transformation MD24210 TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 n Channel axes for transformation 2 MD24220 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_ 2 n Geometry axes for transformation 2 512 513 without with YM axis Required assignment of channel axes for TRACYL transformation in machine data MD24110 Configuration without YM axis TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 0 Channel axis number of axis radial to rotary axis TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 1 Channel axis number of rotary axis TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 2 Channel axis number of axis parallel to rotary axis Configuration without existing YM axis TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 3 Channel axis number of axis parallel to peripheral cylinder surface and perpendicular to rotary axis gt YM axis Machine data specifically for TRACYL e MD24900 TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 Rotational position rotary axis setting when Y 0 in degrees 0 lt 360 Y Angle a b in degrees a Rotational position of rotary axis with C 0 b Position of Y 0 Figure 11 8 Rotational position of axis in the peripheral cylinder surface e MD24910 TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 If the rotary axis rotates in an anti clockwise direction on the X Y plane opposite to the positive Z axis then the MD must be set to 1 otherwise to 0 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 131 X Figure 11 9 Direction of rotation for MD value 1 e MD24920 TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 The control i
120. EP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT n e MD35200 GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL n e MD35210 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL n e MD35310 SPIND_POSIT_DELAY_TIME n 15 5 Programming Functions The spindle can be set for the following functions e G95 Revolutional feedrate e G96 S LIMS Constant cutting rate in m min upper speed limit e G97 Cancel G96 and freeze last spindle speed e G33 G331 G332 Thread cutting tapping e G4S Dwell time in spindle revolutions M3 M4 M5 Das SPOS SPOS DC Pos SPOS ACN Pos SPOS ACP Pos SPOS IC Pos M40 M41 to M45 SPCON SPCOF M70 LIMS Reference CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation Spindle stop without orientation Spindle speed in rpm e g S300 Sa positioning e g SPOS 270 gt at position 270 degrees The block change is only performed when the spindle is in position The direction of motion is retained for positioning while in motion and the position approached When positioning from standstill the position is approached via the shortest path The position is always approached with negative direction of motion If necessary the direction of motion is inverted prior to positioning The position is always approached with positive direction of motion If necessary the direction of motion is inverted prior to positioning The traversing path is specified The direction of traversing is obtained from the sign in front of the traversing path If the spindle is in motio
121. FC feedrate override for circles When machining circular contours using milling tools and the active tool radius compensation G41 G42 the feedrate at the milling cutter center must be adjusted if the programmed F value is intended to be active at the circular contour If the CFC feedrate override is active inside and outside circle machining is detected automatically The feedrate override can be switched off using CFTCP Reference Function Manual 168 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Interface signals If the revolutional feedrate is active IS Revolutional feedrate DB3300 DBX0001 2 is set If the G96 G332 function is active the IS Constant cutting rate active DB390x DBX2002 0 is set for the spindle Alarms e f no F word is programmed at G1 G2 G3 alarm 10860 is issued An axis movement is not possible However please note SD42110 DEFAULT_FEED e f FO is programmed alarm 14800 is issued e f G95 is active and the spindle is stationary an axis movement is not possible No alarm is issued Notes e lf the Dry run feedrate function is activated and the program is started the feedrates programmed in combination with G1 G2 G3 CIP CT will be replaced by the feedrate value stored in SD42100 DRY_RUN_FEED see Section processing with dry run feedrate DRY Page 95 e The velocity of the traversing movement of an axis in the JOG mode is determined by
122. G2 G3 CIP and CT and is retained in a program until a new F word is written Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Dimension units for F G94 G95 The dimension unit for the F word is determined by G functions e G94 F as feedrate in mm min or inch min e G95 F as feedrate in mm rev of the spindle or inch rev only meaningful when the spindle is running The inch dimension system applies with G700 or system setting inch with MD10240 SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC 0 Dimension units for F with G96 G97 For lathes the group with G94 G95 has been extended by the G96 G97 functions for the constant cutting rate ON OFF These functions also influence the S word With activated G96 function the spindle speed is adapted to the currently machined workpiece diameter transverse axis such that a programmed cutting rate S remains constant on the tool edge spindle speed times diameter constant The S word is evaluated as the cutting rate as of the block with G96 G96 is modally effective until cancellation by another G function of the group G94 G95 G97 The feedrate F is always evaluated in the unit of dimension of mm rotation or inch rotation as for G95 Maximum tool path velocity The maximum path velocity is obtained from the maximum velocities of the relevant axes MD32000 MAX_AX_VELO and their proportion of the path The maximum velocity of an axis stored in the machine data cannot be exceeded C
123. Gantry axis lt DB390x DBX50 1 1 05 7 05 6 Gantry grouping is synchronized lt DB390x DBX50 x 05 5 Gantry synchronization ready to start lt DB390x DBX50 x 05 4 Gantry warning limit exceeded lt DB390x DBX50 xX 05 3 05 2 x relevant for Effect of axial interface signals on gantry axes a Axial interface signals from PLC to axis PLC gt NCK The axial interface signals from the PLC to the axis are always referred to all gantry axes in the grouping In this case all gantry axes leading and synchronized axis have equal priority For example all axes in the gantry groupings will be simultaneously shut down when the following interface signal is set to 0 from the leading axis DB380x DBX0002 1 servo enable The following table shows the effect of individual interface signals from PLC to axis on gantry axes Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 53 Table 6 3 Effect of interface signals from PLC to axis on leading and synchronized axes PLC interface signal Address Synchronized axis Axis spindle disable DB380x DBX0001 3 On all axes in gantry No effect grouping D Hardware limit switch minus plus B380x DBX1000 0 Axial alarm Brake request on all axes in gantry 1 grouping 2 Hardware limit switch minus plus DB380x DBX1000 2 Axial Axial 3 Select drive parameter set DB380x DBX4001 0 Axial 2 Enable Pulses DB380x DBX4001 7 Either the Follow up state IS of one gantry axis 1
124. I to P controller Pulse enable DB380x DBX4001 7 The PLC user program enables the pulses for the axis spindle However the pulse enable is only activated for the drive module if all the enable signals are present 2 3 Signals from NCK to PLC 2 3 1 General signals Drives in cyclic operation DB2700 DBX2 5 The PLC is signaled via the NCK by means of a cyclical exchange of data that the available drives have reached ramp up status Drive ready DB2700 DBX2 6 The PLC is signaled via NCK that all available drives are ready to operate IS Drive Ready group signal is active on all axes and spindles NCK alarm is active DB2700 DBX3 0 The control sends this signal to the PLC to indicate that at least one NCK alarm is active An enquiry can be made via the channel specific interface DB3300 DBX4 7 as to whether a processing stop has been triggered Ambient temperature alarm DB2700 DBX3 6 The ambient temperature or fan monitoring function has responded NCK alarm channel specific active DB3300 DBX4 6 The control system sends this signal to the PLC to indicate that at least one NCK alarm is active for the channel To what extent this may influence whether the current program run will be interrupted or aborted can be determined from IS NCK alarm with processing stop is active DB3300 DBX4 7 External language mode active DB3300 DBX4001 0 The control system sends this signal to the PLC to indicate that the active progr
125. IN lt t gt initial position e AN_CEC_MAX lt t gt end position e AN_CEC_DIRECTION s lt t gt direction dependent compensation This system variable is used to set whether the compensation table lt t gt should apply to both positive and negative traversing directions of the basic axis AN_CEC_DIRECTION lt t gt 1 Table applies only to the positive traversing direction of the basic axis AN_CEC_DIRECTION st gt 1 Table applies only to the negative traversing direction of the basic axis Note The setting AN_CEC_DIRECTION lt t gt 0 table is effective for both traversing directions of the basic axis is not relevant for the direction dependent LEC e AN_CEC_IS_MODULO s lt t gt compensation with modulo function System of units Table parameters containing position information are automatically converted when the system of units is changed change from MD10240 MN_SCALING_SYSTEM_IS_METRIC The position information is always interpreted in the current measuring system Conversion must be implemented externally Automatic conversion of the position data can be configured as follows e MD10260 MN_CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM 1 With this setting the following axial machine data is activated e MD32711 MA_CEC_SCALING_SYSTEM_METRIC measuring system for sag compensation The measuring system for all tables effective for this axis is set in this machine data Hereby all position entries are interpre
126. IT in a separate block and de activated with e TRAFOOF in a separate block TRAFOOF deactivates any active transformation function Programming principle N10 GO X Z SPOSS starting positions spindle in position control N20 G17 G94 T plane feed type select milling tool N30 SETMS 2 switchover master spindle is now the milling spindle N40 TRANSMIT switch on TRANSMIT N50 G1 G41 F200 X Y Z M3 S milling of the face with milling tool radius compensation N90 G40 N100 TRAFOOF switch off TRANSMIT N110 G18 G95 T switch back to turning N120 SETMS master spindle is main spindle Explanation The movement of the machine axes XM and CM produces the contour on the face end of the turned part with the milling cutter in accordance with the X Y path programmed straight or circular path The programmed Z axis infeed continues to be traversed as the Z axis 11 2 2 TRANSMIT configuration Machine data The names of the machine data channel axes and geometry axes from the general machine data MN_AXCONF and channel specific machine data MC_AXCONF are also used for a transformation The geometry axis assignments specified in MD20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB only apply when the transformation is de activated Additional assignments are specified for a transformation Note The assigned machine axis names channel axis names and geometry axis names must differ e MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX
127. Interpolation points Linear interpolation Figure 10 3 Compensation table parameters system variables for LEC Function Manual 108 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 10 3 3 Direction dependent leadscrew error compensation 10 3 3 1 Description of functions If the direction dependent differences at the compensation points are excessively high for an inconsistent backlash or for extremely high demands placed on the precision then it may be necessary to apply direction dependent compensation of the leadscrew error or measuring system error for direct position sensing Direction dependent leadscrew error compensation For the direction dependent leadscrew error compensation direction dependent LEC or also Bidirectional LEC two compensation tables are used for each axis One compensation table for the positive and one compensation table for the negative traversing direction The deviation at the particular compensation point is entered as difference between the ideal setpoint and measured actual value in the compensation tables The control automatically calculates compensation values of intermediate values using linear interpolation Preconditions activation The direction dependent LEC function does not become active until the following conditions are fulfilled e The function has been activated for the relevant machine axis compensation axis MD32710 MA_CEC_ENABLE lt AxXi gt 1 e The compensation values are stored in
128. L gt Example of a progress bar lt CONTROL name progressl xpos 10 ypos 10 width 100 fieldtype progressbar hotlink true refvar nck Channel GeometricAxis actProgPos 1 gt lt PROPERTY min 0 gt lt PROPERTY max 1000 gt lt CONTROL gt Example list box lt let name item string type string gt lt let gt lt let name item data gt lt let gt lt CONTROL ame IIrsthboOx1L xpos 360 yoos 150 width 200 height 200 fieldtype listbox gt e Adding elements Elements are added using the function additem or loaditem e Deleting the content The content is deleted using the function empty lt Op gt item string T c xtl n lt op gt SFUnCe LOM Name control additen gt TALS Sto vem String item data lt function gt lt op gt item string T text2 n lt op gt lt TUNCELON Tame Control sadditem gt T listbox 2temstring item data lt function gt Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 221 mae Men OOOO CONTROL continued Example graphic box lt CONTROL name graphic xpos 8 ypos 23 width 300 height 352 fieldtype graphicbox gt e Adding elements Elements are added using the function additem or loaditem The following 2d elements can be used Line I inc Circle sector c ircle Point p oint Structure of an element lt Element type gt coordinates e Line l xs ys xe ye line
129. MD n1max max spindle speed of the 1st gear stage gimin min spindle speed of the 1st gear stage for autom gear stage selection gimax max spindle speed of the 1st gear stage for autom gear stage selection n2max max spindle speed of the 2nd gear stage g2min min spindle speed of the 2nd gear stage for autom gear stage selection g2max max spindle speed of the 2nd gear stage for autom gear stage selection Figure 15 6 Gear stage change with gear stage selection Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 159 Defining a gear stage A gear stage can be defined as follows e Permanent definition in the part program M41 to M45 e Automatic definition by the programmed spindle speed M40 In the case of M40 the spindle must be in the control mode for automatic gear stage selection with an S value The gear stage change is otherwise rejected and alarm 22000 Gear change not possible is output M41 to M45 The gear stage can be permanently defined in the part program with M41 to M45 If a gear stage is defined by M41 to M45 which is different than the current actual gear stage the IS Change gear DB390x DBX2000 3 and the IS Set gear stage A to C DB390x DBX2000 0 to 2 are set The programmed spindle speed S then refers to this permanently defined gear stage If a spindle speed exceeding the maximum speed of the permanently defined gear stage is programmed the speed is limited to the maximum speed of
130. MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 2 C MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 3 SP2 MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 4 Initial setting of master spindle in channel MD20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND 1 TRACYL transformation type for second transformation Without groove wall offset no YM axis MD24100 TRAFO_TYPE_2 512 Axis assignment in channel MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 0 1 MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 1 3 MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 2 2 MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 3 0 MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 4 0 Assignment of geometry axes to channel axes MD24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 0 1 MD24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 1 3 MD24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_2 2 2 Special TRACYL settings Offset of rotary axis MD24800 TRACYL_ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 0 Sign of rotary axis MD24810 TRACYL_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 1 Vector of base tool MD24820 TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 0 0 MD24820 TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 1 0 MD24820 TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 2 0 Setting data for the special treatment of the tool offset only when required Change of tool length component for change of plane D42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST 18 Assignment of the tool length offset independent of tool type D42950 TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE 2 Settings for second spindle milling spindle of the lathe MD30300 IS_ROT_AX AX4 1 MD30310 ROT_IS_ MODULO AX4 1 MD30320 DISPLAY_IS_ MODULO AX4 1 MD35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX AX4 2 SD43300 ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCEJAX4 0 Note A special handling of milling tools on lathes
131. MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE 100 number of NC blocks for the block preparation MD28070 MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP number of blocks for the block preparation MD32310 MA_MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR lt Value for G64 overload factor for axial velocity jumps operation gt Programming Switch on Compressor functions are activated using the modal G commands COMPON COMPCURV or COMPCAD To further improve the surface quality the functions G642 rounding function and SOFT jerk limitation can be used The commands must be written together at the beginning of the program Example Program code Comment PROC Jei N10 COMPCAD SOFT G642 Activating the COMPCAD compressor NZ OM GOS aea Tae ike E eine gt Traversing DLOCkS A re M N1O00 COMPOF Deactivation of the compressor N1010 RET Deactivation All compressor functions are deactivated using the COMPOF command References The programming of the compressor functions is described in Programming and Operating Manual Milling 4 5 2 Combine short spline blocks Function During the preparation of spline blocks blocks with short lengths can always occur between blocks with long lengths This can mean that the path velocity must always be significantly reduced before these short blocks With the Combine short spline blocks function the spline blocks are prepared in such a way that blocks with short lengths are avoided and therefore traversing can be performed smoothly with a high path ve
132. OG end 1 Description Channel status Program status Operating modes R aborted N aborted A AUTO U interrupted U interrupted M MDA A running S stopped J JOG A running 9 3 11 Example of a timing diagram for a program run NC START from PEG eiasaaviw ci intnmarneninivinniac NG STOP fr mi PLUG isciiiiersasi seusddeceececosedsersnucesphestechdadbenedes IS NC Start disable DB3200 DBX0007 0 00ee IS Read in disable DB3200 DBX0006 1 eee IS Controller enable axis DB380x DBX0002 1 0 08 IS Feed STOP axis DB380x DBX0004 3 08 IS Controller enable spindle DB380x DBX0002 1 T IS Spindle STOP DB380x DBX0004 3 1 11115111110110111 T7 SE f AE es IS Program status running DB3300 DBX0003 0 3 IS Program status aborted DB3300 DBX0003 4 IS Program status stopped DB3300 DBX0003 2 a a a IS Traverse command plus DB390x DBX0004 7 IS Exact stop fine DB390x DBX0000 7 cece IS Spindle stationary DB390x DBX0001 4 ccceeeeeeees SA IS Spindle in setpoint range DB390x DBX2001 5 sail gt t5 Spindle ramp up Axis running Explanation Program controlling input signals generated by PLC user program N10 G01 G90 X100 M3 S1000 F1000 M88 N20 MO t4 Block advance to N20 stopped with Read in disa
133. P40 0BAO 08 2013 31 e f auxiliary functions are to be output after the traverse motion they are output after the interpolator end of the block e lf an executable block contains no travel information for the path axes the previous block is terminated on reaching the selected exact stop criterion e A block is terminated on interpolator end if the following block contains the changeover of the acceleration profile BRISK SOFT e If the function Empty buffer STOPRE is programmed the previous block is terminated when the selected exact stop criterion is reached Velocity 0 in continuous path mode Regardless of the implicit exact stop response the path motion is braked down to zero velocity at the end of the block in cases where e The time taken to position a spindle programmed with SPOS is longer than the travel time of the path axes The block change is carried out when the exact stop fine of the positioning spindle is reached e A synchronization process needs to be carried out see Section General Page 30 Auxiliary function output during traversal If the traversal time is not sufficient due to the programmed path length and velocity of the block with auxiliary function output the path velocity for the block is reduced such that the acknowledgment of the auxiliary function can arrive with a PLC cycle time If the acknowledgment is not received within one PLC cycle time the following prepared block cannot be process
134. R REAL INTEGER C CHAR S STRING 3 Separator e Minimum value space maximum value e Minimum value space maximum value e different values for selection e different characters use space to separate the different characters Note that you can also define different pictures for the characters 5 Separator i 6 Default value Value passed in the cycle if no entry is made 7 Separator i 8 Help information the identifier defined in the cycle text file 9 End of variable declaration 10 Start of description 11 Short text The text displayed in the parameter screen form defined in the cycle text file 12 Separator 13 Text in the screen Text preceding the input screen A maximum of 5 characters in length 14 End of description 15 Line specific image B name bmp Note Separators start and end identifiers must always be entered The lines 4 6 and 15 can be left blank If no texts are stored with the identifier three question marks appear in the associated fields on the screen Example ICN1 CYCLE100 R O 99999 999 83002 83003 DIA R O 99999 999 83004 83005 DIAF R 9999 999 99999 999 83004 83004 STAP R 9999 999 99999 999 83025 83005 ENDP R O 99999 999 83026 83006 MID Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 195 R O 99999 999 83027 83007 UX I O 1 2 0 83028 83008 MACH B CN1 R 1 99999 999 1 83029 83009 VRT M17 18 7 4 Creating the user cycle file
135. SIEMENS SINUMERIK SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Function Manual User Manual Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety as well as to prevent damage to property The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger AX DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken A WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken If more than one degree of danger is present the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage Qualified Personnel The product system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation in particular its warning notices and safety instructions Qualified personnel are those who based on their training and experience are capable of
136. SMIT General settings Axis names XM gt X1 ZM gt Z1 CM gt SP1 e Machine axis name MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB O X1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 1 2Z1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 2 SP1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 3 SP2 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 4 e Assignment of geometry axis to channel axis MD20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 0 MD20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 1 0 MD20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 2 2 e Geometry axis names in channel MD20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 0O X MD20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 1 Y MD20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 2 Z e Valid machine axis numbers in channel MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 0 1 MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 1 2 MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 2 3 MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 3 4 MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 4 0 e Channel axis names in channel MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 0O X MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 1 2 MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 2 C MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 3 SP2 MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 4 e Initial setting of master spindle in channel MD20090 SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND 1 TRANSMIT transformation type e Definition of transformation 1 in channel MD24100 TRAFO_TYPE_1 256 e Axis assignment for the 1st transformation in the channel MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 0 1 MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 1 3 MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 2 2 MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 3 0 MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 4 0 e Assignment of geometry axes to chan
137. SN CEC TABLE ENABLE 0 0 lock Table 1 SSN CEC TABLE ENABLE 1 0 lock Table 2 NEWCONF AN CEC 0 0 0 lst compensation value interpolation point 0 SAN CEC 0 1 0 001 2nd compensation value interpolation point 1 SAN CEC 0 2 0 004 3rd compensation value interpolation point 2 SAN CEC 0 3 0 0034 4th compensation value interpolation point 3 SAN CEC 0 4 0 0013 oth compensation value interpolation point 4 SAN CEC 0 5 0 0004 6th compensation value interpolation point 5 SAN CEC 0 6 0 0016 7th compensation value interpolation point 6 PAN CEC 0 7 0 0026 8th compensation value interpolation point 7 AN CEC 0 8 0 001 9th compensation value interpolation point 8 SAN CEC 0 9 0 0023 10th compensation value interpolation point 9 SAN CEC 0 10 0 0031 last compensation value interpolation point 10 SAN CEC INPUT AXIS 0 AX1 basic axis AN CEC OUTPUT AXIS 0 AX1 Compensation axis PAN CEC STHEP O 58 0 Finterpolation point distance SAN CEC MIN 0 585 0 compensation Starts SAN CEC MAX O 5 0 compensation ends Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAOQ 08 2013 113 AN CEC DIRECTION O 1 Table applies for positive traversing directions SAN CEC MULT BY TABLE 0 0 no multiplication not relevant here SAN CEC IS MODULO 0 0 compensation without modulo function SAN CEC 1 0 0 002 interpolation point 0 AN CEC 1 1 0 0017 interpolation point 1 SAN CEC 121 00053 interpola
138. SSS aa S MD35130 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT 2 maximum speed for gear stage 2 a Tea MD35110 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO 2 maximum speed for gear change 2 F Yy MD35130 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT 1 maximum speed for gear stage 1 MD35110 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO 1 maximum speed for gear change 1 DEE MD35120 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO 2 MD35140 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT 2 MD35120 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO 1 MD35140 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT 1 minimum speed for gear change 2 minimum speed for gear stage 2 minimum speed for gear change 1 minimum speed for gear stage 1 Figure 15 7 Example for speed ranges for automatic gear stage selection M40 Gear stage change A new gear stage can only be selected when the spindle is stationary The spindle is stopped internally in the control if a gear stage change is requested If the new gear stage is preselected by M40 and spindle speed or M41 to M45 the IS Set gear stage A to C DB390x DBX2000 0 to 2 and the IS Change Function Manual 160 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 gear DB390x DBX2000 4 are set At the point when the IS Oscillation speed DB380x DBX2002 5 is enabled the spindle decelerates to a stop with the acceleration for oscillation or with the acceleration for speed control position control The next block in the part program after the gear stage change via M40 and S value or M41 to M45 is not performed same effect as if the IS Read in disable DB3200 DBX0006 1 were
139. Starup Ol ganty OKOS srini snr onas E occ ES EESE ERE nance eaten 6 5 PLC interface signals for gantry axes cccceecccceescecceeececceeeeceeeeecauececceeeecsaeeessaseesseueeesseeeeesseesessneeenas 6 6 Miscellaneous points regarding gantry AXES ccccceccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeesseeeseeeseeeesaeeesaaees 6 7 Fa AOS a cee geese EA E E E A E T 6 7 1 Creating a gantry grouping ccccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeee ee eeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeseaeeeeaaeeeesaeeeesaaeeeeaaeeeesaeeeesaeeeesaees 6 7 2 Setting of NCK PLC interface ccccccccccsesceccesececeeseecceeseecceaseecsegeeecsaeeeseeeessaaseessaueeessueeessegeeesseneeessass 6 7 3 Commencing star UP cccecenctensceceedsenetontnnbecusedntedanasttadordutestonrs iabedecedabetargatGadendwmeeSondaebedere dabetiocesbiedeetentetenasetes 6 7 4 Seting warning and Tip MMS visectcseresdasecenseseonnisow acid eatiwaidiesiseddoadioeniaeradentiactnass dosidanoantencubemddidacteocmiteds 6 8 DM ISS ecstatic a re E cases ce eat cet E E 6 8 1 Machine G 2 aun eee eee ee ae ns ee ar eee ee ee eee ee eee ene ee eee eee ee 6 8 2 Menace Signals cae eee Se Se seach acid signees ae se se ances oot Sennen EEEE EEEE Manual Operation and Handwheel traversal cccsccsscsseecseeceeceeeseeecanesneceesseeceeeeeesanecaeeseeeanesseeseeseeeseeeteeesaees 7 1 General characteristics of traversing in JOG eccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeesaeeeeseeeeesaeeee
140. TR OCs tio SOS 34 gt R Parameter 1 lt TEXT gt lt TEXT xpos 23 ypos 54 gt R Parameter 2 lt TEXT gt lt TEXT xpos 23 ypos 74 gt R Parameter 3 lt TEXT gt lt PAINT gt lt FORM gt Dialog box message The tag is executed immediately after the dialog box is generated All the input elements and hotlinks for the dialog form should be created here Function Manual 222 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 ere Menn OOOO FOCUS_IN Dialog box message The tag is called if the system places the focus on a control In order to identify the control the system copies the name of the control to variable focus_nameand the value of the attribute item_data to variable focus_item_data The system creates the variables automatically This message can be used for example to output images depending on the focus position Example lt FOCUS in gt lt PRINE text focus on filed s odro focus name nfocu us item data lt PRINI gt lt focus in gt PAINT Dialog box message The tag is executed when the dialog box is displayed All the texts and images which are to be displayed in the dialog box should be specified here Further the tag is executed if the system identifies that parts of the dialog box are to be redisplayed For example this can be initiated by closing high level windows TIMER Dialog box message The tag is executed cyclically Each form is assigned a timer that initiates that the timer tag is exe
141. TRAFO_RESET_VALUE active transformation after RESET Please note on selection e Tool radius compensation must be deselected G40 e The frame which was active prior to TRANSMIT TRACYL is deselected by the control G500 e The control deselects an active working area limit for axes affected by the transformation WALIMOF e Continuous path control and rounding are interrupted e An instructed intermediate movement block with chamfer or radius is not inserted Please note on deselection e Tool radius compensation must be deselected G40 e Continuous path control and rounding are interrupted e An instructed intermediate movement block with chamfer or radius is not inserted e Following TRANSMIT TRACYL deselection zero offsets Frame and all settings used for the turning operation are to be reset Operating modes operating mode changeover e The program processing with TRANSMIT TRACYL is performed in AUTOMATIC e tis possible to interrupt the AUTOMATIC operation and change over to JOG When returning to AUTOMATIC mode the operator must ensure a problem free repositioning of the tool e Axes cannot be referenced when a transformation is active Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 135 11 5 Data lists 11 5 1 Machine data Identifier Name Channel specific Definition of the control basic setting after run up and RESET part program end access only possible at protection level 1 1 22534 TRAFO_CHANGE_M_
142. The START command is not effective if the prerequisite is not fulfilled Then one of the following interrupts occurs 10200 10202 10203 9 3 3 Part program interruption Channel status The STOP command is executed only if the channel concerned is in the Channel active status DB3300 DBX0003 5 STOP commands There are various commands which stop processing of the program and set the channel status to interrupted e IS NC Stop at block limit DB3200 DBX0007 2 e IS NC stop DB3200 DBX0007 3 e IS NC Stop axes plus spindle DB3200 DBX0007 4 e IS Single block DB3200 DBX0000 4 e Programming command MO or M1 and corresponding activation Execution of command After execution of the STOP command IS Program status stopped DB3300 DBX0003 2 and the IS Channel status interrupted DB3300 DBX0003 6 are set Processing of the interrupted part program can continue from the point of interruption with another START command The following actions are executed when the STOP command is triggered Function Manual 82 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 e Part program processing is stopped at the next block limit with NC stop at block limit MO M1 or single block processing is stopped immediately with the other STOP commands e Any auxiliary functions of the current block not yet output are no longer output e The axes are stopped with subsequent stop of the part program processing e The block indicator stops at the point of in
143. X Read measured value in workpiece coordinates N50 R12 R12 1 N60 IF R12 lt 11 GOTOB ANF Repeat 10 times N65 MO N70 M02 N80 FEHL1 MSG Probe not switching N90 MO N95 M02 The measurement results R1 to R10 can be read after selecting the parameter display 12 5 Tool measuring in JOG Measuring principle The employed tool is traversed to the probe by the user in the JOG mode using the traverse keys or handwheel The measuring program controls the real measurement sequence with a second approach of the probe and further positioning In the end the tool offsets are entered Advantage The entered offset values before measuring the tool can deviate entirely from the actual values The tools must not be pre measured Note The tool is re measured not its wear Softkeys and templates are provided for use by the user in the JOG mode This supports the user during tool measuring Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Note The PLC user program must be created with the necessary sequences The functionality is not available beforehand Extreme caution must be taken when approaching the probe The probes only have a limited deflection path They will be damaged or destroyed if this is exceeded Observe the machine manufacturer s instructions In particular the approach speed should be reduced to such an extent that the probe can always be stopped promptly Rapid traverse override may not be a
144. X0000 2 to the NCK geze 5 The next direction of approach axis for traversing to the probe is selected with this softkey step The further procedure is analogous until all directions axes have been traversed After measuring or probe calibration is complete the function can be deselected via the Back softkey This also resets the IS Measuring in JOG active DB1700 DBX0003 0 It is also reset when the operating area is exited The automatic lt 4 program can be cancelled via IS Reset DB3000 DBX0000 7 or measuring in JOG can be closed via the Back softkey This also cancels any set IS Feed disable DB3200 DBX0006 0 and IS Change mode disable DB3000 DBX0000 4 or intermediately saved signals PLC user program The required functionality corresponding with the above described procedure in the PLC user program must be provided by the user The toolbox for the SINUMERIK 808D supplied by SIEMENS includes a user example in the PLC library You can use this In this case it should be noted that PLC_INI SBR32 and MCP_NCK SBR38 must always be opened in OB1 as these transfer the signals of the MEAS_JOG SBR43 subroutine to the NCK HMI Function Manual 142 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 12 6 Data table 12 6 1 Machine data Identifier Name General 13200 MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE Switching characteristics of probe 12 6 2 Interface signals Number Bit Name HMI signals from HMI to PLC DB
145. X0000 Position reached with coarse fine exact stop DB390x DBX0004 Handwheel active 2 1 DB390x DBX0004 Traverse command plus or minus DB390x DBX0005 Active machine function INC1 to continuous DB390x DBX1001 Fixed point approach in JOG active binary coded DB390x DBX1001 Fixed point reached binary coded o_o 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 T 8 Auxiliary function outputs to PLC 8 1 Brief description Auxiliary functions For the purpose of workpiece machining operations it s possible to program process related functions feedrate spindle speed or gear stages and functions for controlling additional devices on the machine tool sleeve forward gripper open clamp chuck in the part program in addition to axis positions and interpolation methods This is performed with the auxiliary functions as collective term for various types The following types of auxiliary functions are available e Miscellaneous function M e Spindle function S e Auxiliary function H e Tool number T e Tool offset D e Feed F for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED there is no output from F to PLC Output of auxiliary functions to PLC The auxiliary function output sends information to the PLC indicating for example when the NC program needs the PLC to perform specific switching operations on the machine tool The auxiliary functions are output together with their parameters to the PLC The values and signals must be processed by the PLC user progr
146. XNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN amp 8 Then turn off the control and turn it on again or perform the control start up through the softkey and define the remaining machine data with a subsequent restart of the control Table 8 3 Entries into the machine data for the example Indexn MD22000 MD22010 MD22020 MD22030 GROUP Tre EXTENSION Wave 8 5 Block search response Block search with calculation For the block search with calculation all auxiliary functions that are assigned to a group are collected and are issued at the end of the block search before the actual re entry block except for group 1 MO M1 The last auxiliary function of a group is issued All collected auxiliary functions are issued in a separate block as regular auxiliary functions and before the movement Note If the auxiliary functions are to be collected during the block search they must be assigned to an auxiliary function group 8 6 Description of auxiliary functions 8 6 1 M function Application You can use the M functions to enable the various switching operations on the machine per part program Scope of functions e Five M functions per part program block are possible e Value range of M functions 0 to 99 integer number e Permanent functions have already been assigned to some of the M functions by the control manufacturer see the Programming and Operating Manual The functions not yet assigned fixed functions are reserved for free use of the machine manuf
147. X_SET_VELO JOG velocity for rotary axes or SD41200 JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO JOG velocity for the spindle e f the corresponding SD is zero the appropriate axis specific MD32020 JOG_VELO conventional axis velocity applies In this case the value of the assigned machine axis is used for geometry axes X gt X1 Y gt Y1 Z gt Z1 for default setting Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 61 Rapid traverse override If in the case of machine axes the rapid traverse override key is pressed at the same time as the traversing keys then the movement is executed at the rapid traverse velocity set in axis specific MD32010 JOG_VELO_RAPID axis velocity in JOG mode with rapid traverse override The value of the assigned machine axis is used for geometry axes X gt X1 Y gt Y1 Z gt Z1 for default setting The separate PLC interface area of the geometry axes must be used for control Velocity override The velocity at which axes traverse in JOG can also be influenced by the axis specific feedrate override switch for machine axes provided that axis specific IS Override active DB380x DBX0001 7 is set If the switch is set at 0 the axis is not traversed even if IS Override active is not set The channel specific feedrate override switch applies to geometry axes or in the case of rapid traverse override the rapid traverse override switch The activated spindle override switch applies to the spindle Acceleration The maxi
148. _NAME_TAB e MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB e MD20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB Exception for TRANSMIT The axis names of MD20060 and MD20080 geometry and channel axes can be the same e g X Y Z No Y axis exists here outside the transformation Machine data for transformation MD24100 TRAFO_TYPE_1 256 for first TRANSMIT transformation MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 n Channel axes for transformation 1 Function Manual 124 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 MD24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 n Geometry axes for transformation 1 MD24200 TRAFO_TYPE_2 256 for second TRANSMIT transformation MD24210 TRAFO_AXES_IN_2 n Channel axes for transformation 2 MD24220 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_ 2 n Geometry axes for transformation 2 Required assignment of channel axes for TRANSMIT transformation in machine data MD24110 MD24210 TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 2 0 Channel axis number of axis perpendicular to rotary axis TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 2 1 Channel axis number of rotary axis TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 2 2 Channel axis number of axis parallel to rotary axis Machine data specifically for TRANSMIT e MD24900 TRANSMIT _ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 Rotational position of Cartesian coordinate system x y plane with respect to the defined zero position of rotary axis in degrees 0 lt 360 e MD24910 TRANSMIT_ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 If the rotary axis rotates in an anti clockwise direction on the X Y plane opposite to the positive Z axis then the MD must be set to 1 otherwise to 0 Fig
149. _POSCTRL_VELO position control activation speed is not exceeded The traversing path to the end point is calculated If the end point can be accessed immediately from this phase Phase 3a 4a continues instead of Phase 2 Phase 2 Acceleration has been performed up to the speed set in MD35300 SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO position control activation speed The brake application point calculation identifies when the programmed spindle position SPOS can be approached with the acceleration defined in MD35210 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL Phase 3 and Phase 4 The sequence for Deceleration and Position reached is the same as for non synchronized spindles Spindle reset The positioning process can be aborted with the IS Delete distance to go spindle reset DB380x DBX0002 2 However the spindle remains in positioning mode Notes e n positioning mode the spindle speed override switch continues to be valid e Positioning SPOS is cancelled with Reset or NC stop 15 3 Synchronization Why synchronize The control must be synchronized with the position measurement system on the spindle so that the control knows the exact 0 degree position when switched on Only a synchronized spindle is capable of thread cutting or positioning For axes this process is referred to as referencing see Chapter Reference Point Approach Installation position of the position measurement system e Directly on the motor in combination with a BERO proximity swit
150. a shm AARM gt S data gt FS data HMI data folder gt Hane Type Length Date E Customized bitmaps User cycle files jEasyxLanguage scripts CI0EM online help txt png bnp CjExtended user text file falme txt O E GIDEH manual Coemmanual pdf tY CIPLC alarm texts falcu txt CI0EM slideshow bnp pnq CI0EM R variable name file rparan_name txt 7Service planner task name file svc_tasks txt In the factory setting the MD description files in the two default languages are prepared on the control but invisible to the machine manufacturer The machine manufacturer can load files of this type only after modifying the description of at least one of their MDs The detailed procedure is as follows 4s AN 1 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM H 2 Press these two softkeys in succession ach IMD data l 7 Then select a certain MD with keys and and then press the following Edit Edit OEH iD tert descr 3 In the following dialog edit the description text of the MD as desired for example B888 Hame USER_DATA_INT Then save the modification with the following v OK 4 Access the OEM MD description file folder by performing the steps mentioned above At this time a file containing the change log in the corresponding language exists in the folder Function Manual 202 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Copy 5 Press these two softkeys in s
151. a rapid stop both acceleration profiles are inactive Further information about velocity acceleration and jerk whilst traversing in continuous path mode and at block transitions can be found in Chapter Continuous Path Mode Exact Stop and LookAhead B1 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 39 Note We recommend setting the following machine data for each axis with the same values MD32431 MAX_AX_JERK and MD32432 PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM maximum axis specific jerk for path movement at block transition 5 3 Jerk limitation in JOG mode The jerk limitation is active for axes in JOG mode during e jogging e handwheel jogging e repositioning The jerk limitation is not active during e reference point approach with e alarms that initiate a rapid stop Jerk limitation can be determined for specific axes The acceleration response corresponds with the SOFT acceleration profile of path related jerk limitation This limitation cannot be deselected for the axes in the relevant modes The axes for which jerk limitation is to be programmed can be selected with MD32420 JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE The permissible axis specific maximum jerk is stored in MD32430 JOG_AND_POS_MAX_JERK 5 4 Data lists Machine data Identifier po Name Axis specific 32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL 32420 JOG_AND_POS_JERK_ENABLE Enabling axis specific jerk limitation a A _AND_POS_MAX_JERK Axis rae a a 32431 MAX_AX_ MAX AXJERK Maximum axis Maximum axis spec
152. aaeeeesaees 7 2 ola lg Ue oom 11a meen meer tetera esate Reto rer te rane rte eter ane nc ree eee en ne eee eee 7 3 Incremental travel INC ccs ccccuseehasesccedaenesine sanessvadanseuesenzevavedaseseec esesvedeneiuea adeeueadensessesbuesevedceeeuuevneexteadene 7 4 Handwheel traversal in JOG ase iosccsesanacwcsdunenscaageaeecadeccatsanceagendoeauassendeanenaduceesaaaaeanenaeuesuiane seaantedeccapenacesdesines 7 5 Fixed point approach MJOC aaneeenen enn een ee ene en ere raar eee ene ee ee ee ee eee 7 5 1 BU CI OCHO Ns shot tastes anette dees be cege casa sedaze castes bose dae conden t dare actors a e oeonretousdaciecreunncaanedane 7 9 2 FAC HOMILY atx sededancadstancsuaroctatessaduncinatiostacadengnssnanodsenanacnainatieshunadsatus she tieehanandesusnakiestunadadsusshatnntuleanas busine teahaeaais 7 5 3 Parameter setting ataniantwtenarsdnnaiemencteununteluastratscbunosa ts neat isantsuauanlomaintdwksmonsdn vadhaaeuneneenddtansasivitsansinbaiimustenoest Tecate 7 9 4 FS IMI seater cs eo AE EE E EA anata ad saben ied seen aedenen sendin 7 9 5 Supplementary CONAIIONS cccccccceccceececseeeecececeeeeceeeeseeeeeseeeeceacessaeeeseeeeseeeeseaeessaeesseeeeseueesseeesseeesseeeess 7 5 6 APOICaUOMEXAMPIE rss nee epee mr ne tence ee nee ee re ee ee eee eee 7 6 PVM er MN ace hase tse ech oe E a ees Stearate soe eeu ee see pt eee ce E oats 7 6 1 Machine Velie tecc cee tnet teceeeect ce necetceteeesccusdcettaentenescccedes patensbe seth nett oxeeeet cede
153. able is also started e As soon as the actual speed has reached the zero speed range the drive controller enable is removed Checkback signal to PLC with IS Speed controller active DB390x DBX1 6 0 state The controller enable of the drive is removed at the latest after the time set in MD36620 SERVO_DISABLE_DELAY_TIME has expired e Notice If the setting for the controller enable shutdown delay is too small the controller enable will be removed even though the axis spindle is still moving The axis spindle is then stopped abruptly with setpoint 0 e The actual position value of the axis spindle continues to be acquired by the control This axis spindle state cannot be changed until after Reset Interpolatory axis grouping All the axes traversing within the interpolatory axis grouping are stopped as soon as the controller enable signal is cancelled for one of the axes The axes are brought to a standstill as described above All axes in the geometry grouping are brought to a standstill with rapid stop Alarm 21612 Controller enable reset during movement is also triggered Continued processing of the NC program after this event is no longer possible Function Manual 12 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 2 2 3 Signals for digital drives to axis spindle Speed controller integrator disabled DB380x DBX4001 6 The PLC user program inhibits the integrator of the speed controller for the drive The speed controller is thus switched from P
154. according to the information below Gantry machine data Axis 1 MD37100 GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE 1 MD37110 GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING 0 MD37120 GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR 1 mm MD37130 GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF 100 mm max misalignment MD37140 GANTRY_BREAK_UP 0 Axis 3 MD37100 GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE 11 MD37110 GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING 0 MD37120 GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR 1 mm MD37130 GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF 100 mm max misalignment MD37140 GANTRY_BREAK_UP 0 Reference point machine data The MD values specified apply for the first encoder in both axis 1 and axis 3 MD34000 REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE TRUE MD34010 REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS e g FALSE MD34020 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 55 MD34030 REFP_MAX_CAM_DIST corresponds to max distance traversed MD34040 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER MD34050 REFP_SEARCH_MARKER_REVERSE e g FALSE MD34060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST difference btw cam edge and 0 mark MD34070 REFP_VELO_POS MD34080 REFP_MOVE_DIST 0 MD34090 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR 0 MD34092 REFP_CAM_SHIFT 0 MD34100 REFP_SET_POS 0 MD34200 ENC_REFP_MODE 1 6 7 2 Setting of NCK PLC interface Introduction An automatic synchronization process during axis referencing must first be disabled in order to prevent any damage to grouping axes that are misaligned Disabling of automatic synchronization The PLC user program sets the following IS e For the leading axis axis 1 DB380x DBB5005 x n
155. achine manufacturer s HMI data e No multi language support e Single file e Multiple files No multi language support This is the case for Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 179 e Customized bitmaps e User cycle bitmap file e User cycle softkey index file e User cycle parameter file e EasyXLanguage scripts In all languages the same files are used since multi language support for these files are unnecessary Single file This is the case for e User cycle alarm file e Extended user text file e OEM MD description file e PLC alarm texts e OEMR variable name file e Service planner task name file For these files the machine manufacturer can easily import or export all language files without changing the system language Files in different languages are distinguished by the file name For example for PLC alarm texts the file name will be in the format of alcu_ lt LANG gt txt wherein lt LANG gt stands for the real language abbreviations Note A file in the incorrect file name format cannot be identified by the control and thus will not be active on the control Multiple files This is the case for e OEM online help e OEM manual e OEM slideshow For these files the machine manufacturer can prepare all files for a certain language in a folder with the name lt LANG gt which stands for the real language abbreviations and then copy them to the desired folder on the control Note A folder
156. acturer 8 6 2 T function Application The T function can be used to make the tool required for a machining operation available through the PLC Whether a tool change is to be performed directly with the T command or with a subsequent M6 command can be set in MD22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE The programmed T function can be interpreted as tool number or as location number Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 15 Scope of functions One T function per part program block is possible Peculiarity TO is reserved for the following function remove the current tool from the tool holder without loading a new tool 8 6 3 D function The D function is used to select the tool offset for the active tool Tool offsets are described in detail under Reference Programming and Operating Manual 8 6 4 H function Application The H functions can be used to transfer different values from the part program to the PLC The meaning can be chosen by the user Scope of functions e Three H functions per part program block are possible e Value range of the H functions Floating data as calculating parameter R e Address extension 0 to 99 HO to H99 possible 8 6 5 S function The S function is used to determine the speed for the spindle with M3 or M4 For turning machines with G96 constant cutting speed the cutting value is specified Reference Programming and Operating Manual 8 7 Data table 8 7 1 Machine data Number I
157. adscrew error compensation and loaded back following editing Linear interpolation between interpolation points The traversing path to be compensated defined using the start and end positions is divided up into several number depends on error curve shape path segments of equal size see figure below The actual positions that limit these sub paths are designated interpolation points A compensation value must be entered for each interpolation point actual position during commissioning The compensation value applied between two interpolation points is generated on the basis of linear interpolation using the compensation values for the adjacent interpolation points i e adjacent interpolation points are linked along a line Compensation value Errorcurve Compensation curve Linear interpolation n n 1 n 2 n 3 Position of Interpolation point axis Figure 10 2 Linear interpolation between the interpolation points Function Manual 106 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Compensation value at reference point The compensation table should be structured such that the compensation value at the reference point is Zero This prevents position jumps occurring when the LEC is activated after reference point approach 10 3 2 LEC Function The leadscrew error compensation measuring system error compensation LEC is an axis specific compensation The principle of the LEC is to modify the axis specifi
158. akes place with the following machine data MD36012 STOP_LIMIT_FACTOR exact stop coarse fine factor and standstill Note The following interface signal blocks automatic synchronization in all modes except referencing mode DB380x DBX5005 5 automatic synchronization locking If automatic synchronization is to be activated DB380x DBX5005 5 must be set to 0 Following this one of the axes in the gantry grouping must be switched from follow up mode to position controlled mode This is achieved with the interface signals DB380x DBX0001 4 1 follow up mode DB380x DBX0002 1 1 servo enable Function Manual 48 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 6 3 3 Points to note Channelspecific referencing Gantry axes can also be referenced on a channel specific basis DB3200 DBX0001 0 activate referencing The value of the leading axis machine data is used for the axis sequence during channel specific referencing MD34110 REFP_CYCLE_NR axis sequence for channel specific referencing After the reference point of the leading axis has been reached the synchronized axis is referenced first as described above Referencing from part program with G74 The referencing and synchronization process for gantry axes can also be initiated from the part program by means of command G74 In this case only the axis name of the leading axis may be programmed The operational sequence is analogous to that described for axis specific referencing Position me
159. al DB1200 DBX2000 0 is set to 1 If an error occurs while executing a read write job the error in job signal DB1200 DBX2000 1 is set The result signals in DB1200 DBB2000 are global bits for the whole job Possible error causes can be here e g e Number of variables DB1200 DBX1 outside of the valid range e Variable index DB1200 DBX1000 outside of the valid range After evaluating the result the Start signal DB1200 DBX0 0 is reset by the user The PLC operating system then resets Job completed or Error in job 0 P Qa ek mer Figure 2 2 Pulse diagram Explanations regarding the pulse diagram 1 Starting of the job by setting Start Job completed and Error in job must be reset 2 Job completed without errors the results of the individual variables must still be evaluated 3 Resetting Start after receiving the result 4 Signal change by PLC operating system 5 If the Start signal is reset inadvertently before receiving the result the output signals are not refreshed without influence on the internal execution of the function triggered 6 Error in job Function Manual 16 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 2 6 2 PI service ASUP Initialization With the ASUP PI service it is possible to assign the interrupt numbers 1 and 2 fixed program names from the PLC Prerequisite for this is the existence of the PLCASUP1_SPF or PLCASUP2_SPF programs in the CMA directory DB1200 DBB4001 1 Assig
160. alid in channel channel axis no 0 4 20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB n Channel axis name in channel channel axis no 0 4 20112 START_MODE_MASK Initial setting at special NC Start after power up and at RESET Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 101 Identifier Name 20116 IGNORE_INHIBIT_ASUP Execute user ASUPs completely in spite of readin disable 20117 IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_ASUP Process user ASUPs completely in spite of single block processing Auxiliary function settings of the channel Identifier Name Channel specific 22000 AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUPn Auxiliary function group aux func no in channel 0 63 22010 AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE n Auxiliary function type aux func no in channel 0 63 22020 AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSIONJ n Auxiliary function extension aux func no in channel 0 63 22030 AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE n Auxiliary function value aux func no in channel 0 63 22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE New tool offset for M function Timers and counters of the channel Identifier Name Channel specific 2 7860 PROCESSTIMER_MODE Activation of the program runtime measurement 27880 PART COUNTER Activation of the workpiece counters 2 882 PART_COUNTER_MCODE n Workpiece counting via M command n 0 2 Display machine data Identifier O o o O O 283 292 Ln nn Setting of the display for the graphic simulation 9 7 2 Setting data Number identifier Name Channel specific 42000 THREAD_START_ANGLE
161. alues of the involved machine axes and the deviations to the programmed ideal circular contour especially at the quadrant transitions displayed in graphical form 10 5 2 Supplementary conditions Note Switch off setpoint related compensations The following compensations affect the position setpoint and must be switched off before the measurement of the axes involved in the circularity test Direction dependent leadscrew error compensation MD32710 MA_CEC_ENABLE lt axis gt 0 10 5 3 Friction compensation with a constant compensation value 10 5 3 1 Function activation Enable The general enabling of the friction compensation is via MD32490 MA_FRICT_COMP_MODE lt axis gt 1 Activation The activation of the friction compensation with constant compensation value is via e MD32500 FRICT_COMP_ENABLE lt axis gt 1 friction compensation ON e MD32510 MA_FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE lt axis gt 0 adaptation OFF Parameters The following parameters are calculated for friction compensation with constant compensation value e MD32520 MA_FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX maximum compensation value For friction compensation with constant compensation value the parameterized value is injected as compensation value e MD32540 MA_FRICT_COMP_TIME friction compensation time constant The compensation value is injected via a DT1 filter The compensation value decays according to the parameterized time constants Function Manual 1
162. am The following section describes the various methods of configuring and programming auxiliary functions as well as their operating principles Auxiliary function groups Auxiliary functions can be combined to form groups 8 2 Programming of auxiliary functions General structure of an auxiliary function Letter address extension Value The letters which can be used for auxiliary functions are M S H T D F The address extension must be an integer The square brackets can be omitted when an address extension is specified directly as a numeric value The value is defined differently for the individual auxiliary functions e INT integer e REAL fractional decimal number floating point Table 8 1 Overview of auxiliary functions programming ee Address extension Value Explanation Number a a block frea_fea_Typo_ weaning ___ st no 1 Function Specific numbers are assigned a fixed function Spindle no 0 3 4028 ex 38 REAL Spindle 1 speed Function Manual 12 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 Suton Address extension Value Explanation Number oe aaa block Area Area Type_ Meaning 3 4028 ex 38 REAL Any Functions have no effect in the NCK only to be implemented on the PLC E SS E Tool offset DO deselection default 1 selection D1 0 001 REAL Path feedrate 999 999 999 A maximum total of 10 auxiliary functions may be programmed in one block Alarm 14770 Auxiliary function incorrectly prog
163. am language used for the part program is not a SIEMENS language A language changeover has been made with G291 NCK alarm with processing stop present DB3300 DBX4 7 The control sends this signal to the PLC to indicate that at least one NCK alarm which has interrupted or aborted the current program run processing stop is active for the channel Follow up active DB390x DBX1 3 Follow up mode for this axis is active See Section Signals from PLC to NCK follow up mode Page 11 DB380x DBX1 4 Axis spindle stationary DB390x DBX1 4 The current velocity of the axis or actual speed of the spindle is within the range which is defined as standstill This range is defined with MD36060 STANDSTILL_VELO_TOL maximum velocity speed for signal Axis spindle stationary Position control active DB390x DBX1 5 The position control loop for the axis spindle is closed the position control function is active For details see Controller enable Page 11 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 13 Speed control active DB390x DBX1 6 The speed control loop for the axis spindle is closed the speed control function is active For details see Controller enable Page 11 Current control active DB390x DBX1 7 The current control loop for the axis spindle is closed the current control function is active Lubrication pulse DB390x DBX1002 0 The IS Lubrication pulse is sent by the NCK and changes status once the axis spindle h
164. am running is interrupted by the ASUP Only one ASUP can be started at one time If the start signal for both ASUPs is to be set to logical 1 in a PLC cycle the ASUPs are started in the sequence INT1 and then INT2 The start signal must be set to logical 0 by the user once the ASUP has been completed or if an error has occurred Note The call of the ASUP PI service must have been completed before an ASUP may be started Initialization The initialization is performed via the ASUP PI service Starting an ASUP The time sequence of an ASUP is shown in the following pulse diagram in the example of PLCASUP1 SPF You can see from the table which interface signals are of relevance for PLCASUP2 SPF Table 9 11 Assignment of the signals to the pulse diagram Address PLCASUP 1_SPF Address PLCASUP2_SPF DB3400 DBX0000 0 DB3400 DBX0001 0 Being executed DB3400 DBX1000 1 DB3400 DBX1001 1 Completed DB3400 DBX1000 0 DB3400 DBX1001 0 DB3400 DBX1000 3 DB3400 DBX1001 3 Interrupt no not allocated DB3400 DBX1000 2 DB3400 DBX1001 2 _ art DB3400 DBX0000 0 Being executed DB3400 DBX1000 1 2 Completed G DB3400 DBX1000 0 Error DB3400 DBX1000 3 Function activation via positive edge of Start ASUP is being executed Positive acknowledgment ASUP ended Reset function activation after receipt of acknowledgment Signal change through PLC not permitted If function activation is reset prior to receipt of acknowled
165. ame String left return str2 gt strl i lt lt tunee Lon Result str2 A brown bear String right The function extracts the last nCount character from string 1 and copies this to the return variable Parameter str1 String nCount Number of characters Syntax lt function name SsString right return lt result Strings gt stri nCount lt funceion Example lt let name str1 type sString gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt let name str2 type string gt lt let lt function name String right return str2 gt strli 10 lt ftunetion gt Result str2 brown dog Function Manual 238 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Function name Meaning String middle String length Strings replace Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 The function extracts the specified number of characters from string 1 starting from the iFirst index and copies these to the return variable Parameter str1 string iFirst start index nCount number of characters Syntax lt function name Sstring middle return lt result String gt gt stri y 1Finst nCount lt function gt Example lt let name Strl1 type String gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt let name str2 type string gt lt let lt function name SsString middle return str2 gt strih 2y 5 lt Luner on Result str2 brown The function gives the number of charac
166. annel specific measuring is integrated into this sequence The PLC user program must include the required functionality The measured offset values of the tool are available in the tool offset memory at the end of the measuring sequence The exact operating instructions are contained in the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Note The automatic measuring function is supported only on a milling machine Function Manual 136 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 12 2 Hardware requirements 12 2 1 Probes that can be used General In order to measure tool and workpiece dimensions a touch trigger probe is required that supplies a constant signal rather than a pulse when deflected The probe must operate virtually bounce free Most sensors can be adjusted mechanically to ensure that they operate in this manner Different types of probes supplied by a variety of manufacturers are available on the market Probes are therefore divided into three groups according to the number of directions in which they can be deflected see figure below Multi directional Bi directional Mono directional probe probe probe UZ 7 AN s Table 12 1 Probe assignment Probe type Milling and machining centers P Workpiece measurements Multi directional X Bi directional Mono directional A mono probe can also be used for this purpose for milling and machining centers Multidirectional probe 3D This probe type can be used unconditi
167. aplahd una daavienlakd ute iataeninlahd actlaadumiatabiais 9 3 9 Asynchronous Subroutines ASUPS scceieiencrisende soe nceencntesincaestterncienclecsaeiaenindectascisdeaeendenlanoence eteaeenieee 9 3 10 Responses to operator OF program ACTIONS ccccccceccceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeeseueeaeeeaes 9 3 11 Example of a timing diagram for a program FUN cceccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeesseeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeseeeeesaees 9 4 FOO CSU aration paeaecacan Satine cancsu wean as basaugecasijevn sah E sheen sab E ukp sa sob uanes E E E 9 4 1 General information on the program teSt ccccccccseccceceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeseeeesaanees 9 4 2 Program processing without axis movements PRT ccccccseeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeesaees 9 4 3 Program processing in single block mode SBL cccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeesaeeeesaees 9 4 4 Program processing with dry run feedrate DRY cccceeccccseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeseesaeeeeesaeeeeeaaes 9 4 5 Block search Processing of certain program sections 9 4 6 Skip Part program blocks SKP jiidereen na da anaa seceded sede 9 4 7 Graphie SimMmuUlaAU0M sesca E eee ES ee ee eee eee 9 5 Timers for program execution tIME ccccccccceececeececeeeeeaeececeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeceseeeessueeeseeeeseeeeseusesseesseeesaeeesees
168. are required to traverse the gantry on large gantry type milling machines i e one drive with its own position measuring system on each side Owing to the mechanical forced coupling both drives must be operated in absolute synchronism to prevent canting of mechanical components Configuration A gantry axis grouping consisting of a leading axis and synchronized axis can be defined 6 2 Gantry axes function Application On large gantry type milling machines various axis units e g gantry or crossbeam are moved by a number of drives which are mutually independent Each drive has its own measuring system and thus constitutes a complete axis system When these mechanically rigidly coupled axes are traversed both drives must be operated in absolute synchronism in order to prevent canting of mechanical components resulting in power torque transmission Figure 6 1 Example Gantry type milling machine with a gantry axis grouping X and X1 The purpose of the gantry axes function is to control and monitor machine axes which are rigidly coupled in this way Terms The following terms are frequently used in this functional description Gantry axes Gantry axes comprise one pair of axes the leading axis and the synchronized axis As these axes are mechanically coupled they must always be traversed simultaneously by the NC The difference between the actual positions of the axes is monitored continuously The axes in a gantry grouping are ei
169. arge gt max position monitoring time can be set to a relatively short value e Positioning window small gt max position monitoring time must be set to a relatively long value e Position controller gain low gt max position monitoring time must be set to a relatively long value Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 23 e Position controller gain high gt max position monitoring time can be set to a relatively short value Note The size of the positioning window affects the block change time The smaller the tolerances that are selected the longer the positioning action will take which in turn means a longer time before the next command can be executed 3 2 3 Standstill monitoring Function At the end of a motion block position setpoint has reached target a check is made as to whether the axis is not more than the distance specified in MD36060 STANDSTILL_POS_TOL standstill tolerance away from its setpoint after the configurable delay time in MD36040 STANDSTILL_DELAY_TIME standstill monitoring delay time has expired Otherwise an alarm will be triggered Effectiveness Standstill monitoring is always active after Standstill monitoring delay time active has expired as long as no new travel command is present Standstill monitoring is active on axes and position controlled spindles Effect When the monitoring function responds it has the following effects e Alarm 25040 Standstill monitoring is triggered
170. arning limit exceeded warning will be relayed to the operator when the actual position value difference exceeds the gantry warning limit MD37110 GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING gantry warning limit In addition the following interface signal will be output to the PLC DB390x DBX5005 3 gantry warning limit exceeded When below the warning limit the message and interface signal will automatically be cancelled When MD37110 0 the message will be disabled Gantry trip limit Alarm 10653 Error limit exceeded will be signaled when the machine s maximum permissible actual position value deviation is exceeded MD37120 GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR gantry trip limit In order to prevent any damage to the machines the gantry axes will be immediately shut down via the break ramp Function Manual 42 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 The value of MD37120 is applied when the gantry grouping is synchronized The alarm must be acknowledged with RESET In addition the following interface signal will be output to the PLC DB390x DBX5005 2 gantry trip limit exceeded If the gantry axis grouping has not yet been synchronized the limit value for the gantry trip limit is derived from the following machine data MD37130 GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF gantry trip limit for referencing Gantry Switching off limit Synchronous group MD37120 GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR Asynchronous group MD37130 GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF Gantry Warning limit MD37110 GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING The
171. as traveled a greater distance than that set in MD33050 LUBRICATION_DIST travel distance for lubrication from PLC 2 3 2 Signals for digital drives from axis spindle Drive ready DB390x DBX4001 5 Checkback signal indicating that the drive is ready The conditions required for traversing the axis spindle are fulfilled Integrator for n controller disabled DB390x DBX4001 6 The speed controller integrator is disabled The speed controller has thus been switched from PI to P controller Pulse enabled DB390x DBX4001 7 The pulse enable for the drive module is available The axis spindle can now be traversed Ramp up procedure completed DB390x DBX4002 2 This signal confirms that the actual speed value has reached the new setpoint allowing for the tolerance band set in the drive The ramp up procedure is thus completed Any subsequent speed fluctuations due to load changes will not affect the interface signal 2 4 Signals from PLC to HMI OP key disable DB1900 DBX5000 2 IS OP key disable can be applied to disable 1 signal or enable 0 signal the connected keyboard Program number DB1700 DBB1000 A declared program number is transferred from the PLC to HMI if an NC program is selected by the PLC The current NC program selected can be stored via the command interface see DB1700 DBB1001 and also selected again With the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED a program with the program name STRING is administered In the assignment l
172. asuring system with distancecoded reference marks In order to ensure that large distances do not need to be traversed while approaching the reference point it is possible to use a position measuring system with distance coded reference markers as the only measuring system for gantry axes In this way the measuring system is referenced after traversal of a short path e g 20 mm The procedure for referencing the gantry axes is the same as that described for the normal incremental measuring system Absolute encoder During the synchronization compensatory motion all the axes in the gantry axis grouping in the decoupled state also traverse to the reference point value of the leading axis which is defined in the following machine data MD34100 REFP_SET_POS reference point value destination point for distance coded system The absolute encoders and distance coded encoders of the leading axis will be set to the current actual position of the leading axis or to the reference point value either of these options is set using the following machine data MD34330 REFP_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER distance coded linear measuring system without destination point Activation of axis compensations Compensation functions can be activated for both the leading axis and the synchronized axis Compensation values are applied separately for each individual gantry axis These values must therefore be defined and entered for the leading axis and the synchronized axes dur
173. ated The gantry axis then loses their reference and synchronization DB390x DBX5005 5 0 gantry grouping is synchronized Default for RESET In an active gantry grouping the following MD parameterization is ignored for the synchronized axes MD30450 IS_CONCURRENT_POS_AX 1 reset default neutral axis channel axis Function Manual 54 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 The state of the leading axis is assumed The user is informed about the inappropriate configuration with display alarm 4300 Position display The position actual value display shows the actual values of both the leading axis and the synchronized axes The same SYSTEM 4s N applies to the service display values in the lt SYSTEM gt operating area a i A Software limit switch The SW limit switch monitor is processed for the leading axis only If the leading axis crosses the limit switch all axes in the gantry grouping are braked to a standstill 6 7 Example 6 7 1 Creating a gantry grouping Introduction The individual steps involved in the process are explained below using an example constellation e Setting up a gantry grouping e Referencing its axes e Aligning any offsets e Synchronizing the axes involved Constellation Machine axis 1 gantry leading axis incremental measuring system Machine axis 3 gantry synchronized axis incremental measuring system The following MD describes the output values Individual settings must be corrected or added later
174. ated properly e Program execution is terminated e Alarm 10720 Software limit switch or is signaled JOG e The axis stops at the software limit switch position e Alarm 10621 Axis at software limit switch or is signaled e The direction keys in the approach direction are disabled Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 27 Note Switching over the software limit switch If the current position lies behind the new software limit switch when the software limit switch is switched over the axis is decelerated with the maximum permissible axial acceleration If an axis is involved in interpolation with other axes these are also decelerated Then a contour violation may occur Remedy e Reset e Move in the opposite direction in JOG mode e Correct the program 3 4 Supplementary conditions To ensure that the monitoring functions respond correctly it is important that the correct values are entered in the following machine data General e MD31030 LEADSCREW_PITCH leadscrew pitch e Gear ratio load gearbox MD31050 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_DENOM load gearbox denominator MD31060 DRIVE_AX_RATIO_NUMERA load gearbox numerator Gear ratio encoder possibly for spindle MD31070 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_DENOM measuring gearbox denominator MD31080 DRIVE_ENC_RATIO_NUMERA measuring gearbox numerator e MD32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME Equivalent time constant speed control loop for feedforward control e Encoder resolution MD3
175. axes In this case the synchronization process should also be started explicitly with the interface signal DB380x DBX5005 4 1 start gantry synchronization Loss of synchronization The gantry grouping becomes desynchronized DB390x DBB5005 0 if e The gantry axes were in Follow up mode e The reference position of a gantry axis is lost e g during Parking no measuring system active e A gantry axis is re referenced DB390x DBB0000 0 e The gantry grouping was separated MD37140 1 In cases where the gantry grouping has lost synchronization during operation as the result of a disturbance then the gantry synchronization process can be restarted directly by means of IS Start gantry synchronization condition DB390x DBB0000 1 for all axes in the gantry grouping In this case the synchronizing axes traverse the current actual position of the leading axis in the decoupled state If an EMERGENCY OFF occurs while a gantry grouping is moving and is then rescinded and both axes have drifted apart less than the standstill tolerance of the following axis then the gantry grouping will automatically synchronize It no longer needs to go in the BA REF Reference point selection To ensure that the shortest possible paths are traversed when the gantry axes are referenced the reference point values for the leading and synchronized axes should be the same MD34100 Allowance for deviations in distance between the zero mark and the
176. axis axes point leading axis moves in synchronism on the PLC IS Referenced synchronized 1 for Ss synchronized axis Section 3 Synchronization process Reference point reached Message Wait for synchronization o start IS Gantry synchronization ready to start 1 Actual positions of leading axis and synchronized axis compared Deviation gt MD37110 Maintenance s we ew ee em Operator starts gantry a synchronization process Internal start All gantry axes move to gantry synchronized position in decoupled state MD34100 of leading axis The absolute encoders and distance coded encoders of the leading axis willbe set to the current actual esama atan position of the leading axis or to the reference point value either of these options is set using MD34330 Message All gantry axes have reached 7 77 77777 Synchronization in synchronized position progress Forced coupling of gantry axes reactivated End Figure 6 2 Flowchart for referencing and synchronization of gantry axes Synchronization process A synchronization process is always required in the following cases e after the reference point approach of all axes included in a grouping e if the axes become desynchronized see below Function Manual 46 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Operational sequence failure If the referencing process described above is int
177. aying the dialog forms and parameters on the with the INCLUDE HMI XML tag Note As soon as there is an xmldial xml script file in the EasyXLanguage scripts folder you can start this user dialog in the CUSTOM lt CUSTOM gt operating area OA SHIFT ALARM gt After the initial copying process the control system must be reset via the lt SYSTEM gt operating area lt gt Standard power up Start Example of a user dialog on the HMI up gt CUSTOM The configured softkey menus are displayed when the lt CUSTOM gt operating area is called This enables the user to operate the dialog forms which have been configured Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 207 gt 15 07 25 Auto 2012 05 28 WCS Current pos Prog pos K T 22 8 700 1 R Z 122 8 79 F 2 888 SE 8 88 aoe 1805 8 166 6 Controls Machine R Show Show Slide Data Parameter text colors show Note If configured and programmed dialogs need to be used at the same time the script language must be used to call the programmed dialogs The functions required for this purpose are described in Section 18 10 4 Structure of configuration file Overview A configuration file consists of the following elements e Description of the main start menu with start softkeys e Definition of dialogs e Definition of variables e Description of the blocks e Definition of softkey bars 18 10 5 Language dep
178. be noted with regard to starting up gantry axes are described below Axis traversing direction As part of the start up procedure a check must be made to ensure that the direction of rotation of the motor corresponds to the desired traversing direction of the axis Correct by means of axial machine data MD32100 AX_MOTION_DIR traversing direction Activation of the axis grouping MD37100 GANTRY_AXIS_TYPE a b gantry axis definition This machine data is determined for the following gantry axis e Which gantry grouping 1 the axis is to be assigned to e Whether it is to act as a leading or synchronized axis Table 6 1 Possible values for MD37100 af aantryaxis Gantry grouping None Oot fleadngais S o Synchronized axis For commissioning purposes the axes in a gantry grouping must be defined as either all linear axes or all rotary axes MD30300 IS_ROT_AX rotary axis spindle Entering gantry trip limits For the monitoring of the actual position values of the synchronized axis in relation to the actual position of the leading axis the limit values for termination as well as for the leading and synchronized axes should be entered corresponding to the specifications of the machine manufacturer MD37120 GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR gantry trip limit MD37130 GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF gantry trip limit for referencing Note The control must then be switched off and then on again because the gantry axis definition and the trip limit values
179. ble t5 Program aborted with RESET Figure 9 4 Examples of signals during a program run Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 93 9 4 Program test 9 4 1 General information on the program test Purpose Several control functions are available for testing a new part program These functions are provided to reduce danger at the machine and time required for the test phase It is possible to activate several program test functions simultaneously The following test options are described here e Program processing without axis movements e Program processing in single block mode e Program processing with dry run feedrate e Processing of certain program sections e Skipping certain program parts e Graphic simulation 9 4 2 Program processing without axis movements PRT Functionality The part program can be started and processed with active Program test function via the IS NC Start DB3200 DBX0007 1 i e with auxiliary function outputs dwell times Only the axes spindles are simulated The software limit switch safety function continues to be valid The position control is not interrupted so the axes do not have to be referenced when the function is switched off The user can check the programmed axis positions and auxiliary function outputs of a part program Note Program processing without axis motion can also be activated with the function Dry run feedrate Selection activation Prog This function is selec
180. bstacle in work area e g positioning on a working table e Tachogenerator compensation has not been performed correctly for an analog spindle or a measuring circuit error or drive error is present Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 25 3 2 6 Actual velocity monitoring Function This function monitors whether the actual velocity exceeds a permissible limit entered in MD36200 AX_VELO_LIMIT threshold value for velocity monitoring Effectiveness The actual velocity monitor is operative whenever the active measuring circuit activated via Position measuring system 1 interface signal DB380x DBX1 5 is supplying actual values i e still operating below the limit frequency The actual velocity monitoring is active for axes and spindles Effect If the Threshold for velocity monitoring is exceeded the following occurs e Alarm 25030 Actual velocity alarm limit is triggered e The affected axis spindle is brought to a standstill with rapid stop with open position control loop along a speed setpoint ramp The braking ramp time is set in MD36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME duration of the braking ramp for error states e If the axis spindle is assigned to an interpolatory grouping with other axes spindles then these are also braked by rapid stop with following error reduction default for partial position setpoint 0 Troubleshooting tips e Check actual values e Check position control direction control sense e Check MD3
181. c position actual value by the assigned compensation value in the interpolation cycle and to apply this value to the machine axis for immediate traversal A positive compensation value causes the corresponding machine axis to move in the negative direction The magnitude of the compensation value is not limited and is not monitored In order to avoid impermissibly high velocities and accelerations caused by compensation small compensation values must be selected Large compensation values can cause other axis monitoring functions to output alarms e g contour monitoring velocity setpoint limitation Effectiveness e The compensation values are stored in the NC user memory and active after POWER ON e The function has been activated for the relevant machine axis MD32700 ENC_COMP_ENABLE 0 1 e The axis has been referenced IS Referenced synchronized 1 DB390x DBX0000 4 set As soon as these conditions have been fulfilled the axis specific actual value is altered by the compensation value in all modes and traversed by the machine axis immediately If the reference is then lost e g because the encoder frequency has been exceeded IS Referenced synchronized 1 0 compensation processing is de activated Compensation table The position related compensation values are stored in the form of system variables for the relevant axis in the compensation table 125 interpolation points N 0 124 are possible The following measurin
182. cal representative of the sum of all the licenses that are assigned to one particular piece of hardware which is uniquely marked by its hardware serial number Option One option is a SINUMERIK software product that is not contained in the basic version and which requires the purchase of a license for its use Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 255 A product is marked by the data below within the license management of SINUMERIK software products e Product designation e Order number e License number Trademarks All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described Since variance cannot be precluded entirely we cannot guarantee full consistency However the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013
183. cccssnesesesccndcouseesanzeteesuetsceetadaicac es ayted seeSedeesautoced nctecedennyeacoce siden seeeitecaentecdagacaeseas 18 10 6 5 OperatolS ee eee ne eae ne nee een een ee ne ee eee ee AEAN is 18 10 7 Addressing components ici iiaseciucsesacddiiewnsdncuosaneddieannddtue sand debbansaneuauacedanbandduda rand dibeassduuce sana dedbandiuiee add dcbbuens at A PEC OGG SSN Gh esiee cece rg seeroch secs mee seus edeceue E 18 10 7 2 INC Variable addressing cesses secacceccoscasiacet bactsceiee ce diene ieia iieiea a eeii inania 18 10 7 3 Addressing machine and setting data cccccccceecccesceceseeeseeceseeeceueessaeeeeeeeneeeseeeseecesesesseeensueessaess 18 10 7 4 Addressing the user data ccccccccceeccceeeeeeeeeen eens eeeeee eee aeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeesaeeesaeeeseeeeseaeesaaeeeseeeseeesueenaaes 18 10 8 Generating user MENUS cccccccccceseeccsescecceececseueeeceuueeeceaeeecseeeecsaeeeseueeecseueesssuueeessuesessueeessaeeessaaeees 18 10 8 1 Generating softkey menus and dialog FOFMS cccccceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeseeeeesaaeeeesaeees 1G 10 6 2 SUDSHUUTOM CM AACS est nits ekaia EE ra EEE R ERa ETEA EA EE STEE A Eae SAE ETE aSa 18 10 9 Predefined TUNCUONS vvsccseccnscsccceessesscesdvedsenescesueeseeadeneceeeesceedeedcudvecdeenznceddaedebanssaeeedsaluueesSuaseceddenceceeeaesteese 18 11 PLO ROY e a S E Licensing in the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED cccccceeceseeceeeeeeeesaeeesaeeseeeeeaeeesaee
184. celeration normally a smaller compensation value must be injected for optimum compensation with larger accelerations than for smaller accelerations This dependency can be modeled via the following adaptation characteristic Anmax Maximum compensation value Anmin Minimum compensation value a1 Acceleration value 1 a2 Acceleration value 2 a3 Acceleration value 3 Function Manual 120 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Bn Acceleration range with n 1 2 4 with Accelerations a1 lt a2 lt a3 Compensation values Anmax gt Anmin in special cases also Anmax lt Anmin The compensation value An is calculated according to the respective acceleration range B1 to B4 as follows With acceleration a Compensation value An An Annex a a1 An Annex An Animex ANmn Anma as a2 a a2 An Anni 10 5 4 2 Function activation Enable The general enabling of the friction compensation is via MD32490 MA_FRICT_COMP_MODE lt axis gt 1 Activation The activation of the friction compensation with adaptation characteristic is performed via e MD32500 FRICT_COMP_ENABLE lt axis gt 1 friction compensation ON e MD32510 MA_FRICT_COMP_ADAPT_ENABLE lt axis gt 1 adaptation characteristic OFF 10 5 4 3 Commissioning To determine the characteristic parameters the optimum compensation value Anopt must be determined at various operating points of the specified dynamic response range See Section
185. ch on the spindle zero mark encoder e Directly on the spindle e Above the measuring gearbox plus BERO switch on the spindle Synchronization possibilities When the spindle is switched on the spindle can be synchronized as follows e The spindle is started with a spindle speed S function and a spindle rotation M3 or M4 and synchronized with the next zero mark of the position measurement system or with the BERO signal The 0 degree position is shifted by MD34080 REFP_MOVE_DIST MD34090 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR Function Manual 158 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 MD34100 REFP_SET_POS Note Only use MD34080 for shifting the 0 degree position Monitoring with MD34060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST should be set to two spindle revolutions 720 degrees e Programming SPOS from various states refer to Section Spindle positioning mode Page 156 e In JOG mode the spindle is started in speed control mode with the direction keys and synchronizes with the next zero mark of the position measurement system or the BERO signal Value acceptance When synchronizing the spindle the associated reference point from MD34100 REFP_SET_POSJ 0 default value 0 is transferred and a possible shift of the reference point These shifts machine data act irrespective of the connected measurement system and are described in Chapter Reference Point Approach Maximum encoder frequency exceeded When the spindle speed reaches a speed large S value prog
186. cks function is activated for BSPLINE interpolation MD20488 MC_SPLINE_MODE Bit 0 1 Program code Comment PROC P1 N10 G1 G64 X0 YO ZO F1000 N20 G91 F10000 BSPLINE BSPLINE interpolation with Combine short spline blocks from this point N30 X0 001 YO 001 20 001 N40 X0 001 YO 001 20 001 N50 X0 001 YO 001 20 001 N60 X0 001 YO 001 20 001 N70 X0 001 YO 001 20 001 N80 X0 001 YO 001 20 001 N1000 M30 Function Manual 36 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 4 6 LookAhead Function LookAhead is a procedure in continuous path mode G64 that achieves velocity control with LookAhead over several NC part program blocks beyond the current block Without LookAhead If the program blocks only contain very small paths a velocity per block is achieved that permits deceleration of the axes at the block end point without violating acceleration limits This means that the programmed velocity was not actually reached although a sufficient number of prepared blocks with virtually tangential path transitions were available With the LookAhead function It is possible to plan the acceleration and deceleration phase with approximately tangential path transitions over several blocks in order to achieve a higher feedrate with shorter distances Deceleration to velocity limits is possible with LookAhead such that violation of the acceleration and velocity limit is prevented Feedrate l G64 Continuous path mode with LookAhead
187. com file with a text editor like the WordPad or Notepad Text definition rules Sx y z identifier bitmap cycle Table 18 3 Definitions of the parameter The fifth horizontal key s TT The first to eighth vertical key in the first level The first to eighth vertical key in the second level aaa Sa Defined in the cycle text file bitmap cycle The bitmap for the user cycle The bitmap name must be followed with name of the user cycle Examples 5 0 0 83000 gt define a softkey identifier 83000 at the horizontal key 5 S5 1 0 83001 CN1 CYCLE100 gt define a softkey identifier 83001 at the first vertical key of the first level when pressing the horizontal key 5 M17 Function Manual 194 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 18 7 3 Creating the user cycle parameter file The user cycle parameter file Sc com file is required to define the help information and the parameters for the user cycle You can create the sc com file with a text editor like the WordPad or Notepad Text definition rules The symbol indicates the beginning of a cycle description If you have created an image to display on the left of the screen at cycle start call the image at the first line The image is followed by the cycle name written in brackets Now define the parameters for the individual variables according to the format shown in the table below Line Description of the parameters Entry 1 Start of variable declaration 2 Variable type
188. command G60 or G9 G60 is modal G9 is non modal G9 is used if continuous path mode is to be interrupted Both exact stop functions only function with the selected exact stop criterion G601 G602 The exact stop function is de selected with the continuous path mode function G64 Exact stop criteria e Exact stop fine G601 This criterion is applied to monitor whether the actual setpoint position deviation of the axis has remained within a specific distance The value of the permissible distance is stored in MD36010 STOP_LIMIT_FINE exact stop fine e Exact stop coarse G602 Functions as exact stop fine although the monitoring window is stored in MD36000 STOP_LIMIT_COARSE exact stop coarse To permit a faster block change than with the exact stop fine criterion the exact stop coarse criterion is set to be larger than the exact stop fine criterion Block change times t1 Interpolator end Actual value With G602 With G601 Exact stop coarse gt Exact stop fine Figure 4 1 Block change depending on exact stop criteria Interpolator end Interpolator end is achieved when the interpolator has calculated the setpoint velocity of the axes from zero for an interpolation cycle However the actual positions of the path axes have not reached the target following error Irrespective of continuous path mode or the active exact stop criteria for the exact stop function interpolator end transfers the auxiliary fu
189. continues to be specified with machine data Processing sequence in operator panel reset Boundary conditions must be satisfied before the command Comments Select mode channel status from Initial state Any mode any channel status any state Control activated Reset sequence with evaluation Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 Seque Command Boundary conditions Comments nce must be satisfied before the command 4 N_CMA_DIR CYCPE1MA SPF and as an ASUP Implied call of the path name as N_CMA_DIR CYCPE_MA SPF an ASUP 5 MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK Control activated The G code reset position MD20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES Reset sequence with evaluation continues to be specified with MD20152 GCODE_RESET_MODE machine data Startup Table 9 10 Sequence with Powerup Seque Command Boundary conditions Comments nce must be satisfied before the command Reset afterpowerup s sS MD20110 RESET _MODE_MASK Control activated 3 MD20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES after ramp up MD20152 GCODE_RESET MODE Reset sequence with evaluation N_CMA_DIR CYCPE1MA SPF and as an ASUP Implied call of the path name as N_CMA_DIR CYCPE_MA SPF an ASUP MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK Control activated The G code reset position MD20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES Reset sequence with evaluation continues to be specified with MD20152 GCODE_RESET_ MODE machine data Note You must put the manufacturer cycles CYCPE1MA SPF a
190. control After the control has been created additional elements can be inserted using the functions Addlitem or Insertltem The parameter itemdata is not evaluated for this control itemlist The field type generates a static control which displays the corresponding identifier instead of numerical values The lt ITEM gt tag can be used to assign an identifier to the field item_data A user specific integer value can be assigned to the attribute This value is given as part of the FOCUS_IN message for identifying the focus field refvar Identifier of the reference variable that can be linked to the field optional hotlink TRUE If the value of the reference variable changes then the field is automatically updated optional format The attribute defines the display format of the specified variable Formatting data see print Tag optional Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 225 Tag identifier Meaning CONTROL continued Attributes e time specifies the data refresh rate optional The following specifications are possible super fast Refresh time lt 100 ms fast Refresh time approx 100 ms normal Refresh time approx 200 ms slow Refresh time approx 500 ms font The attribute defines the font size used 0 8 8 1 16 8 2 24 16 only numbers 3 8 8 double the character height 4 16 8 double the character height 5 24 16 double the character height only numbers color_bk The attribut
191. count 0 lt OP gt lt IN iTS lt CONDITION gt count lt 7 lt CONDITION gt lt INCREMENT gt lt OP gt count count 1 lt 7OP gt lt INCREMENT gt lt OP gt plte qblo0 1 count lt 7OP gt lt FOR gt WAITING The tag waits for the component to undergo a hot restart after an NC reset Attributes e WAITINGFORNC TRUE the system waits for the NC to restart Syntax lt WAITING WAITINGFORNC TRUE gt Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 217 mae Menng OOOO WHILE WHILE loop WHILE Test Instruction Syntax lt WHILE gt lt CONDITION gt lt CONDITION gt Instructions lt WHILE gt The While loop is used to execute a sequence of instructions repeatedly while a condition is met This condition is tested before the sequence of instructions is executed Example lt WHILE gt lt CONDITION gt plc ib9 0 lt CONDITION gt lt DATA name PLC gb11 gt 15 lt DATA gt lt WHILE gt DO_WHILE Do while loop DO Instructions WHILE Test Syntax lt DO WHILE gt Instructions lt CONDITION gt lt CONDITION gt lt DO_WHILE gt The Do while loop comprises a block of instructions and a condition The code within the instruction block is executed first and then the condition is analyzed If the condition is true the function executes the code section again This is continuously repeated until the condition is false Example lt DO WHILE gt lt
192. counter does not work when Program test in active Part count AC_ACTUAL_PARTS Parts actually counted Activated by setting MD27880 BIT 8 1 BIT 9 0 M02 M30 increases Parts in total to 1 BIT 9 1 the M code defined by MD27882 increases Parts in total to 1 BIT 10 0 1 the counter does not work when Program test in active Table 18 1 Relevant parameters No Name Vae Descriptions S 27880 PART_COUNTER Actual value Configuring and activating the part counter 27882 PART_COUNTER_MCODE Actual value Defining an M code for the counting action 0 to 99 to 1 Select the desired operating area OFFSET Gett 2 Press these two softkeys in succession Then the part counter can be displayed counting SD data following 3 Parts in total B Time Parts required A counter Part count A M 3 Enter the desired operating mode and select the desired operating area AUTO gt MACHINE Tine 4 Press these two keys in succession counter Then the part counter can also be displayed counting the following Counter SA Required A SELECT Actual Z Note All of the numbers that have been entered must be confirmed with the E hardkey Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 191 18 5 Prog_Event function With the Prog_Event function two subroutine programs called CYCPE1MA SPF and CYCPE_MA SPF are triggered to be executed at certain states such as the end of a program NC
193. ction Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 203 ts 1 Select the desired operating area OFFSET 2 Press these two softkeys in succession ry Vor IR Then select a certain R variable with keys and Show H nang 3 In the following dialog define the name of the R variable as desired for example Ho Hane Value RB 111 688686 Ri 6 668eee Then save your input with the following 4 Access the OEM R variable name file folder by performing the steps mentioned above At this time a file containing the change log in the corresponding language exists in the folder F Ej 5 Press these two softkeys in succession to copy the file and then open the desired window Copy In the opened window paste the file with the following Paste User E cycle a B CYCLE888 B MD_DESCR_CHS E MD_DESCR_ENG E RPARAM_NAME_ENG E 6 Open the file with this hardkey Ka Then you can view the change that you made HC CHASRPARAM_HAME_ENG TAT Function Manual 204 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 18 10 Generating user dialogs using customized EasyXLanguage scripts 18 10 1 Scope of functions Overview The Generate user dialogs function offers an open structure and enables the user to develop customer specific and application specific HMI interfaces The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED offers an XML based script language for generating user dialogs This script language makes it possible to display machine specific menus and dialog fo
194. ction can be used It can be selected whether or not the same calculations are to be performed during the block search up to the target block as would be performed during normal program operation After the target block is reached the part program can be started via IS NC Start give 2x DB3200 DBX0007 1 If necessary there is an automatic compensating movement of the axes to start or end positions of the target block Execution of the remaining program then continues Note Pay attention to a collision free start position and appropriate active tools and other technological values If necessary a collisionfree start position must be approached manually with JOG Select the target block considering the selected block search type Selection activation The block search is selected in the AUTO mode on the user interface The search run can be activated with corresponding softkey for the following functions e Block search with calculation to contour Is used in any circumstances in order to approach the contour On NC Start the start position of the target block or the end position of the block before the target block is approached This is traversed up to the end position Processing is true to contour e Block search with calculation to block end point Is used in any circumstances in order to approach a target position e g tool change position The end position of the target block or the next programmed position is approached using
195. ction is activated in the program with e TRACYL d in a separate block and deactivated with e TRAFOOF in a separate block d machining diameter of the cylinder in mm Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 129 TRAFOOF deactivates any active transformation function Programming principle N10 G0 X Z SPOS S N20 G19 G94 T N30 SETMS 2 N40 TRACYL 24 876 N50 G1 F200 X M3 N600 G41 F200 Y Z N90 G40 N100 TRAFOOF NILO GI8 GYS Ths N120 SETMS Explanation Spat without YM axis the geometry axes X Y Z are programmed starting positions spindle in position control plane feed type select milling tool switchover master spindle is now the milling spindle switch on TRACYL diameter 24 876 mm feed switch on milling spindle milling of the cylinder surface with milling tool radius compensation switch off TRACYL switch back to turning master spindle is main spindle The movement of the machine axes ZM and CM produces this contour on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical workpiece with the milling cutter in accordance with the Y Z path programmed straight or circular The programmed X axis infeed continues to be traversed as the X axis The cylinder unrolled at the outside diameter d results in peripheral surface with the Y Z programming plane G19 This is also used to determine the rotational direction of the circle for G2 G3 Y Groove Figure 11 7 Peripheral sur
196. ctive The screen forms provided and the sequence depend on the technology Accordingly the following used tool types can be measured Milling technology e Milling tool geometry length 1 and geometry radius e Drill geometry length 1 Function Manual 140 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Tool offsets The screens initially include the active tool T and the active offset number D for the target of the measurement result entry A different tool can be specified by the PLC via the interface or the user can enter a different tool T and or offset number D Note If a tool or an offset number different to the active values has been entered this must first be made known to the NC for working after measurements have been made with this tool tool offset e g by programming and start in MDA mode Only then can the control unit calculate the correct tool offsets A tool length compensation is automatically entered into the GEO component of the active specified tool offset D of the active specified tool and the associated wear and adapter components are deleted When measuring the cutter radius it is assumed that no further offset is applied to the axes of the cutter radius level values in the axes of the adapter component and GEO lengths 2 and 3 are equal to zero The result for the radius is entered in the geometry component The associated adapter and wear components of both axes of the level are deleted Probe The tool measurin
197. cts a command gt 0 it begins with the internal processing of this job and sets the command DB1700 DBB1001 to 0 PLC waits until the acknowledgement signal has been reached by HMI DB1700 DBX2001 0 or DB1700 DBX2001 1 and evaluates this immediately The acknowledgement signals are available for one PLC cycle once they have been received and are then automatically deleted by the PLC operating system 2 5 Signals from HMI to PLC Program has been selected DB1700 DBX2000 0 Successful selection of the required NC program is signaled back from the HMI to the PLC This signal is available for one PLC cycle It corresponds with DB1700 DBB1000 Program selection error DB1700 DBX2000 1 Failed selection of the required NC program is signaled back from the HMI to the PLC This signal is available for one PLC cycle It corresponds with DB1700 DBB1000 Execute command DB1700 DBX2001 0 Successful execution of the required command is signaled back from the HMI to the PLC This signal is available for one PLC cycle It corresponds with DB1700 DBB1001 Command execution error DB1700 DBX2001 1 Failed execution of the required command is signaled back from the HMI to the PLC This signal is available for one PLC cycle It corresponds with DB1700 DBB1001 2 6 User Interface 2 6 1 General OF Communication jobs can be performed via the NC services PLC NCK interface The following services are available for this e Start program invocation
198. cuted approx every 100 ms CAPTION The tag contains the title of the dialog box This tag should be used within the INIT tag Syntax lt CAPTION gt Titel lt CAPTION gt Example lt CAPTION gt my first dialogue lt CAPTION gt CLOSE Dialog box message This tag is executed before the dialog box is closed CLOSE_FORM The tag closes the active dialog This instruction is only necessary if it involves a cycle dialog that is used in the program editor area Generally dialogs are automatically managed and do not have to be explicitly closed Syntax lt CLOSE FORM gt Example lt softkey ok gt lt caption gt OK lt caption gt lt CLOSE FORM gt lt navigation gt main menu lt navigation gt lt softkey ok gt Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 223 mae Menn OOOO O CONTROL 224 The tag is used to generate control elements Syntax lt CONTROL name lt control name gt xpos lt X position gt ypos position gt refvar lt NC variable gt hotlink true format lt format gt T J gt Attributes e name Identifier of the field The identifier simultaneously represents a local variable and must not be used a multiple number of times in the form xpos X position of the top left corner ypos Y position of the top left corner fieldtype Field type If no type is specified the field is set as an edit field edit Data can be changed readonly Data cannot be changed co
199. d in the machine data of axis 3 synchronized axis MD34100 REFP_SET_POS Continue with Step 1 See above e Start gantry synchronization PLC sets DB380x DBX5005 4 1 start gantry synchronization 6 7 4 Setting warning and trip limits As soon as the gantry grouping is set and synchronized the following machine data must still be set to correspond MD37110 GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING gantry warning limit MD37120 GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR gantry trip limit Proceed as follows e Set the machine data for all axes with a large value to begin with MD37120 GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR gantry trip limit e Seta very small value in the machine data MD37110 GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING gantry warning limit When you put a heavy dynamic strain on the axes always be careful to re enter the self canceling alarm 10652 channel 1 axis 2 gantry warning limit exceeded e Now increase MD37110 Do this until the alarm no longer appears The interface indicates the status specified below That must occur in the appropriate window according to production e Enter the value calculated for the warning limit a small buffer value for safety purposes in machine data MD37120 Error limit values Values are entered in the following machine data MD37110 GANTRY_POS_TOL_WARNING gantry warning limit MD37120 GANTRY_POS_TOL_ERROR gantry trip limit MD37130 GANTRY_POS_TOL_REF gantry trip limit for referencing These should have the following scales of ma
200. d overstoring or MDA NC Start NCK start MD20112 START_MODE_MASK 2 3 4 5 gt O Event Part program end Table 9 8 Sequence at part program end Seque Command nce Channel selection Reset status Operating mode selection AUTO or AUTO and overstoring or MDA MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK MD20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES MD20152 GCODE_RESET_MODE MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK MD20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES MD20152 GCODE_RESET_MODE Event Operator panel reset Table 9 9 Seque Command nce Selection of channel and mode any MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK MD20150 GCODE_RESET_VALUES MD20152 GCODE_RESET_MODE 86 command Sequence when starting a part program Boundary conditions must be satisfied before the Comments Select channel and mode Initialization sequence with evaluation _ N_CMA_DIR CYCPE1MA SPF and as a subroutine Implied call of the path name as N_CMA_DIR CYCPE_MA SPF a subroutine None Processing of the data part of the main program None Processing of the program part of the main program Boundary conditions must be satisfied before the command Comments Select channel and mode NC Start Block with end of part program Block is changed Control activated Reset sequence with evaluation _ N_CMA_DIR CYCPE1MA SPF and as an ASUP Implied call of the path name as N_CMA_DIR CYCPE_MA SPF an ASUP Control activated Reset sequence with evaluation The G code reset position
201. d rapid traverse override switch the feedrate override switch can be used In this case feedrate overrides above 100 are limited to 100 for rapid traverse override The override to be active can be selected via the PLC or operator panel If the selection is made using the operator panel display ROV the IS Feedrate override for rapid traverse selected DB1700 DBX0001 3 is set and must be transferred by the PLC user program to the IS Rapid traverse override active DB3200 DBX0006 6 The value itself is to be transferred by the PLC user program from a machine control panel to the IS Rapid traverse override DB3200 DBB0005 The channel specific feedrate and rapid traverse overrides are inactive if G33 G63 G331 and G332 are active Axis specific feedrate override One enable signal and one byte for the feedrate override factor in percent are available on the PLC interface for each axis e S Feedrate override DB380x DBBO000 e S Override active DB380x DBX0001 7 If G33 G331 G332 G63 are active the axis specific feedrate override has no effect is internally set to a fixed value of 100 Spindle override One enable signal and one byte for the spindle override factor in percent are available on the PLC interface for each spindle e IS Spindle override DB380x DBB2003 e IS Override active DB380x DBX0001 7 The additional signal IS Feedrate override for spindle valid DB380x DBX2001 0 allows the PLC user program
202. d variant is provided for lathes with an additional Y machine axis or for milling machines with a suitable rotary table Machine prerequisite The lathe must be equipped with a C axis capable main spindle A second spindle must be able to drive the milling tool When used with TRACYL the milling machine must be equipped with a rotary table that is capable of interpolating with the other axes Availability The TRANSMIT and TRACYL functions are configured using separate machine data sets and switched on or off by means of special instructions in the program With the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED a maximum of two kinematic transformations TRANSMIT TRACYL may be configured and one of them may be activated using the program 11 2 TRANSMIT 11 2 1 Overview X Y Z Cartesian coordinate system for programming of the face end machining ASM Second spindle work spindle for milling tool drill ZM Z machine axis linear XM X machine axis linear Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 123 CM C axis main spindle as rotary axis Figure 11 1 Face end milling of turned parts with TRANSMIT Required machine kinematics The two linear axes XM ZM must be mutually perpendicular The rotary axis CM must travel parallel to the linear axis ZM rotating around ZM The linear axis XM intersects the rotary axis CM center of rotation Activation de activation of TRANSMIT The TRANSMIT function is activated in the program with e TRANSM
203. dentifier Name General 11100 AUXFU_MAXNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN Number of auxiliary functions distributed among the AUXFU groups Channel specific 22000 AUXFU_ASSIGN_GROUPn Auxiliary function groups 22010 AUXFU_ASSIGN_TYPE n Auxiliary function types 22020 AUXFU_ASSIGN_EXTENSION n Auxiliary function extensions 22030 AUXFU_ASSIGN_VALUE n Auxiliary function values 8 7 2 Interface signals Number Bit Name Channel specific DB2500 DBX0000 M function 1 change to M function 5 change DB2500 DBx0006 0 S function 1 change DB2500 DBx0008 o T function 1 change DB2500 DBX0010 0 D function 1 change Function Manual 76 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 Number Bt Name DB2500 DBD2000 Tfunction1 IND SS o DB2500 DBD3000 M function 1 DINT DB2500 DBB3004 Extended address of M function 1 BYTE Z o DB2500 DBD3008 Mfunction 2 DIN S DB2500 DBB3012 Extended address of M function 2 BYTE lt DB2500 DBD3016 Mfunction 3 DIN S DB2500 DBB3020 Extended address of M function 3 BYTE _ lt DB2500 DBD3024 Mfunction4 DIN o DB2500 DBB3028 Extended address of M function 4 BYTE o o lt DB2500 DBD3032_ Mfunction5 DIN S DB2500 DBB3036 Extended address of M function 5 BYTE o lt DB2500 DBD4000 Sfunction 1 REAL forma S DB2500 DBB4004 Extended address of S function 1 BYTE lt o lt
204. dy to start xX 05 DB390x DBX50 5 Gantry grouping is synchronized X 05 DB390x DBX50 Gantry leading axis 1 05 05 x relevant for T Manual Operation and Handwheel traversal 7 1 General characteristics of traversing in JOG JOG mode Axes Spindles can be traversed manually in JOG mode The active mode is transmitted to the PLC via the IS Active mode JOG DB3100 DBX0000 2 and is visible in the display see also Chapter Operating Modes Program Operation Page 77 Traversing possibilities Traversing the axes can be done via the traverse keys of a connected machine control panel manual travel or via connected handwheels handwheel jogging All machine axes can be traversed simultaneously using keys with an appropriate version of a user specific machine control panel or via handwheel depending on the number of handwheels connected If several machine axes are moved simultaneously there is no interpolatory relation Coordinate systems The user has the option of traversing axes in the coordinate systems e Machine coordinate system MCS machine axes manually traversable e Workpiece coordinate system WCS geometry axes manually traversable Function Manual 60 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 Machine functions Variants exist for manual traverse the so called machine functions e Continuous traversal e Incremental traversing INC preset number of traversing increments An increment is evaluated with 0 001
205. e ena tee ins sees eee aan tee a sen oo tee ane gabe E ae eee eee 4 Continuous Path Mode Exact Stop and LookAhead csccceccsecceeceeceesaeeceecauseeceecaeseueceesansaeeeueseesaneceesaesenesass 4 1 3 fet ie 1 61 0 611 6 aeons eet E ee ee ee eee eee ee 4 2 SS ls cetera ened na hatin thse Nese Coane stadt E E A A TE AE AEE AA A T A AEE 4 3 2 4516 O E E E E eee eee eee eet 4 4 Continuous paih Mode sser EEE EEEE EEEE AEE EEEE ENEE 4 4 1 ENE e E ee eae eee ener ne tee eee meee 4 4 2 Velocity reduction according to overload FACtOM ccceecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeseaeeeeseeeeesaeeessaeeeeeas 4 4 3 Jerk limiting along the path through velocity reduction 4 4 4 Machine axis Specific jerk NIMITING wsscc ccceccccsecedeccneecoseetece detdcasdncecevandsedbecdsesetectdeniescdenescavedencbentectuecsdeddeesteee 4 5 Compressor TUNCUONS daemetememee tae msec re ne ent ar re Sto er a Ree ee ee eee 4 5 1 ING DIG compressi ererek aE eTe Ee E EEEE Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 3 4 5 2 Combine Short spine DIOCK S 2a csc tececsose Eas eri 4 6 LOORE a cashes E cls se we Se San laa aes E E aeee een o ae 4 7 DAL TMOG eer EEEE E EE EAE EA E EEA E EEE EE aeueonesamecawesteaiess 4 7 1 Machine data vccincescrenacettenesdsascsdswhenczadesadeeaseteenecideancndsxteenksdvesseesesbenoncidvenovessteucda esanousseltxensivseusedentesoeedvsanes 4 7 2 oo 11 01818 6 2 een re E ee Oe Re eee eee ree S Ree eee eae 4 7
206. e behavior when the traversing direction is reversed is as follows e MD value 0 If the handwheel is moved in the opposite direction the resulting distance is computed and the calculated end point is approached as fast as possible If this end point is located before the point where the moving axis can decelerate in the current direction of travel the unit is decelerated and the end point is approached by moving in the opposite direction If this is not the case the newly calculated end point is approached immediately e MD value gt 0 If the handwheel is moved in the opposite direction by at least the number of pulses indicated in the machine data the axis is decelerated as fast as possible and all pulses received until the end of interpolation are ignored That means another movement takes place only after standstill Setpoint side of the axis new function Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 65 Response at software limit switches When axes are traversed in JOG mode they can traverse only up to the first active limitation before the corresponding alarm is output Depending on the machine data MD11310 HANDWH_REVERSE the behavior is as follows as long as the axis on the setpoint side has not yet reached the end point e MD value 0 The distance resulting from the handwheel pulses forms a fictitious end point which is used for the subsequent calculations If this fictitious end point is positioned for example
207. e reset MD35040 SPIND_ACTIVE_AFTER_RESET defines the response of the spindle after reset or program end M2 M30 e f MD value 0 the spindle is immediately braked to rest at the valid acceleration The last programmed spindle speed and direction of rotation are deleted e f MD value 1 independent spindle reset the last programmed spindle speed S function and the last programmed direction of spindle rotation M3 M4 M5 are retained If prior to reset or end of program the constant cutting speed G96 is active the current spindle speed in relation to 100 spindle override is internally accepted as the spindle speed last programmed Note The spindle can always be stopped with the IS Delete distance to go Spindle Reset CAUTION The program continues at G94 With G95 the axes stop due to the missing feedrates as does the program run if G1 G2 is active 15 2 3 Spindle oscillation mode Starting oscillation mode This oscillation movement makes it easy to engage a new gear stage In principle the new gear stage can also be engaged without oscillation The spindle is in oscillation mode if a new gear stage was defined using the automatic gear stage selection M40 or M41 to M45 IS Change gear DB390x DBX2000 3 is enabled The IS Change gear is only enabled when a new gear stage is selected that is not the same as the current actual gear stage The spindle oscillation is started with the IS Oscillation speed DB380
208. e sets the background color of the control color_fg The attribute sets the foreground color of the control color coding see Section Color coding Page 218 display_format The attribute defines the processing format of the specified variable This attribute must be used when accessing a PLC float variable as the access is realized by reading a double word The following data formats are permitted FLOAT INT DOUBLE STRING Assigning expressions e g text or graphic element to be displayed to a list box graphics box or combo box Syntax lt ITEM gt Expression lt ITEM gt lt ITEM value lt Value gt gt Expression lt ITEM gt Function Manual 226 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 TAE Menn OOOO CONTROL continued Example lt CONTROL name button1 xpos 10 ypos 10 fieldtype combobox gt lt ITEM gt text1l lt ITEM gt lt ITEM gt text2 lt ITEM gt lt ITEM gt text3 lt ITEM gt lt ITEM gt text4 lt ITEM gt lt CONTROL gt If any integer value is to be assigned to an expression the attribute value value should be added to the tag Rather than consecutive numbers the control variable now contains the item s assigned value Example lt CONTROL name buttonl xpos 10 ypos 10 fieldtype combobox gt lt ITEM value LO Stextl lt TTEM gt lt ITEM value N20 Stext lt 1 TEM gt lt ITEM value 12 gt text3 lt ITEM gt lt ITEM value 1 gt text4 lt ITEM gt lt CONTRO
209. e user should proceed as follows 1 Cancel the current traverse movement with residual distance deletion 2 Activate fixed point approach for another fixed point and start the operation after the axis comes to a standstill Withdrawal from fixed point deactivation To withdraw from a fixed position you must deactivate the Approaching fixed point in JOG function This is done by resetting the activation signal to 0 DB380x DBX1001 0 2 0 The message signals JOG Approaching fixed point active and JOG Approaching fixed point reached are canceled on leaving the fixed point position Special case Axis is already on fixed point The axis cannot be moved if while starting the fixed point traverse the axis is already at the position of the fixed point to be approached This is displayed through the following channel status message JOG lt Axis gt position reached To withdraw from the fixed position you must deactivate the Approaching fixed point in JOG function Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 67 Special features of incremental travel If during incremental travel the fixed point is reached before the increment is completed then the increment is considered to have been completed fully This is the case even when only whole increments are traveled MD11346 HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE 2 or 3 Features of modulo rotary axes Modulo rotary axes can approach the fixed point in both directions bit 2 of MD10735
210. ed and the axes are braked to rest with setpoint 0 without considering the acceleration limits If the acknowledgment is not received by the end of the block in long blocks in which the velocity has not needed to be reduced on account of the PLC acknowledgment time the velocity is maintained until the end of the block and then reduced as described above If the acknowledgment arrives while the axis is decelerating the axis is not accelerated back up to the requested velocity 4 4 2 Velocity reduction according to overload factor Function This function lowers the path velocity in continuous path mode until the nontangential block transition can be traversed in one interpolation cycle whilst respecting the deceleration limit and taking an overload factor into account With the reduced velocity axis specific jumps in velocity are produced with a nontangential contour at the block transition The jump in velocity prevents the path velocity dropping to zero This jump is performed if the axial velocity was reduced with the axial acceleration to a velocity from which the new setpoint can be reached with the jump The magnitude of the setpoint jump can be limited using an overload factor Because the magnitude of the jump is axial the minimum jump of the path axes which are active during the block change is considered during block transition With a practically tangential block transition the path velocity is not reduced if the permissible axial acc
211. ee eee 3 1 Overview of monitoring functions ccccceeecccceeeecceececceeeecseueeessuscecseueeecsucesssaseeesaeeeseaeeessaueeeesaeeeesaaeees 3 2 RUNNING MOMONG resres REEE E EEE Er EE NERSE EAER EE ET 3 2 1 Contour Monor g seasan T E 3 2 2 POSON TONTON ses tnes sti cte cet a eb aatadns Ma lubn eth ted nati ala E dated yatmaauuare 3 2 3 Sand Sil WMO MONON shes sees os sates te casas E E E E E E E E E 3 2 4 Clamping monitoring ence 3 25 Speed setpoint monitoring nzdecs ches oeskerdiceccdudeheharlnectesete ie aieee ele inedacccihnd tweed eels Ae 3 2 6 Actual velocity monitoring sisi vsnsseiacaiscereptsticintinsicaseiietnatiniersitibitiantiemea nh ienatniaastiieehntetaneseatatincinexes 3 3 Static imitation MONMOPING 222o ssccaccacnreetanssccaseccenensasesetesaeeasbotareceuasecswadedsbacesteaaudbedandaceseoduabeisbeadeeteeauebetantaes 3 3 1 ESE SIUC I MONONNG sesees se yae et teat cease seeds octenn a aa aa 3 3 2 Hardware NGI SVWIEC INOS csc osnceceecccedcanscasedacacseueaananesesaaais seen cnnscaeeucuedeaansngudemanne desaanecetuasaneuesseseaeeeacouaseuarees 3 9 3 Software limit SWItCHES cece eecccceeecceeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseceseeceseeeeeseeeeseeeeseecesseeesseessaeeeseeeesaes 3 4 Supplementary COMGINIONS msasani rener eee nce een r reeds eat Er 3 5 DANA DIG ener ee Rea nee ena a E ear eae efor he ee nee ae ae eee ae ee ee oe 3 5 1 Machine Qala ee ee eo ee ee ee ee ee ee E 3 5 2 Miera ce ON Ngee taba cs ns ce sh Sc einen x
212. eeessaeeesaeessaeesaeeeseeseneesaes 19 1 Web License WIAMAGES I tinsntacamae tsi artiutendmaatnrdostsnedeeslakdalinteadunatarharitedamontseulintetdenaluntuemoteuielerenmuteraens 19 1 1 Assigning NCCN SCS sraditenseriet npiiaucatnaer E a 19 2 Activating the optional functions 2 0 cecccecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseaeeesseeeeeseaeeeeseneeesaaeeeesaanees 19 2 1 PRACIUOMAN CIS ccsncenctetondesianetaneniahdontuteeanigutendiiiecesambotantebcteaauigetnetaticiatdenbained ated sunbetueusutataaneaderdmtusendess 19 2 2 BS VMS Ona eee tee a sate a een eens eeeaee 19 2 3 Manual Machine PIUS c scacccasssacoasasnsscesanaeceencatad ERES AE AEAEE ERRE E EEEE EEE EAER 19 2 4 eca e E E E E E 19 2 5 Sa BA IO en E ee nen ete ae eee eer 19 3 PAUSE NANG S ccs Gases demir ccetwerwesin denier na dense ans eae rnin cuca ernie sad ne A ein N E 19 4 important NCCMSIING TSH sssaaa ERE RE R NARRE ENAR RA e RAAEN RRRA RER Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 1 Introduction Notations The following notation and abbreviations are used in this documentation e Programmable logic control PLC interface signals gt IS Signal name signal data Example IS Feedrate override DB380x DBBO The variable byte is located in the to axis range x stands for the axis 0 Axis 1 1 Axis 2 n Axis n 1 e Machine data gt MD MD_NR MD_NAME description e g MD30300 IS_ROT_AX rotary axis e Setting data gt SD SD_NR SD_NAME description e g S
213. elerations are not exceeded In this way very small angular changes in the contour can be overtraveled directly Overload factor The overload factor restricts step changes in the machine axis velocity at the block transition To ensure that the velocity jump does not exceed the maximum load on the axis the jump is derived from the acceleration of the axis The overload factor indicates the extent by which the acceleration of the machine axis which is set in MD32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL axis acceleration may be exceeded for an IPO cycle The velocity jump is the product of axis acceleration overload factor 1 interpolator cycle The overload factor is 1 2 Factor 1 0 means that only tangential transitions with finite velocity can be traversed For all other transitions the velocity is reduced to zero by changing the setpoint Selection and deselection of velocity reduction Continuous path mode with velocity reduction according to overload factor can be selected modally in every NC part program block by means of program code G64 BRISK active not SOFT Continuous path mode G64 can be interrupted non modally when exact stop G9 is selected e de selected when exact stop G60 is selected Function Manual 32 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 4 4 3 Jerk limiting along the path through velocity reduction Introduction With the jerk limiting along the path another method of influencing the continuous path mode is introduced While the Ve
214. endency Language dependent texts are used for e Softkey labels e Headers e Help texts e Any other texts The language dependent texts are stored in the text file almc txt 18 10 6 XML identifier 18 10 6 1 General structure Structure and instructions of the script file for dialog configuration All dialog configurations should be stored in the DialogGui tag lt DialogGui gt lt DialogGui gt Example lt xml version 1 0 encoding utf 8 gt 208 Predefined functions Pag l Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 lt DialogGui gt lt FORM name Hello World gt lt INIT gt lt CAPTION gt Hello World lt CAPTION gt lt INIT gt lt FORM gt lt DialogGui gt Instructions The following instructions can be used for executing conditional instructions and loop controls e For loop e While loop e Do with loop e Conditional processing e Switch and case instructions e Operator controls in a dialog form e Softkey descriptions e Define variables For a detailed description of instructions see Section Instruction identifier description Page 209 18 10 6 2 Instruction identifier description The following XML tags are defined for generating dialogs and menus and for executing program sequences Note Attribute values that are in quotation marks lt gt should be replaced by the currently used expressions Example lt DATA_LIST action read write append id lt li
215. engths 1 to 3 in geometry and wear to the geometry axes are performed according to the SD value and are not changed if the machining plane G17 to G19 changes The assignment of the tool lengths 1 to 3 to the geometry axes for turning tools tool types 500 to 599 results from the value of the setting data SD42940 in accordance with the following table Plane value Length 1 Length 2 Length 3 17 Y X Z 18 X Z Y 19 Z Y X 17 X Y Z Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 177 18 Z X Y 19 Y Z X Each value not equal to 0 which is not equal to one of the six listed values is evaluated as the value for 18 With respect to the values with a negative sign the assignment of length 3 is identical length 1 and 2 are exchanged compared to the assignment with the corresponding positive values The following table shows the assignment of the tool lengths 1 to 3 to the geometry axes for drills milling cutters tool types 100 to 299 Plane value Length 1 Length 2 Length 3 17 Z Y X 18 Y X Z 19 X Z Y 17 Z X Y 18 Y Z X 19 X Y Z Each value not equal to 0 which is not equal to one of the six listed values is evaluated as the value for 17 With respect to the values with a negative sign the assignment of length 1 is identical length 2 and 3 are exchanged compared to the assignment with the corresponding positive values Note For representation in tables it is assumed that geometry axes 1 to 3 are named X Y Z The axis
216. ensation with G41 G42 is only permitted in a program block with GO rapid traverse or G1 linear interpolation Detailed description of the tool compensation offset including tool radius compensation Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual 17 4 Special handling of tool compensation For the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED tool compensation offset can be handled as follows Influence of setting data Using specific setting data the operator programmer can influence the calculation of the length compensation of the used tool e D42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST allocation of the tool length components to the geometry axes e D42950 TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE allocation of the tool length components independent of tool type Note The modified setting data will become effective with the next cutting edge selection Tool length and plane change SD42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST Value of the setting data equal to 0 The behavior corresponds to the standard definition The lengths 1 to 3 in geometry and wear are assigned to the 1st to 3rd axes of the plane according to the active G17 to G19 and according to the tool type If the active G17 to G19 changes the axis assignment for the lengths 1 to 3 also changes because abscissa ordinate and application are allocated to different geometry axes Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Value of the setting data not equal to 0 The assignment of the tool l
217. enty three characters space Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 197 18 7 6 Creating the user cycle bitmap file The cycle icons must be stored as bitmap files bmp with a maximum size of 224 224 pixels in 16 colors The icon name must begin with an uppercase lowercase C and its length must not exceed 32 characters including the file extension e g CN1 bmp Note If 16 colors are not sufficient for the display you can also use 24 bit color depth bitmaps 18 7 7 Transferring the desired files to the control system Proceed as follows to transfer the required files to the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system Importing the cov com file and sc com file 1 Save the required file on a USB flash disk Insert the USB flash disk into the USB interface at the front of the PPU aN N 3 Select the desired operating area SHIFT ALARM or 4 Press these two softkeys in succession CS data E F Then multi select the cov com and sc com files with saser and copy them with P ai USB gagap 5 Press this softkey and access the folder HMI data gt User cycle files FS data Replace the empty files with the following Paste m GiUser cycle bitmap file bnmp jUser cycle alarm file fCalc txt E B User cycle parameter file sc conm Importing the user cycle alarm file 1 Save the required file on a USB flash disk 2 Insert the USB flash disk into the USB interface at the front
218. erface signal DB2600 DBX0001 0 the signal range within which INC continuous signals are delivered to the NCK DB2600 DBX0001 0 1 gt in the operating mode range DB3000 DBBO0002 valid for all axes DB2600 DBX0001 0 0O0 gt in the geometry axis axis range DB3200 DBB1001 DB3200 DBB1005 DB3200 DBB1009 DB380x DBB0005 Traversing keys The plus and minus traversing keys are selected to move the relevant axis in the appropriate direction Traverse key signals PLC to NCK IS e For geometry axes traverse in WCS DB3200 DBX1000 7 6 DB3200 DBX1004 7 6 DB3200 DBX1008 7 6 e For machine axes spindle traverse in MCS DB80x DBX004 7 6 If both traversing keys of an axis are pressed simultaneously there is no traversing movement or if an axis is in motion it is stopped Motion command As soon as a traverse request for an axis spindle is active e g after selection of a traverse key the IS Travel command or Travel command is sent to the PLC depending on selected traverse direction e For geometry axes DB3300 DBX1000 7 6 DB3300 DBX1004 7 6 DB3300 DBX1008 7 6 e For machine axes spindle DB390x DBX004 7 6 Continuous travel in jog mode The axis traverses for as long as the traverse key is held down if no axis limit is reached first When the traversing key is released the axis is decelerated to standstill and the movement comes to an end 7 3 Incremental travel INC Programming increments The
219. erk for path movement 32432 PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM Maximum axis specific jerk for path movement at block transition 4 7 2 Setting data Identifier Name General information 42470 CRIT_SPLINE_ANGLE Core limit angle compressor 42475 COMPRESS_CONTUR_TOL Maximum contour deviation in the compressor Function Manual 38 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 4 7 3 Interface signals Number Bit Name Channel specific DB3300 DBX0004 All axes stationary Axis spindle specific DB390x DBX0000 6 Position reached with exact stop coarse DB390x DBX0000 Position reached with exact stop fine 5 Acceleration 5 1 Acceleration profiles Abrupt acceleration changes With the v t linear control of the axis velocity that is normally applied the motion is controlled such that the acceleration rate changes abruptly over time With the discontinuous stepped acceleration jerk free starting and braking of the axes is not possible but a time optimized velocity time profile can be implemented Acceleration with jerk limitation The jerk is the change of acceleration over time For jerk limited acceleration the maximum acceleration is not abrupt but is specified by a ramp Because of the softer acceleration progression the traverse time is longer than with abrupt acceleration for the same distance velocity and acceleration This time loss can be compensated for by setting a higher acceleration for the axes However it has the following advantages
220. errupted as a result of disturbances or a RESET proceed as follows e Abort within section 1 or 2 Restart reference point with leading axis See section 1 e Abort in section 3 In cases where the gantry axes have not yet been referenced IS Referenced Synchronized 1 the gantry synchronization process can be started again with IS Synchronize gantry grouping Restart gantry synchronization Synchronization of the gantry axes can be started with IS Start gantry synchronization under the following conditions only e JOG REF mode must be active The following interface signal must be set DB3100 DBX0001 2 active machine function REF e DB390x DBX5005 5 0 gantry grouping is synchronized e All grouping axes operate within the tolerance windows DB390x DBX5005 4 1 Gantry synchronization ready to start e Axis is not referenced in the NC channel DB3300 DBX0001 0 0 referencing active If gantry synchronization is not started from the referencing process by means of IS Start gantry synchronization then the current actual position of the leading axis rather than the referencing position from MD34100 will be specified as the target position and approached in the decoupled state Note Automatic synchronization can be locked by the leading axis by means of the following interface signal DB380x DBX5005 5 automatic synchronization locking This always makes sense if no axis enabling signal has yet been issued for the
221. es Job DB1200 DBX0 0 global part DB1200 DBX0 1 Write variable DB1200 DBX0 2 PI service o o DB1200 DBB1 Number of variables Job DB120x DBB1000 Variable index See Section ie EE DB120x DBB1001 EErEE part a Page 19 DB120x DBB1002 Line index NCK variable DB120x DBB1004 Column index NCK variable DB120x DBB3004 Value of NCK variable data type DB120x DBW3004 depends on variable index DB120x DBD3004 Job DB1200 DBX2000 0 Request completed OM d DB1200 DBX2000 1 Erorinjobo n o Result variable specific part ee ee 2 7 NC variable Variable cuttEdgeParam Compensation value parameters and cutting edge list with D numbers for a tool The meanings of the individual parameters depend on the type of the tool in question Currently totally 25 parameters are reserved for each tool edge but only a part of them is loaded with values To be able to remain flexible for future extensions it is not recommended to use a fixed value of 25 parameters for calculation but the variable value numCuttEdgeParams variable index 2 For a detailed description of the tool parameters please refer to Chapter Tool Offset OOo i Vreren O DB120x DBB1001 o O EdgeNo 1 numCuttEdgeParams ParameterNo WORD Variable numCuttEdgeParams Number of P elements of an edge Be Variable numCuttEdgeParams r DB120x DBB1000 DB120x DBB1001 o O Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 19 es Variable numCuttEdgeParams r
222. es to the velocity with oscillation acceleration specified in MD35400 SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO oscillation speed The direction of rotation is determined by IS Set direction of rotation counterclockwise or IS Set direction of rotation clockwise DB380x DBX2002 7 or 6 The oscillation movement and the two times t1 and t2 for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation must be simulated on the PLC End of oscillation mode The IS Gear changed DB380x DBX2000 3 informs the NC that the new gear stage IS Actual gear stage DB380x DBX2000 0 to 2 applies and oscillation mode is exited The actual gear stage should correspond to the set gear stage Oscillation mode is also ended if the IS oscillation speed DB380x DBX2002 5 is still set The last programmed spindle speed S function and spindle rotation M3 M4 or M5 are active again After termination of oscillation mode the spindle returns to control mode All gear specific limit values min max speed etc correspond to the set values of the actual gear stage and are deactivated when the spindle stops Block change If the spindle has been changed over to oscillation mode IS Change gear DB390x DBX2000 3 is set part program processing is stopped A new block is not executed If oscillation mode is terminated using the IS Gear switched DB380x DBX2000 3 the execution of the part program is continued A new block is executed Speed rev min IS Gear changed Bl
223. ese Kinematic TanSiGnMa uOn csciccevessiaccdactcadncrdsscdcantecanetacttacelectentanetensdeacteisastestdacsdactancuneaetapiantecscatonbiasntaatenbmcetesdscans 11 1 IGT SCO HO ee E E E E E E 11 2 TRAR MIT sese E E S E a 11 2 1 VEIN ION aaar AE cree ane satan ab ev nauneaieabis yenetcuae 11 2 2 TRANSMIT CO MOU ralo N essen eE cance sete asecesecatecdeces senses encase EE EEE E E EE E 11 3 TRAC earner ere eee a een eee ee ee ee ae ee ee ne eee ee eee eee eee 11 3 1 ON asec e e nape aes cs A eae pn pee gee ce a de cea aden eae ean 11 3 2 TRANG Ye GOWN OD worse rena EO EATE EASA E EE aa 11 3 3 Programming example TRACY L ccccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseaeeesseeeesseeeeesaeeeesseeeeesaeeees 11 4 Special features of TRANSMIT and TRACY L ccccceccceeccseeeseeceeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeseeaueeseeeteeeeaeeneeeteeeeaeenes 11 5 DAE saver ees goa nton tenes acenteeaanaevaeunssa acoso era kacaenrc aa ee ease dastone ea haa Sarees ie eran eoane aceeeta aa eteeeeeaio aaa 11 5 1 Macnine dala seses ita peeiuea ah E annette nechennan E E EESE 11 5 2 Interface SIGNAIS o c0 cce lt ccvecencasveccesaneteeescevbsnbeadwtesetadvsandeaastanedaadnaedacdebeanderssanesaeubencdasveacdsadeleendesvtacbensstanntacuses Measte meN ore E A A a ids daaduanessaiamivedtebeketaplaiades 12 1 Brier de COUO arne N E 12 2 Hardware requirements cccccccseccceccceeeccucecaeecauecsuceceeecenecsueeseeceueesaeeseeseueeeaeesaeessueesueeseeesuessaeeneeesa
224. ete distance to go channel specific is only active for path axes With the rising edge of the interface signal the distances to go of all axes in the geometry grouping are deleted and thus brought to a standstill with ramp stop The next program block is then started Axis spindle disable DB380x DBX1 3 IS Axis spindle disable can be used for test purposes Axis disable for axis If IS Axis disable is output for this axis no more position partial setpoints are output to the position controller the axis travel is therefore disabled The position control loop remains closed and the remaining following error is reduced to zero If an axis is moved with axis disable the actual value position display shows the setpoint position and the actual velocity value display shows the setpoint velocity even though the machine axis is not actually moving IS RESET DB3000 DBX0 7 sets the position actual value display to the real actual value of the machine Travel commands continue to be output to the PLC for this axis If the interface signal is cancelled again the associated axis can again traverse normally If the interface signal Axis disable is set for a traversing axis the axis is stopped with a ramp stop Spindle disable for spindle If IS Spindle disable is set no more speed setpoints are output to the speed controller in openloop control mode and no more position partial setpoints are output to the position controller in positionin
225. eys in the approach direction are disabled Remedy e Reset e Move in the opposite direction in JOG mode e Correct the program 3 3 3 Software limit switches Function They are used to limit the maximum traversing range on each individual axis There are two pairs of software limit switches for each machine axis They are defined in the machine axis system using the following machine data MD36100 POS_LIMIT_MINUS st software limit switch minus MD36110 POS_LIMIT_PLUS 1st software limit switch plus MD36120 POS_LIMIT_MINUS2 2nd software limit switch minus MD36130 POS_LIMIT_PLUS2 2nd software limit switch plus Effectiveness e Software SW limit switch monitoring is activated after reference point approach in all modes e The position of the software limit switch can be approached e The 2nd software limit switch can be activated via the 2nd software limit switch plus minus interface signal DB380x DBX1000 3 or 2 from the PLC The change becomes active immediately The 1st software limit switch plus minus is then de activated e The SW limit switch monitoring does not function for endlessly turning rotary axes i e if MD30310 ROT_IS_MODULO 1 Modulo conversion for rotary axis and spindle Effect reactions Based on the mode different responses to an attempted software limit switch violation are possible AUTO MDA e The block that would violate the software limits switches is not started The previous block is termin
226. f all axes and spindles as quickly as possible e Unlocking of the EMERGENCY STOP button does not reset the EMERGENCY STOP state Resetting the control device does not restart the machine e After the EMERGENCY STOP state has been cancelled it is not necessary to reference axes or synchronize spindles positions are corrected Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 143 13 2 EMERGENCY STOP sequence Requirements Actuation of the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton or a signal derived directly from the button must be taken to the control system PLC as a PLC input In the PLC user program this PLC input must be transferred to IS EMERGENCY STOP DB2600 DBX0000 1 in the NC Resetting of the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton or a signal derived directly from the button must be taken to the control system PLC as a PLC input In the PLC user program this PLC input must be transferred to IS Acknowledge EMERGENCY STOP DB2600 DBX0000 2 in the NC Sequence in the NC The predefined in EN 418 sequence of internal functions that are implemented to obtain the EMERGENCY STOP state is as follows in the control system 1 Part program execution is interrupted All axes and spindles are braked along a braking ramp defined in MD36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME The IS 808D READY DB3100 DBX0000 3 is reset The IS EMERGENCY STOP active DB2700 DBX0000 1 is set Alarm 3000 is set On expiry of a delay that is set for specific axes spindles in MD36
227. face of cylinder G19 Y Z plane OFFN address Distance of groove side wall from the reference contour also see TRACYL programming example Programming OFFN Distance in mm As a rule the groove center line is programmed OFFN determines the groove width when the milling radius compensation is active G41 G42 Set OFFN 0 once the groove has been completed 130 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 11 3 2 TRACYL configuration General machine data The names of the machine data channel axes and geometry axes from the general machine data 6MN_AXCONMF and channel specific machine data 6MC_AXCONMF are also used for a transformation The geometry axis assignments specified in MD20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB only apply when the transformation is deactivated Additional assignments are specified for a transformation Note The assigned machine axis names channel axis names and geometry axis names must differ e MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB e MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB e MD20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB Exception for TRACYL The axis names of MD20060 and MD20080 geometry and channel axes can be the same for the TRACYL transformation e g X Y Z if no Y axis exists outside the transformation This is usually the case for lathes Machine data for transformation MD24100 TRAFO_TYPE_1 Def for first TRACYL transformation MD24110 TRAFO_AXES_IN_1 n Channel axes for transformation 1 MD24120 TRAFO_G
228. fic to operating mode DB3200 DBX0001 O DB3300 DBX0001 _ 0 Referencing active S DB3300 DBX0004 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 151 15 Spindle 15 1 Brief description Spindle functions Depending on the machine type the following functions are possible for a spindle controlled by the NC e Input of a direction of rotation for the spindle M3 M4 e Input of a spindle speed S e Spindle stop without orientation M5 Spindle positioning SPOS position controlled spindle required e Gear change M40 to M45 e Thread cutting tapping G33 G34 G35 G331 G332 G63 e Revolutional feedrate G95 e Constant cutting rate G96 e Position encoder assembly on the spindle or on the spindle motor e Spindle monitoring for min and max speed e Dwell time in spindle revolutions G4 S An enabled spindle can be used instead of a controlled spindle However a spindle speed S is then not entered via the program but for example manually gearbox at the machine This does not permit programming of speed limits The following is possible via the program e Input of a direction of rotation for the spindle M3 M4 e Spindle stop without orientation M5 e Tapping G63 If the spindle has a position encoder the following functions are also available e Thread cutting tapping G33 G34 G35 e Revolutional feedrate G95 If the spindle is enabled the setpoint output for the spindle via MD30130 CTRLOUT_TYPE 0 must
229. following e CoL Certificate of License e License key CoL The CoL is the proof of the license The product may only be used by the holder of the Certificate of License license or authorized persons The CoL includes the following data relevant for the license management Product name License number Delivery note number Hardware serial number Note The hardware serial number is only found on a system software CoL or is only available if a bundled license was ordered in other words the system software included options The license number is the feature of a license that is used for its unique identification CompactFlash Card The CompactFlash Card system represents as the carrier of all the retentive data of a system SINUMERIK control system the identity of this control system The CompactFlash Card system includes the following data that is of relevance to license management e Hardware serial number e License information including the License Key Hardware serial number The hardware serial number is a permanent part of the CompactFlash Card system It is used to identify a control system uniquely The hardware serial number can be determined by e CoL see Certificate of License gt Note 4 AV Ly Serv EFV e HMI user interface lt SYSTEM gt operating area 2 ALARM id displ f License Version gt key e Printing on the CompactFlash Card system License key The License Key is the techni
230. for new user interfaces are stored in configuration files These files are automatically interpreted and the result displayed on the screen Configuration files EasyXLanguage scripts are included in the examples easyXL folder of the Toolbox An XML editor or another form of text editor can be used to generate the configuration files Note No distinction is made between upper and lower case letters Menu tree principle Several interlinked dialogs create a menu tree A link exists if you can switch from one dialog to another You can use the newly defined horizontal vertical softkeys in this dialog to call the preceding or any other dialog Configured start softkeys can be used to create a further menu tree behind the start menu Start menu Start menu The start menu is defined by the name main in the xmldial xml file The start menu is used to initiate your own operating sequences Loading your own dialogs or additional softkey bars can be linked with the main menu Additional actions can be performed using these softkey bars Returning to the standard application You can exit the newly created user interfaces and return to the standard application by pressing one of the following keys or key combination on the PPU eel 7 SYSTEM SYSTEM M a eS LB OLA A amp aay PROGRAM MENU MACHINE PROGRAM OFFSET MANAGER SHIFT ALARM ALARM OF FUNCTION Function Manual 206 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 18
231. g mode The movement of the spindle is thus disabled The speed actual value display displays the speed setpoint value The spindle disable is cancelled via Reset or program end M2 and program restart If interface signal Spindle disable is set while a spindle is turning the spindle is stopped according to its acceleration characteristic Deactivation Cancellation of the Axis spindle disable edge change 1 gt 0 does not take effect until the axis spindle is stationary i e an interpolation setpoint is no longer present The new movement begins with new specified setpoints E g new program block with movement specifications in the AUTO operating mode Note actual values vary between simulated and real axis Follow up mode DB380x DBX 1 4 If an axis spindle is operating in follow up mode its setpoint position is made to track the current actual value position The position setpoint in follow up mode is not defined by the interpolator but derived from the actual position value Since recording of the actual position value of the axis continues it is not necessary to re home the axis when follow up mode is cancelled Standstill clamping and positioning monitoring are not effective in follow up mode Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 11 Effect The IS Follow up mode is only of relevance if the drive controller enable has been removed e g by IS Controller enable 0 signal or because of a fault in the contr
232. g probe is a touch probe at a fixed location or is swiveled into the working area by means of a mechanical device If the probe plate is of rectangular design the edges should be aligned parallel to the axis The tool calibration tool is traversed against the measuring probe The probe must be calibrated before a measurement is taken This means that the precise probe triggering points in relation to the machine zero are known Preparation probe calibration 1 Select the JOG mode 2 The following values should be entered in the displayed window via this softkey me sich return plane safety clearance JOG feed variable increment and direction of rotation of the spindle for general use in JOG and for tool measuring DSE J The following value must be entered in the window which opens when pressing this softkey ttle e Feed for automatic probe approach in the measuring program e Probe triggering points the values are set during calibration If the precise values are known they can be entered manually The probe does not then need to be calibrated Heas 4 The adjustment sequence of the probe calibration is controlled via these two softkeys and 7 eL the opening window The tool used in this case is the calibration tool with precisely known and l entered dimensions PEE The calibration tool for the milling technology is of cutter type The internal sequence is the same as in measuring The measuring results however
233. g system specific parameters must be set for the table see Fig Compensation table parameters system variables for LEC e Compensation value for interpolation point N in compensation table AA_ENC_COMP 0 N AXiJ where AXi machine axis name e g X1 Y1 Z1 N interpolation point index For every individual interpolation point axis position the compensation value must be entered in the table The magnitude of the compensation value is not limited Note The first and last compensation values remain active over the entire traversing range i e these values should be set to 0 if the compensation table does not cover the entire traversing range e Distance between interpolation points SAA_ENC_COMP_STEP 0 AXiJ The distance between interpolation points defines the distance between the compensation values in the relevant compensation table see above for AXi e Starting position AA_ENC_COMP_MIN 0 AXi The starting position is the axis position at which the compensation table for the relevant axis begins interpolation point 0 The compensation value for the starting position is AA_ENC_COMP 0 0 AXi The compensation value of interpolation point O is used for all positions smaller than the starting position exception table with modulo function e End position AA_ENC_COMP_MAX 0 AXiJ The end position is the axis position at which the compensation table for the relevant axis ends interpolation point k lt
234. g voltage ranging from 10 V to 10 V and two signals in terminals X21 8 and X21 9 The voltage has the corresponding output on the control system The analog spindle supports an increment encoder TTL encoder which can be connected to the control system directly You can parameterize the encoder only of an analog spindle When you set the parameter of the encoder with a step motor shaft alarm 26006 is thrown out Through MD30130 CTRLOUT_TYPE and MD30240 ENC_TYPE you can switch the rated value output between an analog spindle and an actual spindle For an analog spindle without any encoder MD30240 ENC_TYPE n must be set to zero Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 165 15 8 Data table 15 8 1 Machine data Number Identifier Name O 32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME n Equivalent time constant speed control circuit for feedforward control 34040 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER Reference point creep speed 34060 REFP_MAX_MARKER_DIST Monitoring of zero mark distance 34080 REFP_MOVE_DIST Reference point distance destination point for distancecoded system Function Manual 166 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 35440 SPIND_OSCILL_ TIME _CW Oscillation time for M3 direction Identifier po Name O 36302 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW Encoder limit frequency resynchronization 36720 DRIFT_VALUE Drift basic value The machine data marked with is contained in the parameter set for a gear stage 15 8 2 Setting data Number identifier Name General
235. ght up to the end independently of a possibly set read in disable Note Recommendation for MD11450 with block search MD11450 SEARCH_RUN_MODE H7 search parameterization Bit O 1 With the loading of the last action block after block search the processing is stopped and the VDI signal Last action block active is set Alarm 10208 is not output until the PLC requests this by setting the VDI signal PLC action ended Application PLC starts an ASUP after block search Bit 1 1 Automatic ASUP start after output of the action blocks Alarm 10208 is not output until the ASUP is completed Bit 2 1 Output of the auxiliary functions is suppressed in the action blocks The spindle programming that accumulated during the block search can be output at a later point in time e g in an ASUP The program data for this is stored in the following system variables e P_SEARCH_S P_SEARCH_SDIR P_SEARCH_SGEAR P_SEARCH_SPOS P_SEARCH_SPOSMODE Function Manual 90 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 9 3 9 Asynchronous subroutines ASUPs Function It is possible to activate two different ASUPs PLCASUP1_SPF and PLCASUP2_SPF from the PLC via the ASUP interface area Before an asynchronous subroutine ASUP can be started from the PLC it must have been assigned to an interrupt number by an NC program or by the PI service ASUP see DB1200 DBB4000 Once prepared in this way it can be started at any time from the PLC The NC progr
236. gment the output signals are not updated without the operational sequence of the activated function being affected Negative acknowledgment Error has occurred Figure 9 3 Pulse diagram for PLCASUP1_SPF O 0000 Configuration The behavior of the ASUP can be influenced via the following standard machine data Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 91 e MD11602 ASUP_START_MASK ignore stop reasons for ASUP The machine data specifies which stop reasons are to be ignored for an ASUP start Recommended MD11602 H7 e MD11604 ASUP_START_PRIO_LEVEL priority as of which MD11602 is effective This machine data specifies the ASUP priority as of which machine data MD11602 ASUP_START_MASK is to be applied MD11602 is applied from the level specified here up to the highest ASUP priority level 1 Recommended MD11604 2 e MD20116 IGNORE_INHIBIT_ASUP execute interrupt program in spite of read in disable In spite of set read in disable an assigned user ASUP is processed completely for the interrupt channel with the set bit Bit O is assigned to interrupt channel 1 PLCASUP 1 Bit 1 is assigned to interrupt channel 2 PLCASUP2 The machine data is effective only if MD11602 ASUP_START_MASK Bit2 0 e MD20117 IGNORE_SINGLEBLOCK_ASUP execute interrupt program completely in spite of single block In spite of selected SBL processing mode an assigned user ASUP is processed completely for the interrupt channel with the set bit Bit O is ass
237. gnals from HMI to PLC Page 151 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 81 9 3 2 Start of part program or part program block START command channel status The channel specific IS NC start DB3200 DBX0007 1 which is usually controlled from the machine control panel key A starts program processing The START command can only be executed in the AUTO and MDA modes For this purpose the channel must be in the Channel status reset DB3300 DBX0003 7 or Channel status interrupted DB3300 DBX0003 6 Required signal states The selected part program can now be enabled for processing with the START command The following enable signals are relevant IS 808D Ready DB3100 DBX0000 3 must be set IS Activate program test DB3200 DBX0001 7 may not be set IS NC Start disable DB3200 DBX0007 0 may not be set IS NC Stop at block limit DB3200 DBX0007 2 may not be set IS NC stop DB3200 DBX0007 3 may not be set IS NC Stop axes plus spindle DB3200 DBX0007 4 may not be set IS EMERGENCY STOP DB2700 DBX0000 1 may not be set Axis or NCK alarm may not be present Execution of command The part program or part program block is automatically processed and IS Channel status active DB3300 DBX0003 5 and IS Program status running DB3300 DBX0003 0 are set The program is processed until the end of the program has been reached or the channel is interrupted or aborted by a STOP or RESET command Interrupts
238. gnitude at the end of the customizing process MD37110 lt MD37120 lt MD37130 Function Manual 58 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 Note The same procedure must be followed when commissioning a gantry grouping in which the axes are operated by linear motors and associated measuring systems The error limits entered into machine data MD37110 and MD37120 are considered to be additional tolerance values for the actual value difference of the leading axis and following axis if the IS Gantry is synchronous is not present e g to be resynchronized after canceling alarms without the gantry grouping 6 8 Data lists 6 8 1 Machine data Number _ Identifier Nam _ O O O O O OO O OOOO O O Axis specific 34110 REFP_CYCLE_NR Axis sequence for channel specific referencing 34330 REFP_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER 0 Distancecoded linear measuring system without destination point Invalidate gantry axis grouping Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 59 6 8 2 Interface signals Number Bit Name Leading axis Synchronized axis Mode specific DB3100 DBX00 Active machine function REF ne 01 Channel specific 01 Axis specific DB380x DBX50 4 Start gantry synchronization X 05 DB380x DBX50 5 Automatic synchronization locking X 05 DB390x DBX00 4 Referenced synchronized 1 00 DB390x DBX50 2 Gantry trip limit exceeded X 05 DB390x DBX50 3 Gantry warning limit exceeded x 05 DB390x DBX50 4 Gantry synchronization rea
239. grouping must now be identical The gantry synchronization process is now complete e Difference is higher than the gantry warning limit for the synchronized axis IS Gantry synchronization read to start is set to 1 and the message Wait for synchronization start of gantry grouping x is output The gantry synchronization process is not started automatically in this case but must be started explicitly by the operator or from the PLC user program The process is initiated by IS Start gantry synchronization on the leading axis The signal is set on the leading axis The operational sequence is then the same as that described above The following flowchart illustrates the referencing and synchronization processes Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 45 Start referencing process On channel specific basis On axis specific basis From part program with G74 with IS Activate referencing 1 and Active with IS Traversing key 1 of leading and axis address of leading machine function REF 1 axis and Active machine function REF axis 1 Section 1 Referencing of leading axis Start Referencing of gantry axis Leading axis approaches reference point synchronized axis moves in synchronism SRT on the PLC IS Referenced synchronized 1 for ieee ne leading axis Internal start Section 2 Synchronized axis approaches reference Referencing of synchronized
240. gss 12 2 1 Probes that can be USC we cccsicidanseienpieairesiaeneteisesadwebiaedevaretnnasedstdenVesanedaweriseindeiaeadbselsigeavnaantanndtieineeaaesiees 12 2 2 Prope CONNECCION ieaie E AE a e E E E a EA 12 3 Channel specifie MEAS UMN jasc cccevenc cn jokteocenapctaskddidootewenctanndeaodivesaaskdbdaodwenswacadentoetiwapsiadtbidiediwestecteat 12 3 1 Koa UNI MOE asic chicas eatin ca tans saaemeranastidnasnantetetadetansinan damaicustddmmsnan Salbeta E E 12 3 2 Measurement results cccccc cece eccceeceeeceeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeseeeseesseeseeeeeeseeetaeeseesaeeteeneeeaeeees 12 4 Measurement accuracy and functional teSting ccccccccccsececeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeessaeeeeeaaeeeesaaeees 12 4 1 VISAS UII ACC UG cinei eino i Erne ed cannes a ER DN E NEA EAE 12 4 2 Probe functional tOSt ce ceccceccceececeeeceeeeeeeceeceeueeaeeeseeeeeneeaueeteeeseneeaueeseeseeneeaeesaeetsneeseeteestsneeaeeseeseaaes 12 5 Tool measuring hag C eeeene Renee ene ee ence nearer ene nen eae ae ene near ee eee renee eee nee ee eee ree eee 12 6 PAADIGA EE eearece sas oicais ca E E E R 12 6 1 Mac a eee E E E A E E ane 12 6 2 Interface SIQMAIS cccccccccceeseccceeeeccseececsenseccaueecsseeecseueeeceuusessaueeessaueeessuuseesaeeessugeeessesesseueeesseneessaagees EMERGENCY OFF ziurrean cee aise ete cosa asemeae E E EE aeaies 13 1 Brief CESCHIDNON seiascscrsscndsaaesienaseewkenstedsvoucsieasbaselecausamstsicband a
241. gure 9 5 Chronological order of interface signals After Block search with calculation at block end point automatic repositioning is not performed between Last action block active and continuation of part program processing by NC Start The start point of the approach movement is the current axis position on NC Start the end point results from the processing of the part program Action blocks Action blocks contain the actions accumulated during block search with calculation e g auxiliary function outputs and tool T D spindle S and feed programming commands During block search with calculation contour or block end point actions such as M function outputs are accumulated in so called action blocks These blocks are output on an NC Start after Search target found Note The action blocks also activate the accumulated spindle programming S value M3 M4 M5 SPOS The PLC user program must ensure that the tool can be operated and if necessary the spindle programming is reset via the IS Spindle reset DB380x DBX0002 2 PLC actions after block search There is the IS Last action block active to enable activation of PLC actions after block search The signal indicates that all action blocks have been executed and it is now possible to perform PLC actions or operator actions e g mode change This allows the PLC to perform another tool change for example before the start of the movement The alarm 10208 is also outp
242. h reversal MD34050 REFP_SEARCH MARKER_REVERS E 1 Output cam Synchronizing pulse Without reference cam Reference coordinate after MD34000 synchronizing pulse REFP_CAM_IS_ACTIVE 0 Synchronizing pulse Vc reference point approach velocity MD34020 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_CAM Vm reference point creep velocity MD34040 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER Vp reference point positioning velocity MD34070 REFP_VELO_POS Rv reference point offset MD34080 REFP_MOVE_DIST MD34090 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR Rk reference point coordinate MD34100 REFP_SET_POS What is the minimum length of a reference cam Example of case Synchronizing pulse before cam reference coordinate before synchronizing pulse synchronizing pulse search with falling cam edge The reference cam must be long enough so that when the cam is approached with the reference point approach velocity the braking operation ends at the cam the axis comes to a standstill at the cam and the cam is exited in the opposite direction with the reference point creep velocity exit with constant velocity To calculate the minimum length of the cam the larger of the two velocities must be inserted into the formula reference point approach speed or creep speed Min length 2 x axis acceleration MD 32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL If the machine axis does not come to a halt at the reference cam interface signal Reference point approach delay DB380x DBX1000 7 is reset alarm
243. has no significance for them No attempt is made to follow the shortest path DC during the approach Features of spindles A spindle changes to the positioning mode on actuating the Approaching fixed point in JOG function The closed loop position control is active and the axis can traverse to the fixed point lf a zero mark has not been detected the following alarm message is output as with axis operation Alarm 17810 Channel 1 axis 2 not referenced As a spindle must also be a modulo rotary axis at all times the same conditions apply for direction observation as for modulo rotary axes refer to the paragraph Features of modulo rotary axes 7 5 3 Parameter setting Movement in the opposite direction The response while traversing in the opposite direction i e against the direction of the approaching fixed point depends on the setting of Bit 2 in the machine data MD10735 JOG_MODE_MASK settings for JOG mode Bit Value Description S O 2 p Travel in the opposite direction is not possible default setting Movement in the opposite direction is possible Fixed point positions A maximum of 4 fixed point positions can be defined for each axis via the following machine data MD30600 FIX_POINT_POS n Number of valid fixed point positions The number of valid fixed point positions of an axis is defined via the machine data MD30610 NUM_FIX_POINT_POS Note Approaching fixed point with G75 constitutes an exce
244. he NC PLC interface signal JOG Approaching fixed point reached DB390x DBX1001 3 5 is not signaled 7 5 6 Application example Target A rotary axis machine axis 4 AX4 is to be moved to Fixed Point 2 90 degrees with the Approaching fixed point in JOG function Parameter setting The machine data for the Approaching fixed point function of machine axis 4 are parameterized as follows MD30610 NUM_FIX_POINT_POS AX4 4 4 fixed points are defined for machine axis 4 MD30600 FIX_POINT_POS 0 AX4 0 1st Fixed point of AX4 0 degree MD30600 FIX_POINT_POS 1 AX4 90 2nd Fixed point of AX4 90 degree MD30600 FIX_POINT_POS 2 AX4 180 3rd Fixed point of AX4 180 degree MD30600 FIX_POINT_POS 3 AX4 270 4th Fixed point of AX4 270 degree Initial situation Machine axis 4 is referred and is in Position 0 degree This corresponds to the 1st fixed point and is output via the following NC PLC interface signal DB390x DBX1001 0 1 bit 0 2 1 Approaching fixed point 2 The control system is switched in the JOG mode The Approaching fixed point procedure for fixed point 2 is activated via the following NC PLC interface signal DB380x DBX1002 1 1 bit 0 2 2 Activation is confirmed by the following NC PLC interface signal DB390x DBX1001 1 1 bit 0 2 2 The Plus traverse key in the machine control table is used to traverse continuously to approach Fixed Point 2 The machine axis 4 stops at the 90 degree posi
245. he axis index can be read from a local variable using lt variable name gt substitution characters e g AX localvariable Example lt DATA name SMN AXCONF MACHAX NAME TAB 0 gt X1 lt DATA gt Function Manual 220 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Direct addressing of the axis lt DATA name MA CTRLOUT MODULE NR O AX1 gt 1 lt DATA gt Indirect addressing of the axis lt LET name axisIndex gt 1 lt LET gt lt DATA name MA CTRLOUT MODULE NR 0 AXSaxisIndex gt 1 lt DATA gt 18 10 7 4 Addressing the user data Addressing user data starts with the path section gud followed by the GUD name For a field after the name the required field index should be specified in square brackets Example lt DATA name gud syg rm 0 lt OP gt gud syg rm 0 0 10 lt op gt 18 10 8 Generating user menus 18 10 8 1 Generating softkey menus and dialog forms User menus can only be inserted if there is a main menu tag with the name main in the XML description This tag is called CUSTOM by the system after the lt CUSTOM gt operating area has been activated Further menu branches and dialog box activation can be defined within the tag lt menu name MAIN gt lt OPEN_FORM name main dialogue gt lt softkey POSITION 1 gt lt caption gt sub menu 1 lt caption gt lt navigation gt sub menu 1 lt navigation gt lt softkey gt main menu lt softkey POSITION 8 gt CI lt caption gt sub menu 8 lt
246. hieve the maximum possible path velocity under consideration of both axes If for example two axes have the same maximum velocity and also travel the same path the path velocity 1 41 max axis velocity The feedrate F is not relevant for GO It is however kept in the memory Rapid traverse override M Prog In the AUTO operating mode it can be set through the lt MACHINE gt operating area M gt y cont softkey that the feedrate override switch also applies to the rapid traverse The active function is displayed with ROV in the status line HMI to PLC sets the IS Feedrate override for rapid traverse selected DB1700 DBX0001 3 The PLC user program must place this signal on the IS Rapid traverse override active DB3200 DBX0006 6 16 3 Feedrate control 16 3 1 Overview Progr F value Progr S value IS Activate dry run X axis radius feedrate Saved SD DRY_RUN_FEED gt G96 S value dry run G95 feedrate F value IET 7 697 G95 G96 G97 2 D X G94 Spindle override from machine PLC control panel IS Activate dry run feedrate gt Spindle speed setpoint G94 G95 J100 J Feed override Ce from machine control PLC Z 0 panel 0 xxx IS Rapid traverse override active l IS Feed rate override active Path velocity IS Override active Figure 16 1 Possibilities for programming and controlling the feedrate Function Manual 172 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0
247. identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products systems Proper use of Siemens products Note the following Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation If products and components from other manufacturers are used these must be recommended or approved by Siemens Proper transport storage installation assembly commissioning operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with The information in the relevant documentation must be observed Siemens AG 2012 2013 All rights reserved 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 1 Preface Applicable products This manual is applicable to the following control systems Control system SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T Turning SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M Milling Documentation components and target groups Component User documentation Programming and Operating Manual Turning Programming and Operating Manual Milling Programming and Operating Manual ISO Turning Milling Programming and Operating Manual Manual Machine Plus Programmers and operators of turning machines Turning Diagnostics Manual Mechanical and electrical designers commissioning engineers machine operators and service and maintenance personnel Manufacturer service documentation Commissioni
248. ific jerk during path movement jerk during path movement 32432 PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM Maximum axis specific jerk during path movement at the block transition 6 Gantry axes 6 1 Brief description Note If the corresponding option is activated without a valid license alarm 8081 1 option s that has have not been licensed using a license key was were set is output It will not be possible to operate the machine as normal For information on operations relating to Setting an option s please refer to the chapter titled Licensing in the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Page 247 Gantry axes Gantry axes are mechanically grouped machine axes Because of this mechanical coupling gantry axes are always traversed in unison The control occurs through the gantry axes function The machine axis that is directly traversed is called the leading axis The machine axis that is traversed in synchronism with it is called the synchronized axis Together the leading axis and synchronized axis form a gantry axis grouping The difference between the actual positions of the leading axis and synchronized axis is monitored continuously When the actual position value of the synchronized axis deviates too much from that of the leading axis the control automatically brings all axes in the gantry grouping to a standstill in order to prevent any damage to the machines Function Manual 40 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 Application Two feed drives
249. ific setting data identifier SC_ Meaning S SD42470 CRIT_SPLINE_ANGLE Corner limit angle for COMPCAD SD42475 COMPRESS_CONTUR_TOL Maximum permissible contour deviation with compression Note Corner limit angle and compressor function COMPCAD The corner limit angle for COMPCAD set via the setting data SD42470 SC_CRIT_SPLINE_ANGLE is only used as an approximate measure for corner detection By evaluating the plausibility the compressor can also identify flatter block transitions as corners and larger angles as outliers Axial machine data Identifier MA_ Meaning S MD33100 COMPRESS_POS_TOL Maximum permissible path deviation with compression Recommended settings for retroactive machine data When using the compressor function the following settings are recommended for the retroactive machine data on the compressor function Identifier Recommended value MD18360 MN_MM_EXT_PROG_BUFFER_SIZE 100 FIFO buffer size for execution from external source MD20490 MC_IGNORE_OVL_FACTOR_FOR_ADIS 1 G641 G642 irrespective of the overload factor Function Manual 34 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 Identifier Recommended value MD28520 MC_MM_MAX_AXISPOLY_PER_BLOCK 3 maximum number of axis polynomials per block MD28530 MC_MM_PATH_VELO_SEGMENTS 5 number of memory elements for limiting the path velocity MD28540 MC_MM_ARCLENGTH_SEGMENTS 10 number of memory elements for displaying the arc length function MD28060 MC_
250. igned to interrupt channel 1 PLCASUP 1 Bit 1 is assigned to interrupt channel 2 PLCASUP2 The machine data is effective only if MD10702 IGNORE_SINGLE_BLOCK_MASK Bit1 0 9 3 10 Responses to operator or program actions Responses The following table shows the channel and program states that result after certain operator and program actions The left hand side of the table shows the channel and program states and the mode groups from which the initial situation can be selected Various operator program actions are listed on the right hand side of the table the number of the situation after the action has been carried out is shown in brackets after each action Table 9 12 Responses to operator or program actions i status Program status Active mode Operator or program action Situation after the action ao fS bki f f kp Reser S 2 J bki f f k x RETO S a se ee ee R a E RESET o NC Start 13 mode change 5 or 6 Py ve 14 mode change r key 15 mode change 4 or oT ssent ooo Start 14 x NC Start 15 NC Start 13 mode change 10 or 11 Function Manual 92 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 status Program status Active mode Operator or program action Situation after the action NC Start 16 mode change 9 or 11 Direction key 17 mode change 9 or 10 NC Start 13 mode change 10 or 11 NC Stop 12 N a a ee a E E E NC Stop 10 at blockend 1 C E NC Stop F at J
251. in the incorrect folder name format cannot be identified by the control and thus will not be active on the control Country code table The following table provides different language codes for your reference Simplified Chinese chs f tala ta recital Chinese at Ronan ter Creche sy teh i perish dan ish kK p German deu Portuguese ptb oo Spanish esp o Russian o s e fin Swedish ve Function Manual 180 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Hungarian mun o S O 1 Default languages already loaded on the control in the scope of delivery 18 2 Calling an online help A Siemens online help is available for your reference You can press the key to call it m M 14 33 35 Mh 2013 07 13 SIEMENS manual Search Etic OEM c D a a a Exit Press ef on the PPU or Pao to display it or press 2 to exit the screen of the online help Machine manufacturer s online help You can also create your own online help in text files and upload the help into the control system using a USB stick To create your own online help you must use the existing help file format For example XE Chapter 2 gt create a bookmark that will be displayed in help content list HL1 gt define a headline with depth 1 Chapter 2 HL2 gt define a headline with depth 2 How to find the Online Help You can find the Online Help by pressing the HELP key gt text that follows the headline BITMAP Images
252. ine of the value transferred in degrees Parameter double x in the range from PI 2 to PI 2 Syntax lt function name arcsin return lt double val gt gt double lt function gt Example lt let name arcsin val type double gt lt let gt lt function name arcsin return ACCE VALN 20 0 lt function gt The function calculates the arccosine of the value transferred in degrees Parameter double x in the range from PI 2 to P1 2 Syntax lt function name arcos return lt double val gt gt double lt function gt Example lt let name arccos val type double gt lt let gt lt TUNCULON name taArceos Teturn varecos val gt 20 0 lt function gt The function calculates the arctan of the value transferred in degrees Parameter double arctan of y x Syntax lt function name arctan return lt double val gt gt double lt function gt Example lt let name arctan val type double gt lt let gt lt function Tames Aretan return arotan val 20 20 lt LUNCELON gt The function loads an additional user DLL to the memory Parameter dil_ name DLL name class_name name of the function class Syntax lt funct1on name d11 load gt dll name class name lt f netion gt Example lt r notion name dll lt loads r customer cdl i _i customer lt funetion gt 243 Function name Meaning dil function The function calls a function from a
253. ing Result variable specific part A result is reported for each variable in the job If the read process was successful Variable valid DB120x DBX3000 0 is set to 1 the access result DB120x DBB3001 is 0 When reading the data from DB120x DBB3004 are entered type specifically In case of error DB120x DBX3000 0 remains 0 and an entry is made in the access result DB120x DBB3001 e 0 No error e 3 Illegal access to object Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 17 e 5 Invalid address e 10 Object does not exist Values When reading the read data are in the range DB120x DBB3004 7 in the data type specific for the respective variable if required the values are converted from 64 bit to 32 bit REAL Relevant interface signals S o o Addes ss o Name es tis C isSCSCSCSCSCidi Waalid atl Job Rapa DB1200 DBX0 1 Writevariabe Z O o o DB1200 DBX0 2 Plservioe Cid O Job See Section aU part T Page 19 Job DB1200 DBX2000 0 Request completed ON giobalpar DB1200 DBX2000 1 Errorinjobo ON Result DB120x DBX3000 0 Invalid variable COT e e art j DB120x DBB3004 Value of NCK variable data type See Section DB120x DBW3004 depends on variable index NC variable DB120x DBD3004 Page 19 2 6 4 Writing variables from the NCK area 1 to 8 values can be written with a write job variable x 0 7 There is a variable specific part of the interface for this e Job DB120x DBB1000 e Result DB1
254. ing area 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 199 mo Sys a4 data 4 USB sat Press these two softkeys in succession Then select a user cycle file for example CYCLE100 with SELECT Press this softkey and then paste the file with the following Paste Length Importing the extended user text file SYSTEM N ALARM SHIFT mo Sys a data gt 4 USB 888D data Note Save the required file on a USB flash disk Insert the USB flash disk into the USB interface at the front of the PPU Select the desired operating area Press these two softkeys in succession Then select an extended user text file for example almc_eng txt with sect and copy it with Copy Press this softkey and access the folder HMI data gt Extended user text file Then paste the file with the following Paste After you import the cov com file sc com file alc_xxx txt file and almc_xxx txt file into the control a message appears wv prompting you to restart the HMI Then press UK to restart the HMI so that the new data can be active 200 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 18 7 8 Call the created user cycle After you transfer all the files necessary for your own cycle to the control system the cycle is created successfully Then you can use the cycle in the lt PROGRAMb gt operating area im Proceed as follows to call the created cycle for example CYCLE888 1
255. ing at the index specified Parameter string string variable index index zero based insert string string to be inserted Syntax lt TUNCeELOM MaMe String 1nsert gt String index insert string lt function gt Example lt let name str1 type sString gt A brown bear hunts lt let gt lt let name sStr2 type string gt a brown dog lt let gt lt EUNCULON Name StLring aI nsere gt str 19 strez lt funcetion gt Result str1 A brown bear hunts a brown dog String delete The function deletes the defined number of characters starting from the start position specified Parameter string string variable start index start index zero based nCount number of characters to be deleted Syntax lt function name String delete gt string start index NCOuUnG lt Lunction gt Example lt let name str1 type string gt A brown bear hunts lt let gt lt TUNCE LON ame Strang delere gt str ly 2y 5x TuUnGELOn gt Result str1 A bear hunts Function Manual 240 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Function name Meaning String find The function searches the transferred string for the first match with the substring If the substring is found the function provides the index to the first character starting with zero or failing this 1 Parameter string string variable findstring string to be found Syntax lt function name Sstring find return lt int val gt gt strl fi
256. ing service hotlink As a consequence the access time to variables which are not linked to the control is reduced If a function is to be called automatically when a value changes then the name of the function should be specified as an additional attribute This tag is only processed within the INIT operation Attribute e name Address identifier Syntax lt REQUEST name lt NC Variable gt gt UPDATE_CONTROLS The tag runs a comparison between the operator controls and the reference variables Attribute e type The attribute defines the direction of the data comparison TRUE data is read from the reference variables and copied to the operator controls FALSE Data is copied from the operator controls to the reference variables Syntax lt UPDATE CONTROLS type lt Direction gt gt Example lt SOFTKEY OK gt lt UPDATE CONTROLS type false gt lt SOFTKEY OK gt 18 10 8 2 Substitution characters The system offers the option of defining control properties attribute values for the runtime In order to use this function the desired property must be set in a local variable and the variable name must be transferred to the tag as an attribute value preceded by the character If the tag expects a string as attribute value or value the characters must be placed in front of the variable name Example lt let name my_ ypos gt 100 lt let gt lt let name field name type string gt lt
257. ing start up The compensations do not become operative internally in the control until the axis is referenced or the gantry grouping synchronized The following applies Compensation type Takes effect when PLC interface signal Backlash compensation Referenced Synchronized Referenced synchronized compensation Gantry grouping is synchronized Gantry grouping is synchronized If active compensation causes the synchronized axis to move a traverse command is displayed for the synchronized axis independently of the leading axis Monitoring functions effective Analogous to normal NC axes the following monitoring functions do not take effect for gantry axes until the reference point is reached IS Referenced Synchronizea e Working area limits e Software limit switch e Protection zones The axial machine data values are used as monitoring limit values for the synchronized axis as well Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 49 6 4 Start up of gantry axes General information Owing to the forced coupling which is normally present between leading and synchronized gantry axes the gantry axis grouping must be commissioned as if it were an axis unit For this reason the axial machine data for the leading and synchronized axes must always be defined and entered jointly If the synchronized axis is being overloaded by the leading axis due to reduced dynamics this is acknowledged with alarm 10656 Special points to
258. is makes it possible to achieve a lower velocity by applying LookAhead beyond the current block Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 37 Following block velocity One possible velocity profile contains the determination of the following block velocity Using information from the current and the following NC block a velocity profile is calculated from which in turn the required velocity reduction for the current override is derived The calculated maximum value of the velocity profile is limited by the maximum path velocity With this function it is possible to initiate a soeed reduction in the current block taking override into account such that the lower velocity of the following block can be achieved If the reduction in velocity takes longer than the travel time of the current block the velocity is further reduced in the following block Velocity control is only ever considered for the following block Selection and deselection of LookAhead If the continuous path mode G64 is selected LookAhead is called and de selected interrupted with G60 G9 47 Data table 4 7 1 Machine data Identifier Name General 28540 MM_ARCLENGTH_SEGMENTS Number of storage elements for arc length function representation per block 29000 LOOKAH_NUM_CHECKED_BLOCKS Number of blocks considered by the LookAhead function Axis spindle specific 32310 MAX_ACCEL_OVL_FACTOR Overload factor for axial velocity jumps 32431 MAX_AX_JERK Maximum axis specific j
259. is movements or SPOS movement of the spindle the auxiliary functions are all output immediately in a block Continuous path mode A path movement can only remain continuous if auxiliary function output takes place during the movement and is acknowledged by the PLC before the path end is reached see Chapter Continuous Path Mode Page 31 Interface signals Transfer of the signals from NCK to the PLC Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 13 8 4 Grouping of auxiliary functions Functionality The auxiliary functions of the types M H D T and S that are to be issued can be grouped to auxiliary function groups through the machine data An auxiliary function can only be assigned to one group Only one auxiliary function of a group can be programmed per block Otherwise alarm 14760 is issued Configuration You can define a maximum of 64 auxiliary function groups A maximum of 64 auxiliary functions can be assigned to these 64 auxiliary function groups This number does not include auxiliary functions group 1 to 3 that are pre assigned as standard The actual number of auxiliary functions that are to be assigned must be entered in the NCK specific MD11100 AUXFU_MAXNUM_GROUP_ASSIGN number of the auxiliary functions distributed to the AUXFU groups To do so the password for protection level 2 must be set Then the control must be turned off and on again Now the subsequent machine data with an index n greater than zero are
260. ist the names for a maximum of 255 programs can be declared and assigned The use of the numbers is divided into the protection areas of the programs e 1 to 100 User area end user protection level e 101 to 200 Machine manufacturer machine manufacturer protection level e 201 to 255 SIEMENS SIEMENS protection level Program number DB1700 DBB1000 corresponds to the following IS e Program has been selected DB1700 DBX2000 0 e Program selection error DB1700 DBX2000 1 When a program number gt 0 is written the program selection is started by the PLC As soon as the HMI detects a program number gt 0 it begins with the internal processing of this job and sets the program number DB1700 DBB1000 to 0 PLC waits until the acknowledgement signal from HMI is received DB1700 DBX2000 0 or DB1700 DBX2000 1 and evaluates this immediately The acknowledge signals are available for one PLC cycle once they have been received and are then automatically deleted by the PLC operating system Function Manual 14 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Command DB1700 DBB1001 A command job is transferred from the PLC to the HMI ON Save name of the selected program Select program with saved program name Command DB1700 DBB1001 corresponds to the following IS e Execute command DB1700 DBX2001 0 e Command execution error DB1700 DBX2001 1 When a command gt 0 is written the job is started by the PLC As soon as the HMI dete
261. ive is displayed in the relevant SKP status line on the user interface 9 4 7 Graphic simulation Function In the AUTO operating mode a selected and opened program can be simulated graphically on the screen of the control unit The movements of the programmed axes are recorded as line diagram after an NC start Selection deselection The graphic simulation can be reached for the selected program through the lt PROGRAM gt operating area program Open program and ata _ softkey Here the IS Simulation active DB1900 DBX0000 6 is set and reset again on leaving the lt PROGRAM gt operating area or changing to the menu z E Display Due to numerous operating possibilities a complete workpiece or else only enlarged details of it can be displayed on the screen Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Function Manual 98 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 PLC user program The PLC user program must itself influence the required behavior of the control system in simulation for example e Stop axes spindle by transition into the program test Set IS Activate program test DB3200 DBX0001 7 a Simu A ii e Abort the running program if the menu is exited by setting IS Reset DB3000 DBX0000 7 etc Display machine data A number of display machine data MD283 to MD292 is available for the user specific configuration of the graphic simulation Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED
262. king of the feedrate axis at configured acceleration rate Jerk according to current BRISK SOFT programming e D42010 0 Abrupt starting braking of the feedrate axis on thread cutting e D42010 gt 0 The thread run up deceleration distance is specified To avoid technology alarm 22280 the acceleration limits of the axis must be observed in case of very small run in and run out paths Note DITE acts at the end of the thread as an approximate distance This achieves a smooth change in the axis movement Pitch change F with G34 G35 If you already know the starting and final lead of a thread you can calculate the pitch change F to be programmed according to the following equation K2 K F FL mm rev The identifiers have the following meanings Ke Pitch of axis target point coordinate mm rev Ka Initial pitch progr under and K mm rev Le Thread length in mm 16 1 3 Feedrate for G63 tapping with compensation chuck Feedrate F In the case of G63 it is necessary to program a feedrate F It must be suitable for the selected spindle speed S programmed or set and for the pitch of the drill Feedrate F mm min speed S rev min x pitch mm rev The compensation chuck absorbs possible path differences of the drill axis to a limited extent Function Manual 170 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual 16 1 4 Feedrate for G331 G332 tappi
263. l jog PLC transfers this to the NCK DB3000 DBX0000 0 AUTO mode is set to active by the NCK IS Active mode AUTOMATIC DB3100 DBX0000 0 and is displayed in the HMI screen PLC cancels the IS Feed disable DB3200 DBX0006 0 The HMI then outputs the IS Mode change disable DB1800 DBX0000 4 to the PLC If the PLC recognizes this signal is only applied for one PLC cycle the PLC outputs the IS Mode change disable DB3000 DBX0000 4 to the NCK An NC measuring program has been loaded to the NCK by the HMI This is activated now The automatic direction of approach to the probe and the traverse path including the safety clearance is calculated in this measuring program The HMI outputs the command to start the measuring program to the PLC via the IS Start measuring in JOG DB1800 DBX0000 6 The signals in the V1800 area are only applied for a single PLC cycle The IS Start measuring in JOG is therefore stored intermediately in the PLC The NC measuring program is launched by the PLC by outputting the IS NC START DB3200 DBX0007 1 to the NCK 4 The axis is repositioned by the NC program the probe is approached again and finally retracted The HMI then transmits the command to switch back to the JOG mode DB1800 DBX0000 2 to the PLC The Change mode disable interface signal DB3000 DBX0000 4 is then reset by the PLC The PLC outputs the JOG mode DB3000 DBX0000 2 to the NCK and the NCK returns the IS JOG mode active DB3100 DB
264. l offset for probe N40 ANF GO G90 XO F150 Starting position and meas velocity N50 MEAS 1 G1 X100 Measurement at measuring input 1 in the X axis N60 STOPRE N70 R1O SAC MEA 1 Read switching signal at 1st measuring input N80 IF R1O 0 GOTOF FEHL1 Evaluation of signal N90 R11 SAA MW X Read in measured value in workpiece coordinates N95 MO N100 M2 N110 FEHL1 MSG Probe not switching N120 MO N130 M2 Example of repeat accuracy This program allows the measuring scatter repeat accuracy of the entire measuring system machine probe signal transmission to be calculated In the example ten measurements are taken in the X axis and the measured value recorded in the workpiece coordinates It is possible to determine the so called random dimensional deviations which are not subject to any trend N CHECK ACCURATE MPF NO5 R11 Switching signal NO6 R12 1 Counter N10 R1 to R10 MEAS VAL IN X Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 139 N15 T1 D1 Start conditions preselect tool offset for probe N20 ANF GO X0 F150 Prepositioning in the measured axis N25 MEAS 1 G1 X100 Measurement at 1st measuring input with rising switching edge in the X axis N30 STOPRE Stop decoding for subsequent evaluation of the result automatically executed when reading MEA N35 R11 SAC MEA 1 Read switching signal at lst measuring input N37 IF R11 0 GOTOF FEHL1 Check switching signal N40 R R12 SAA MW
265. les be set as initial parameter values e g e MD32520 MA_FRICT_COMP_CONST_MAX lt axis gt 10 mm min e MD32540 FRICT_COMP_TIME lt axis gt 0 008 ms The circularity test performed with these parameter values provides an initial assessment of the friction compensation Compensation value too small Too small a compensation value MD32520 in the circularity test is indicated by insufficient compensation of the contour deviations at the quadrant transitions Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 117 Counter 2 Counter 1 Figure 10 6 Compensation value set too small Compensation value too large Too large a compensation value MD32520 in the circularity test is indicated by overcompensation of the contour deviations at the quadrant transitions Counter 2 Counter 1 Figure 10 7 Compensation value set too large Time constant too small Too small a time constant MD32540 in the circularity test is indicated by short time compensation of the contour deviations at the quadrant transitions which immediately increase thereafter Function Manual 118 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Counter 2 Counter 1 Figure 10 8 Compensation time constant too small Time constant too large Too large a time constant MD32540 in the circularity test compensates the contour deviations at the quadrant transitions Requirement The optimum compensation value has already been determined However with too large a
266. line help for the System area Function Manual 184 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 gt 10 Choose a certain manual and press this hardkey to view the help content list SIEHEHS manual El0nline Help _ HExtension Manual exth exti ext extd ext5 ext ext7 ext ext HExt Z HTurning Part 1 Operation HOnline help for turning cycles HHanual Machine Plus Turning HOnline help for the System area Choose a certain help topic and then press one of these two keys to view it Online Help or Turning on reference point approach Show When turning on off the CHC and the machine also observe the machine tool manufacturer s documentation since turning on and reference point approach are machine dependent functions Operating sequence 1 Switch on the power supply for the CHC system and the machine After the control system has booted you are in the Ref Point window of the Machine operating WE ok eititien The oe SIEMENS Xo 8 200 TO ce m d dab ma F atau boi 7 0 H HAH igi pp ao Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 185 Go to 11 topic gt Show 12 If you have created a hyperlink in the online help text press this softkey and then press these two softkeys in succession to go to the linked target AS 22 46 11 Ref Point 2011 06 12 Online Help Chapter 1 How to create an OEM Online Help You can create online help files by f How to place the help files 1 Save the he
267. locity Note NC block compressor The NC block compressor COMPON COMPCURV or COMPCAD cannot be employed while compressing spline blocks since with this only linear blocks can be compressed Availability System Availability Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 35 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T M Option Activation The Combine short spline blocks function can be activated for the following spline types BSPLINE BSPLINE ORICURVE cCSPLINE The activation is done using machine data MD20488 MC_SPLINE_MODE bit lt n gt lt value gt setting for spline interpolation Bit lt value gt Meaning Combine short spline blocks function 0 For BSPLINE not active For BSPLINE active pt jt For BSPLINE ORICURVE not active For BSPLINE ORICURVE active For CSPLINE not active For CSPLINE active Supplementary conditions e Spline blocks can only be combined if no other functions are programmed except traversing motions and feedrate With for example auxiliary functions that are output on the PLC the spline blocks cannot be combined e The maximum number of blocks that can be combined into a program section in succession depends on the size of the memory available for blocks in the block preparation MD28070 MC_MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP number of blocks for block preparation Example In order to attain a higher path velocity when executing the following program the Combine short spline blo
268. locity reduction according to overload factor function limits the rate of velocity change the Jerk limitation on path function described here limits the acceleration changes jerks When sections of the contour consisting of blocks e g circle straight line transitions are machined step changes in the acceleration rate occur at the block transition in continuous path mode Reducing jerk The severity of such jerks can be reduced by decreasing the path velocity at transitions between blocks containing different degrees of curvature A smoother transition is thus achieved between the contour sections Jerk limit The user specifies the maximum jerk which may occur on a path axis during a block transition with MD32432 PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM maximum axis specific jerk of a path axis at the block transition Activating Jerk limiting at block transitions becomes active if continuous path mode is programmed with G64 and SOFT acceleration characteristics MD32432 PATH_TRANS_JERK_LIM must contain a positive value 4 4 4 Machine axis specific jerk limiting Function The axis specific machine data MD32431 MAX_AX_JERK can be used to set individual changes in acceleration for each machine axis like those that can already be set for acceleration limits in machine data MD32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL MD32431 MAX_AX_JERK acts on the axes interpolated by the path if SOFT smooth acceleration curve is active within a block A basic distinction is made be
269. lowing channel specific machine data can be used to control counter activation counter reset timing and the counting algorithm e MD27880 PART_COUNTER activation of workpiece counters e MD27882 PART_COUNTER_MCODE workpiece counting with user defined M command Counter e Number of workpieces required workpiece target AC_REQUIRED_PARTS In this counter you can define the number of workpieces at which the actual workpiece counter AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is reset to zero MD27880 PART_COUNTER Bit 0 can be used to generate the display alarm 21800 Required number of workpieces reached and to output the IS Required number of workpieces reached DB3300 DBX40001 1 e Total number of workpieces produced total actual AC_TOTAL_PARTS The counter specifies the total number of all workpieces produced since the start time e Number of actual workpieces current actual AC_ACTUAL_PARTS This counter registers the number of all workpieces produced since the starting time The counter is automatically reset to zero on condition that AC_REQUIRED_PARTS is not equal to 0 when the required number of workpieces AC_REQUIRED_PARTS has been reached e Number of workpieces specified by the user AC_SPECIAL_PARTS This counter allows users to make a workpiece counting in accordance with their own definition Alarm output can be defined for the case of identity with AC_REQUIRED_PARTS workpiece target Users must reset the counter themselves
270. lp files into a USB sti 2 Insert the USB stick into the USB 3 In the lt SYSTEM gt operating area pr USB and copy the help files via softkey Copy 4 Press softkey 888D data and ente online help via the INPUT key 5 Paste the help files via softkey gt gt go to Chapter 2 lt lt Exit the online help Exi i ont Exit the online help Fo TOC Fa Return to the online help main menu Uploading a machine manufacturer s manual using a USB stick To upload a machine manufacturer s manual using a USB stick proceed as follows 1 SYSTEM iR A SHIFT ALARM 186 Create your own file s for a machine manufacturer s manual and save the file s in the USB stick The file format must be oemmanual pdf Because the machine manufacturer s online help supports multiple languages you need to create folders for different languages You can create folders of for example the following structure in the USB stick First level 3 Dichs DIR Beng DIR Second level Comilling DIR Di turning DIR Third level manual DIR For details on how to name a first level folder see Section Multi language support for the machine manufacturer s HMI data Page 179 Copy the two first level folders to the OEM manual folder For how to find this folder see the subsequent steps Insert the USB stick into the USB interface at the front of the PPU Select the desired operating area Func
271. mbobox The field displays the corresponding identifiers instead of numerical values If the field type combobox is selected then the expressions to be displayed must also be assigned to the field The lt ITEM gt TAG should be used for this purpose The combo box saves the index of the currently selected text in the variable belonging to the control see the attribute refvar progressbar A progress bar with a value range of 0 to 100 appears The valley value and peak value properties can be used to adapt the value range to the data to be displayed Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 TAE Menn OOOO CONTROL continued e fieldtype listbox The field type generates an empty list box control Using the tag lt ITEM gt a list box element can be inserted in the list box The ITEM attribute value allows this element to be assigned a unique value For example this can be used to identify the element Parameters width and height specify the width and height of the list box After the control has been created additional list box elements can be inserted using the functions Addltem Insertltem or Loadltem graphicbox The field type generates a 2d broken line graphic control Using the tag lt ITEM gt a graphic element can be inserted into the control Parameters width and height specify the width and height of the box Note This control is not linked into the clipping This means that other elements can cover this
272. mpensation overview Characteristics The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system is capable of calculating the tool compensation data for different tool types drill milling cutter turning tool e Length compensation e Radius compensation e Storage of the tool compensation data in the tool offset memory Tool identification with T numbers from 0 to 32000 Definition of a tool with a maximum of nine cutting edges offset blocks through D number Cutting edge is described by tool parameters Tool type Geometry Length radius Wear Length radius Cutting edge position for turning tools e Tool change selectable Immediately with T command or through M6 e Tool radius compensation Compensation active for all interpolation types linear and circular Compensation at outer corners selectable transition circle G450 or equidistant intersection G451 Automatic detection of outer inner corners Detailed description References SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual 17 2 Tool Select a tool A tool is selected in the program with the T function Whether the new tool is immediately loaded with the T function or with M6 depends on the setting in MD22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE new tool offset with the M function Value range of T The T function can assume integer values from TO no tool to T32000 tool with the number 32000 Up to 64 tools can be stored in the control system simultaneously
273. mum axis acceleration is defined with the axis specific MD32300 MAX_AX_ACCEL The acceleration can also be set via a preset characteristic curve in JOG mode The possible settings are described in Chapter Acceleration Page 39 PLC interface A separate PLC interface DB3200 DBB1000 ff or DB3300 DBB1000 ff exists for geometry axes axes in WCS that contains the same signals as the axis specific PLC interface When the spindle is traversed manually the PLC interface signals between the NCK and PLC have the same effect as for machine axes Interface signals Position reached with fine or coarse exact stop are only set if the spindle is in position control In the case of interface signals that are only spindle specific while the spindle is traversing in JOG the following should be noted e The following PLC interface signals to the spindle have no effect IS Invert M3 M4 DB380x DBX2001 6 S Set direction of rotation ccw or Set direction of rotation cw DB380x DBX2002 7 or 6 IS Oscillation speed DB380x DBX2001 5 e The following PLC interface signals from the spindle are not set S Actual speed cw DB390x DBX2001 7 1S Spindle in setpoint range DB390x DBX2001 5 Note A reset causes the manual traverse motion axis spindle to be terminated with brake ramp Limitations The following limitations are active for manual travel e Software limit switches 1 or 2 axis must be referenced e Hardware limi
274. n the direction of traversing is inverted if necessary to allow traversing in the programmed direction Automatic gear stage selection for the spindle Select gear stage 1 to 5 for the spindle Position control on Position control off Position control on Programmable maximum spindle speed for G96 SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual 162 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 15 6 Spindle monitoring 15 6 1 Spindle monitoring Speed ranges The spindle monitoring functions and the currently active functions G94 G95 G96 G33 G331 G332 etc define the admissible speed ranges of the spindle Speed Maximum encoder limit frequency 4 Maximum spindle speed Maximum spindle speed for current gear stage Programmable spindle speed limit G26 Programmable spindle speed limit LIMS Programmable spindle speed limit G25 _ _ Minimum spindle speed for current gear stage _ _ _ Spindle is stationary oO Oo o 28 8 Dn HD v e pam Ee Oo OO gt Oo Q N 5 O O OOO c c21 ENET Oo O 00 O Ke Ss C S o O C S F S 5c C oazo oc OS 0o SoS we CHE FT P59 0po00 gg ZT ogo ONDE G DOD DODGE Q c C cC C O o gt 2oetaaraane on oos CaS nc oO xX DOD ooo D LLADD DVO Y T A SERS 9 NSN HENT Figure 15 9 Ranges of spindle monitoring functions speeds 15 6 2 Axis spindle stationary
275. n Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 121 Note If satisfactory results cannot be obtained for very small path velocities the computational resolution may have to be increased e MD10200 MA_INT_INCR_PER_MM computational resolution for linear positions e MD10210 MA_INT_INCR_PER_DEG computational resolution for angular positions 10 5 5 Compensation value for short traversing blocks The compensation value determined for the quadrant error compensation can lead to overcompensation in short traversing blocks The overcompensation can be avoided by reducing the compensation value specifically for traversing blocks that are traversed within one interpolation cycle However the size of the reduction is a value that must be determined empirically as it depends to a large extent for every axis on the particular situation at the machine A percentage of the compensation value determined in the circularity test is set via the machine data MD32580 MA_FRICT_COMP_INC_FACTOR compensation value for short traversing blocks 10 6 Data table 10 6 1 Machine data Number _ identifier Name _ O O O OOOO O O O General 10200 INT_INCR_PER_MM Computational resolution for linear positions 10210 INT_INCR_PER_DEG Computational resolution for angular positions 18342 MM_CEC_MAX_ POINTS t Maximum number of interpolation points of sag compensation Axis specific 32450 Backlash 32490 Type of friction compensation 32500 Friction compensation active
276. n modal feedrate for chamfer rounding Value gt 0 Feedrate in mm min G94 or mm rev G95 FRCM Modal feedrate for chamfer rounding Value gt 0 Feedrate in mm min G94 or mm rev G95 Modal feedrate for chamfer rounding ON Value 0 Modal feedrate for chamfer rounding OFF Feedrate F applies to the chamfer rounding Notes e F FRC FROM are not active when a chamfer is traversed with GO If the feedrate F is active for chamfer rounding it is by default the value from the block which leads away from the corner Other settings can be configured via machine data MD20201 CHFRND_MODE_MASK e A maximum of three blocks without corresponding information may be put between two blocks containing traversing information for chamfer rounding axes of the plane In the case of more blocks without axis information in the plane and existing instructions for inserting chamfer or rounding an alarm is triggered Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 171 16 2 Rapid traverse GO Application The rapid traverse movement GO is used for rapid positioning of the tool but not for direct workpiece machining All axes can be traversed simultaneously This results in a straight path For each axis the maximum speed rapid traverse is defined in machine data MD32000 MAX_AX_VELO If only one axis traverses it uses its rapid traverse If for example two axes are traversed simultaneously the path velocity resulting velocity is selected to ac
277. n with G1 G2 G3 CIP and CT are replaced by the feed value stored in SD42100 DRY_RUN_FEED The dry run feedrate also replaces the programmed revolutional feedrate in program blocks with G95 However if the programmed feedrate is larger than the dry run feedrate then the larger value is used NOTICE Damage to the workpiece or machine tool Workpieces may not be machined when dry run feedrate is active because the altered feedrates might cause the permissible tool cutting rates to be exceeded and the workpiece or machine tool could be damaged Selection activation M Prog Operation with dry run feedrate is selected in the lt MACHINE gt operating area LM gt E cone softkey AUTO mode IS Dry run feedrate DB1700 DBX0000 7 is set on selection of the function In addition the required dry run SD Sett feedrate must be entered in the menu data This does not activate the function This function is activated via the IS Activate dry run feedrate DB3200 DBX0000 4 and is evaluated at NC start The dry run feedrate must be entered before program start in SD42100 DRY_RUN_FEED Display The checkback signal that dry run feedrate is active is displayed in the relevant DRY status line on the user interface Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 95 9 4 5 Block search Processing of certain program sections Functionality To set the program run to a certain block target block of a part program the block search fun
278. namic response settings The control performs a plausibility check on the axis definition Components The gantry axes function can be subdivided into the following functional units 1 Setpoint generation of synchronized axis 2 Monitoring of actual value difference 3 Referencing and synchronizing the leading axis and synchronized axis Setpoint generation of synchronized axis From the point of view of the operator all coupled gantry axes are traversed as if only one axis i e the leading axis were programmed in the NC Analogously only the leading axis is programmed in the part program The commands and traverse requests from the operator the PLC interface or via the part program therefore apply in equal measure to all axes in the gantry grouping When the gantry axes function is active the synchronized axis setpoint is generated directly from the setpoint of the leading axis in all operating modes Note The dynamic control response settings for the leading and synchronized axes must be identical Monitoring the actual value difference The position actual values of the leading and synchronized axes are continuously compared with one another in the interpolation clock cycle and monitored to check that they are still within the permissible tolerance range Machine data can be set to specify the following limit values for alarm output and termination of the traversing motion for specific axes Gantry warning limit The W
279. nctions present in the block to the PLC if they are to be output after the end of motion 4 4 Continuous path mode 4 4 1 General In continuous path mode the path velocity is not decelerated for the block change in order to permit the fulfillment of an exact stop criterion The objective of this mode is to avoid rapid deceleration of the path axes at the block change point so that the axis velocity remains as constant as possible when the program moves to the next block To achieve this objective the LookAhead function is also activated when continuous path mode G64 is selected Continuous path mode causes e Rounding of the contour e Shorter machining times through elimination of braking and acceleration processes that are required to comply with the exact stop criterion e Improved cutting conditions as the velocity is more uniform The continuous path mode is suitable if a contour is to be traversed as quickly as possible Continuous path mode is suitable if e A contour is to be traversed precisely e An absolutely constant velocity is required Implicit exact stop In some cases an exact stop needs to be generated in continuous path mode to allow the execution of subsequent actions In such situations the path velocity is reduced to zero e f auxiliary functions are output before the traverse motion the previous block is only terminated when the selected exact stop criterion is fulfilled Function Manual 6FC5397 7E
280. nd CYCPE_MA SPF in the folder CMA DIR The two manufacturer cycles are corresponding jump markers prepared therefore CYCPE1MA is jumped to at the beginning of PROG_EVENT SPF and CYCPE_MA is jumped to at the end Chronological sequences For part program start and part program end Time sequence of VDI signals DB3300 DBB0003 Program status and Channel status when processing a part program with an event driven program call for part program start and part program end Part Program Part Program Program program event End program event active event end start end Program status J ap J J J Running DB3300 DBX0003 0 T pooo Loo Stopped DB3300 DBX0003 2 pooo Loo To Aborted DB3300 DBX0003 4 E j Channel status Active DB3300 DBX0003 5 Interrupted DB3300 DBX0003 6 Reset DB3300 DBX0003 7 Figure 9 1 Time sequence of the interface signals for program status and channel status 1 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 87 With operator panel reset Time sequence of VDI signals DB3300 DBB0003 Program status and Channel status when processing with an event driven program call Operator panel Program event active Program event end front reset Program status J J J Running DB3300 DBX0003 0 Stopped DB3300 DBX0003 2 J Aborted 3 4 DB3300 DBX0003 4 Channel status Active DB3300 DBX0003 5 Interrupted DB3300 DBX0003 6 J Reset DB3300 DBX00
281. nd string lt function gt Example lt let name index gt 0 lt let gt lt let name strl type string gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt function name Sstring find return index gt strl Tprown lt ftuncrion gt Result Index 2 String reversefind The function searches the transferred string for the last match with the substring If the substring is found the function provides the index to the first character starting with zero or failing this 1 Parameter string string variable find string string to be found Syntax lt function name Sstring reversefind return lt int Vale gt strl find string lt functaon gt Example lt let name index gt 0 lt let gt lt let name str1 type string gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt function name string reversefind return index gt Strly TI brown lt funcrion gt Result Index 21 String trimleft The function trims the starting characters from a string Parameter str1 string variable Syntax lt function name string trimleft gt strl lt function gt Example lt let name strl type string gt SESE trim left lt let gt lt function name string trimleft gt Strl lt function gt Result str1 test trim left Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 241 Function name Meaning String trimright The function trims the closing characters from a string Paramete
282. nel axes for transformation 1 MD24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 0 1 MD24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 1 3 MD24120 TRAFO_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB_1 2 2 Special TRANSMIT settings e Offset of rotary axis 126 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 MD24900 TRANSMIT _ROT_AX_OFFSET_1 0 Sign of rotary axis MD24910 TRANSMIT _ROT_SIGN_IS_PLUS_1 1 Vector of base tool MD24920 TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 0 0 MD24920 TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 1 0 MD24920 TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 2 0 Setting data for the special treatment of the tool offset only when required Change of tool length component for change of plane D42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST 18 Assignment of the tool length offset independent of tool type SD42950 TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE 2 Settings for second spindle milling spindle of the lathe MD30300 IS_ROT_AX AX4 1 MD30310 ROT_IS_ MODULO AX4 1 MD30320 DISPLAY_IS_ MODULO AX4 1 MD35000 SPIND_ASSIGN_TO_MACHAX AX4 2 SD43300 ASSIGN_FEED_PER_REV_SOURCEJ AX4 0 Note A special handling of milling tools on lathes with respect to length compensation is possible Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 127 11 3 TRACYL 11 3 1 Overview Standard lathe without Y machine axis Legend XM _ Infeed axis perpendicular to rotary axis ZM Axis is parallel to rotary axis CM Rotary axis ASM Work spindle Figure 11 4 Machining grooves on a cylinder surface with X C Z kinematics Required machine kinematics The two linear
283. nfiguration Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 169 If the available path for run in or run out is limited it may be necessary to reduce the spindle speed so that this path is sufficient In this case the run in and run out paths can be specified separately in the program to achieve favorable cutting values and short machining times or to simplify the handling of this issue If no values are specified the values from the setting data SD apply The specifications in the program are written in D42010 THREAD_RAMP_DISP 0 1 If this path is not sufficient for traversing at the configured axis acceleration the axis is overloaded in terms of acceleration Alarm 22280 Programmed run in path too short is then issued for the thread run in The alarm is purely for information and has no effect on part program execution The run out path acts as an approximate distance at the end of the thread This achieves a smooth change in the axis movement when retracting Programming DITS Run in path of the thread DITE Run out path of the thread Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual D42010 Only paths and not positions are programmed with DITS and DITE With the part program instructions the setting data SD42010 THREAD_RAMP_DISP 0 1 defines the following acceleration response of the axis during thread cutting O run in 1 run out e D42010 lt 0 to 1 Starting bra
284. ng Manual Installation personnel commissioning engineers and service and maintenance personnel Function Manual Mechanical and electrical designers technical professionals Parameter Manual Mechanical and electrical designers technical professionals PLC Subroutines Manual Mechanical and electrical designers technical professionals and commissioning engineers My Documentation Manager MDM Under the following link you will find information to individually compile your documentation based on the Siemens content ww siemens com mdm Standard scope This manual only describes the functionality of the standard version Extensions or changes made by the machine tool manufacturer are documented by the machine tool manufacturer Technical support Hotline Service and Support e Global support hotline e Chinese Web site 49 0 911 895 7222 ttp www siemens com cn 808D e Support hotline in China e Global Web site 86 4008104288 china ttp support automation siemens com EC Declaration of Conformity he Declaration of Conformi he EMC Directive can be found on the Internet at http support automation siemens com Here enter the number 15257461 as the search term or contact your local Siemens office Function Manual 2 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Table of contents FG Saas ta oe E aw ce ote ge A OE E A nnn en ovis eaters natant ieee erent meas te HUVECS TOI oso EE E A T E E E E T E E A nec ese T E E A E O E
285. ng without compensation chuck Axis velocity With respect to G331 G332 tapping the axis velocity for the thread length results from the effective spindle speed S and the programmed pitch However the maximum axis velocity defined in MD32000 MAX_AX_VELO cannot be exceeded The feedrate F is not relevant It is however kept in the memory Interface signal If the G331 G332 function is active the IS Tapping without compensation chuck active DB390x DBX2002 3 is set for the spindle Note The tapping may only be carried out without a compensation chuck if an exact dynamic adjustment of the spindle and the relevant axis has been performed With G331 G332 the parameter set n 0 5 of the axis becomes effective automatically This parameter set also applies to the current gear stage of the spindle M40 M41 to M45 see also Chapter Spindle Page 152 In general the axis is adjusted to the slower spindle Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual 16 1 5 Feedrate for chamfer rounding FRC FRCM Chamfer rounding You can insert the chamfer CHF or CHR or rounding RND elements into a contour corner If you wish to round several contour corners sequentially by the same method use Modal rounding RNDM You can program the feedrate for the chamfer rounding with FRC non modal or FRCM modal If FRC FRCM is not programmed the normal feedrate F is applied Programming FRC No
286. nge General A changeover to another operating mode is requested and activated via the interface Note The mode is not changed internally until the IS Channel status active DB3300 DBX0003 5 is no longer present In the Channel status Reset IS DB3300 DBX0003 7 e g after pressing the Reset key one can switch from any operating mode into another In the Channel status interrupted IS DB3300 DBX0003 6 only a conditional changeover is possible see following table If one leaves AUTO to change to JOG one must return to AUTO again or press Reset Thus a change AUTO JOG MDA is made impossible The same applies for MDA from which one may change neither directly nor indirectly to AUTO provided the Reset state is present The table shows the possible operating mode changes depending on the current operating mode and the channel state Channel in reset or Channel interrupted Table 9 1 Operating mode change depending on channel state From AUTO JOG AUTO previously aide Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Possible mode changes are shown by an X Error on operating mode changeover A corresponding error message is output if a mode change request is rejected by the system This error message can be cleared without changing the channel status Mode change disable Changeover between operating modes can be inhibited by means of IS Mode group changeover disable DB3000 DBX000 4 This suppresses the mode
287. nment of Interrupt 1 to the CMA_DIR PLCASUP1_SPF program The interrupt has Priority 1 DB1200 DBB4001 2 Assignment of Interrupt 2 to the CMA_DIR PLCASUP2_SPF program The interrupt has Priority 2 The following must be taken into account during the initialization e The PI service ASUP requires executing only once after a restart and is then retained e An initialization may only be performed when the channel is not active e fa Ramp up program event has been configured the initialization may only be started after the end of the program event Relevant interface signals ps o e ooo ooo s o DB1200 DBX4000 0 Stat n S O DB1200 DBX4000 1 Wrtevariabe 0 S O DB1200 DBx4000 2 Pisevie Moo DB1200 DBB4001 Result DB1200 DBX5000 0 Request completed on DB1200 DBX5000 1 0 1 2 6 3 Reading variables from the NCK area 1 to 8 values can be read with a read job variable x 0 7 There is a variable specific part of the interface for this e Job DB120x DBB1000 e Result DB120x DBB3000 Job variable specific part NC variable The NC variable is selected in the variable index DB120x DBB1000 see Section NC variable Page 19 Area number column line index DB120x DBB1001 DB120x DBB1005 Various variables are declared as fields For flexible addressing the relevant field index must be specified as a column and or line index e g R parameter no Values The range DB120x DBB1008 11 is not relevant for read
288. numerical control kernel or HMI display unit is performed via various data areas The PLC user program does not have to handle the exchange of data and signals From the user s point of view this takes place automatically General Signals to NC Signals from NC User program Operating modes Signals from NCK Channel Signals from NCK Spindle n 1 Asz o E Spindle Signals from NCK Figure 2 1 PLC NCK interface Cyclic signal exchange The control and status signals of the PLC NCK interface are updated cyclically The signals can be subdivided into the following groups see previous figure e General signals e Operating mode signals e Channel signals e Axis spindle signals Function Manual 10 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 2 2 Signals from PLC to NCK 2 2 1 Access authorization Access authorization Access to programs data and functions is user oriented and controlled via protection levels The SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED provides a concept of access levels for enabling data areas You can view such information from the table below Access level Default password Target group Manufacturer level 2 SUNRISE Machine manufacturers End user level 3 CUSTOMER End users No password This provides a multi level safety concept for controlling access rights Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Commissioning Manual Section Access levels 2 2 2 General signals Delete distance to go DB3200 DBX6 2 IS Del
289. o significance Do not start gantry synchronization No automatic synchronization Figure 6 3 NCK PLC interface DB380x DBB5005 relative to leading axis e For the synchronized axis axis 3 DB380x DBB5005 x no significance Do not start gantry synchronization Figure 6 4 NCK PLC interface DB380x DBB5005 relative to synchronized axis The NCK sets the following IS as a confirmation e For the leading axis axis 1 DB390x DBB5005 Do not start gantry synchronization Leading axis Gantry axis x no significance Figure 6 5 NCK PLC interface DB390x DBB5005 relative to leading axis e For the synchronized axis axis 3 Function Manual 56 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 DB390x DBB5005 Do not start gantry synchronization Synchronized axis Gantry axis x no significance Figure 6 6 NCK PLC interface DB390x DBB5005 relative to synchronized axis 6 7 3 Commencing start up Referencing The following steps must be taken e Select REF operating mode e Start referencing for the leading axis axis 1 e Wait until message 10654 Channel 1 Waiting for synchronization start appears At this point the NCK has prepared the leading axis for synchronization and signals this using the following IS DB390x DBB5005 Synchronization ready to start Leading axis Gantry axis x no significance Figure 6 7 NCK PLC interface DB390x DBB5005 Leading axis ready for synchronization In addition the following
290. o to the Web License Manager http www siemens com automation license Login via Direct access e License number e Dispatch note number In the Web License Manager operate step by step as what the Manager tells you At the end of the process the Web License Manager shows the desired license key The following options are now available e Note down the key e Save it in a PDF file After completing the assignment process press these three softkeys in Succession Then enter the license key displayed on the Web License Manager into the license key dialog of the HMI user interface Enter the licence key to activate the optiont The option is activated after Restartt CF card serial number SPO2H1267H6067168 Order No of the HCU module 6FC5612 16746 60AH Confirm your input for the new license key with this softkey Activate the desired optional function For detailed information about activating the optional functions refer to section Activating the optional functions Page 249 248 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 19 2 Activating the optional functions In this section it s supposed that all optional functions are activated on a turning variant The same activation process applies to a milling variant 19 2 1 Additional axis To activate the additional axis function proceed as follows SYSTEM 4s 1 Select the desired operating area SHIFT
291. ock change occurs here Time s Figure 15 2 Block change following oscillation mode Special features e The acceleration is defined by MD35410 SPIND_OSCILL_ACCEL acceleration during oscillation e Ifthe IS oscillation speed DB380x DBX2002 5 is reset the oscillation stops However the spindle remains in oscillation mode e The IS Gear changed should always be used for terminating gear stage change e The IS Reset DB3000 DBX0000 7 does not terminate oscillation mode e lf an indirect measuring system is used synchronization is lost The spindle is re synchronized the next time the zero mark is crossed Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 155 Reset during gear stage change The spindle cannot be stopped via IS Reset DB3000 DBX0000 7 or IS NC Stop DB3200 DBX0007 3 if the spindle is in oscillation mode for gear stage change and the IS Gear changed DB380x DBX2000 3 is not yet available In this case alarm 10640 Stop not possible during gear change is displayed if reset is selected After changing the gear stages the reset request is performed and the alarm cleared if this is still present at the interface Note Option for aborting Set IS Delete distance to go Spindle Reset DB380x DBX0002 2 15 2 4 Spindle positioning mode When is positioning mode used The spindle positioning mode stops the spindle at the defined position and activates the position control which remains active
292. offer different support options for the practical implementation in conjunction with a SINUMERIK control this process is only generally described in the following referred to a control Note The measurement for determining the leadscrew error should only be carried out during the first commissioning if in the machine data the traversing directions of the axes in relation to the machine coordinate system have been correctly set Carrying out commissioning 1 Specify the number of compensation interpolation points Each axis should be assigned to one compensation table each for the positive and negative traversing directions The number of compensation interpolation points is defined using the following machine data MD18342 MN_MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS lt t gt maximum number of interpolation points for sag compensation with lt t gt Index of compensation table Permissible range 0 lt t lt 7 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 109 Acaution User data loss ALARM 4400 is output when changing MD18342 Reorganization of the buffered memory In order that an automatic memory configuration is possible but keeping all of the data that has been entered up until now no system boot POWER ON must be executed without first performing a series machine startup Example MD18342 0 11 11 interpolation points for the 1st table e g positive traversing direction X axis MD18342 1 11 11 interpolation points for the 2nd
293. ol system or because controller enable is being re issued IS Follow up mode 1 If Controller enable is removed the position setpoint of the relevant axis is continuously corrected to the actual value This state is signaled to the PLC by means of IS Follow up mode active DB390x DBX1 3 If the Controller enable is enabled again and a part program is active a control internal re positioning operation is initiated REPOSA linear approach with all axes to the last programmed position Otherwise the axis movement starts at the new actual position which may have changed IS Follow up mode 0 If Controller enable is removed the old position setpoint is maintained If the axis is pushed out of position a following error between position setpoint and actual value results which is corrected when IS Controller enable is set The axis movement starts from the setpoint position valid before the controller enable was removed IS Followup mode active DB390x DBX1 3 is set to 0 signal during the Hold state Clamping or standstill monitoring is active Position measuring system 1 DB380x DBX1 5 A position measuring system may be connected to the spindle In this case the signal for the spindle has to be set Axes always require this signal In this case a position measuring system must be installed Controller enable DB380x DBX2 1 When the controller enable is activated for the drive the position control loop of the axis
294. ollowed by the format instruction The address is then specified for the variable Example lt LET name buffer type string gt lt LET gt lt OP gt DUETor untormatted value RUS Toi nck Channel Parameter R O T and T S 85051 T formatted value RL T Faot Nek Channel Parameters Ri 1 lt OP gt Function Manual 214 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 TAE meann SSC PASSWORD The tag opens a dialog for entering the password Once the entry has been confirmed the character string is available in the specified reference variable Syntax lt PASSWORD refVar lt variable name gt gt Attribute e refVar Name of the reference variable Example lt PASSWORD refvar plc mw107 gt POWER_OFF A message prompts the operator to switch the machine off The message text is permanently saved in the system PRINT The tag outputs a text in the dialog line or copies the text to the variable specified If the text contains formatting identifiers the variable values are inserted at the appropriate places Syntax lt PRINT name Variable name text text Formatting gt Variable lt PRINT gt lt PRINT text text SFormatting gt Variable lt PRINT gt Attributes e name Name of the variable where the text is to be stored optional e text Text Formatting The character causes the variable specified as the value to be formatted Flags Width decimal places type e Flags Op
295. on Misalignment after starting Immediately after the machine is switched on the leading and synchronized axes may not be ideally positioned in relation to one another e g misalignment of a gantry Generally speaking this misalignment is relatively small so that the gantry axes can still be referenced In special cases e g gantry axes were brought to a standstill because of a disturbance power failure or EMERGENCY OFF before the axes can be traversed the dimensional offset must be checked for permissible tolerance values and a compensatory motion executed if necessary To execute this compensatory motion the gantry grouping must be separated by means of the following machine data MD37140 GANTRY_BREAK_UP break up gantry grouping Gantry synchronization All gantry axes must first be referenced and then synchronized after the control system is switched on During gantry synchronization all gantry axes approach the reference position of the gantry grouping in the decoupled state The reference position of the gantry grouping for referencing the gantry axes corresponds to the reference position of the leading axis MD34100 REFP_SET_POS reference point value destination point for distance coded system Otherwise the reference position is the current actual position of the leading axis These operations for referencing and synchronizing the gantry axes are executed automatically in accordance with a special flowchart Referencing
296. on of the top left corner color Text color color coding Value Text to be displayed Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 oe Menn OOOO IMG The tag is used to display an image in the specified position The BMP and PNG image formats are supported Syntax lt IMG xpos lt X position gt ypos lt Y position gt name lt name gt gt Attributes xpos X position of the top left corner ypos Y position of the top left corner name complete path name transparent Transparent color of the bitmap see Chapter Color coding Optional If the image display is to differ from the original size the dimensions can be defined using the attributes width and height e width Width in pixels e height Height in pixels Examples lt IMG xpos 20 ypos 40 name f appl test bmp gt lt IMG xpos 5 ypos 23 name f appl test bmp height 355 width 550 7 gt BOX The tag draws a rectangle at the specified position colored as indicated Syntax lt BOX xpos lt X position gt ypos lt Y position gt width xX extension gt height lt Y extension gt color lt Color code gt gt Attributes xpos X position of the top left corner ypos Y position of the top left corner width Extension in X direction in pixels height Extension in Y direction in pixels color Color coding for details on color coding see chapter Color coding Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO
297. on of the zero mark where required BERO A BERO inductive proximity switch can be deployed as the encoder for the synchronized pulse instead of the zero mark of the position encoder preferred for rotary axes spindles Here connection is made to the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED via pin6 DI3 of terminal X21 Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Commissioning Manual Function Manual 146 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 IS Active machine function REF DB3100 DBX0001 2 The reference point approach is performed with the REF machine function activated IS active machine function REF The REF machine function can be selected in JOG modes IS REF machine function DB3000 DBX0001 2 Axis specific referencing Axis specific referencing is started separately for each machine axis with the plus minus traversing keys interface signal DB380x DBX0004 7 6 All axes can be referenced at the same time If the machine axes are to be referenced in a particular sequence the following options are available e The operator must observe the correct sequence when starting e The PLC user program checks the sequence on start up or defines the sequence itself e The order is defined in MD34110 REFP_CYCLE_NR see channel specific referencing Channel specific referencing Channel specific referencing is started with the activate referencing interface signal DB3200 DBX0001 0 The control acknowledges a successful start with IS Referencing active
298. onally for measuring tool and workpiece dimensions Bidirectional probe This probe type is handled in the same way as a mono probe in milling and machining centers Mono directional probe This probe type can be used with only a few restrictions to take workpiece measurements on milling and machining centers The spindle must be capable of being positioned with the SPOS NC function if the measurement is to be carried out in different axis directions axes The probe must therefore be aligned according to the measuring task Switching performance The signal level of the connected probe deflected non deflected condition must be communicated to the control via the MD13200 MEAS_PROBE_LOW_ACTIVE O Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 137 12 2 2 Probe connection The probe for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED is connected to pin4 DI1 and pind DI2 of X21 The actually used pin is determined by the relevant macro command Thus all measuring inputs of the axis drive modules are operated whose axes are involved in measuring For the probe use an external voltage 24 V whose reference potential should be connected to X21 pin 10 To ensure optimum interference immunity when connecting probes lines must be used Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Commissioning Manual 12 3 Channel specific measuring 12 3 1 Measuring mode Measuring commands MEAS and MEAW The measuring operation is activated from the part program A trigger e
299. or gearbox measuring gearbox encoder and machine data prevents the maximum speed of the actual spindle position encoder from being exceeded Maximum encoder limit frequency exceeded If the spindle reaches a speed in the open loop control mode a high S value has been programmed which is higher than the max encoder limit frequency the max speed of the encoder may not be exceeded the synchronization is lost However the spindle continues to rotate If one of the thread cutting G33 revolutional feedrate G95 constant cutting rate G96 G97 functions is programmed the spindle speed is reduced automatically so far until the active measuring system works reliably again In the positioning mode spindle mode and with position controlled threads G331 G332 the max encoder limit frequency is not exceeded Function Manual 164 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 If the encoder limit frequency is exceeded the IS Referenced synchronized DB390x DBX0000 4 is reset for the measurement system and IS Encoder limit frequency 1 exceeded DB390x DBX0000 2 is enabled If the maximum encoder limit frequency has been exceeded and the speed subsequently falls below the encoder frequency in MD36302 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW value of MD36300 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT the spindle is automatically synchronized with the next zero mark or the next BERO signal 15 6 7 Target point monitoring Function During positioning the spindle is in positioning mode
300. or the Stop state IS of all gantry axes 0 is activated for all gantry axes depending on interface signal DB380x DBX0001 4 follow up mode b Axial interface signals from axis to PLC NCK gt PLC Each of the axial axis to PLC interface signals for the synchronized axis and the leading axis is always set on an axis specific basis and output to the PLC Exception When the leading axis is being traversed the interface signals are also set for the synchronized axis DB390x DBX0004 6 7 traverse command minus plus 6 6 Miscellaneous points regarding gantry axes Manual travel It is not possible to traverse a synchronized axis directly by hand in JOG mode Traverse commands entered via the traversing keys of the synchronized axis are ignored internally in the control Rotation of the handwheel for the synchronized axis has no effect either Handwheel override An overriding motion by means of the handwheel can only be applied to the leading axis in coupled axis mode In this case the synchronized axes traverse in synchronism with the leading axis Programming in part program Only the leading axis of a gantry axis grouping may be programmed in the part program An alarm is generated while programming a synchronized axis even when a gantry axis grouping is separated PRESET The PRESET function can only be applied to the leading axis All axes in the gantry grouping are reevaluated internally in the control when PRESET is activ
301. or_bk lt background color coding gt color_fg lt font color coding gt font lt Font number gt password lt true gt entered character is displayed with multiline lt true gt permits multi line inputs in an edit control disable lt true false gt locks permits the input in an edit control Example lt CONTROL name progressl xpos 10 ypos 10 width 100 fieldtype progressbar hotlink true refvar nck Channel GeometricAxis actProgPos 1 gt lt PROPERTY min 0 gt lt PROPERTY max 1000 gt lt CONTROL gt lt CONTROL name editl xpos 10 ypos 10 gt lt PROPERTY min TROI Spe lt PROPERTY max 40 gt lt PROPERTY default 25 gt lt CONTROL gt 231 sree Menn OOOO O SOFTKEY 232 The tag defines the properties and responses of a softkey Attributes e position Number of the softkey 1 8 horizontal softkeys 9 16 vertical softkeys The following additional actions can be defined within the softkey block caption navigation update_controls function Syntax lt softkey position lt 1 gt gt lt softkey gt The tag is used to display a text in the specified position If an alarm number is used the dialog box displays the text which is saved for the number Syntax lt TEXT xpos lt x position ypos lt Y position gt S gt Text lt TEXT gt Attributes xpos X position of the top left corner ypos Y positi
302. order 1st 2nd and 3rd geometry axis but not the axis identifier determines the assignment between an offset and an axis Length compensation for tool type SD42950 TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE Value of the setting data equal to 0 The behavior corresponds to the standard definition The lengths 1 to 3 in geometry and wear are assigned to the actual tool type milling cutter drill or turning tool Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Value of the setting data not equal to 0 The assignment of the tool lengths is always independent of the actual tool type Value 1 Length assignment always as for milling tools Value 2 Length assignment always as for turning tools Notes e The influence of these two setting data only refers to tool lengths The tool radius is not affected e If SD42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST is set not equal to 0 and the value in SD42950 TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE is 1 or 2 the related table for the assigned tool type milling or turning tool applies in SD42940 Example D42940 TOOL_LENGTH_CONST 18 SD42950 TOOL_LENGTH_TYPE 2 Explanation The active tool with the active D number always behaves as a turning tool in the length compensation gt SD42950 2 The length assignment is performed in all planes G17 to G19 as for G18 gt SD42940 18 Length 1 gt X axis Length 2 gt Z axis if Y axis exists Length 3 gt Y axis The tool radius acts according to the actual tool type and the active
303. osed in the IF tag The condition that is executed in the CONDITION tag follows the IF tag The further processing of the instructions depends upon the result of the operation If the function result is true the THEN branch is executed and the ELSE branch is skipped If the result of the function is false the parser executes the ELSE branch Syntax lt IF gt lt CONDITION gt Condition 7 lt CONDITION gt lt THEN gt Instruction for the case Condition fulfilled lt THEN gt lt ELSE gt Instruction for the case Condition not fulfilled lt ELSE gt lt q LES Example lt IF gt lt CONDITION gt plc mb170 7 lt CONDITION gt lt THEN gt lt OP gt plc mb170 7 lt OP gt lt THEN gt lt E LSE lt OP gt ploe vymol 0 2 lt 0P gt lt ELSE gt lt IF gt Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 211 Tag identifier Meaning INCLUDE The instruction includes an XML description see also DYNAMIC_INCLUDE in this table Attribute e sic Contains the path name Syntax lt INCLUDE src lt Path name gt gt LET The instruction creates a local variable under the specified name Fields Using the attribute dim dimension single or two dimensional fields can be created The field index is used to address the individual field elements For a two dimensional field initially the line index is specified and then the column index e Single dimensional field Indices 0
304. own below Gantry BASIC 6FCS8660 80ASS1 6786 D NCK reset 4 Press this softkey and a warm restart is triggered on the control system After the restart is po finished the corresponding software function is active Function Manual 254 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 19 3 Internet links Overview of Internet links used No Topic Adress Web License Manager ttp www siemens com automation license ee Siemens A amp D Mall Customer login ttp mall automation siemens com re 3 Downloadsever i is sY ttp software download automation siemens com ae 19 4 Important licensing terms The terms below are important and helpful for you to understand the license management of SINUMERIK software products Software product Software product is generally used to describe a product that is installed on a piece of hardware to process data Within the license management of SINUMERIK software products a corresponding license is required to use each software product Hardware In the context of the license management of SINUMERIK software products hardware refers to the component of a SINUMERIK control system to which licenses are assigned on the basis of its unique identifier License information is also saved to the retentive memory on this component e SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED CompactFlash Card system License A license gives the user a legal right to use the software product Evidence of this right is provided by the
305. path to be traversed by the axis is defined by so called increments also called incremental dimensions The required increment must be set by the machine user before the axis is traversed The setting is made on the machine control panel for example After the corresponding logic operation the IS Machine function INC1 to INCvar associated with the required increment must be set by the PLC user program after it has been correctly linked The PLC defines via the INC inputs in mode group range active interface signal DB2600 DBX0001 0 the signal range within which INC signals are delivered to the NCK Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 63 DB2600 DBX0001 0 1 gt in the operating mode range DB3000 DBBO0002 valid for all axes DB2600 DBX0001 0 0O0 gt in the geometry axis axis range DB3200 DBB1001 DB3200 DBB1005 DB3200 DBB1009 DB380x DBB0005 The active machine function IS INC is signaled by the NCK to the PLC e For geometry axes DB3300 DBX1001 0 DB3300 DBX1005 0 DB3300 DBX1009 0 to 5 e For machine axes spindle DB390x DBX0005 0 to 5 Settable increments The operator can set different increment sizes e Fixed increments whose increment sizes are common to all axes INC1 INC10 INC100 INC1000 only via IS INC10000 e A variable increment INCvar The increment setting for the variable increment can also be made for all axes using general SD41010 JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE size of the variable increment for IN
306. peed falls below the speed defined by the encoder frequency in MD36302 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW value of MD36300 Sequence continues with Phase 2 Phase 2 When the SPOS command takes effect the spindle starts to decelerate with the acceleration stored in MD35200 GEAR_STEP_SPEEDCTRL_ACCEL until it reaches the position control activation speed Function Manual 156 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Phase 3 When the position control activation speed stored in MD35300 SPIND_ POSCTRL_VELO is reached e The position control is activated e The distance to go to target position is calculated easier from Phase 1a e The acceleration is switched to MD35210 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL acceleration in position control mode always active below the position control activation speed Phase 4 The spindle brakes from the calculated braking point with MD35210 GEAR_STEP_POSCTRL_ACCEL to the target position Phase 5 The position control remains active and stops the spindle in the programmed position The IS Position reached with exact stop fine DB390x DBX0000 7 and coarse DB390x DBX0000 6 are set if the distance between the spindle actual position and the programmed position spindle setpoint position is less than the settings for the exact stop fine and coarse limits respectively defined in MD36010 STOP_LIMIT_FINE and MD36000 STOP_LIMIT_COARSE Positioning from standstill spindle not synchronized The spindle is not synchronized after the cont
307. perator panel reset event Bit 3 1 is set after Ramp up event Bit 4 1 is set after First start after search run event The following constraint applies for Bit 0 1 program event after part program start If the program event ends with the part program command RET then RET always leads to an executable block analogous to M17 There is no new behavior for Bit 0 0 i e RET is interpreted in the interpreter and does not lead to an executable block No sequences for start end of part program are passed e fa user ASUP is started from the reset status the described sequences for the event for start end of part program are not passed e Settable Prog Event properties Machine data MD20109 PROG_EVENT_MASK_PROPERTIES can be used to define further properties of event driven program calls for specific channels Bit0 0 An ASUP started from the RESET channel state is followed by an event driven program call as in earlier versions Bit0 1 An ASUP started from the RESET channel state is not followed by an event driven program call With the Part program start N_CMA_DIR CYCPE1MA SPF and _N_CMA_DIR CYCPE_MA SPF are executed as subroutines CYCPE1MA SPF and CYCPE_MA SPF must be ended with M17 or RET A return by means of REPOS command is not permitted and triggers alarm 16020 Repositioning not possible Error with operator panel reset or after ramp up If EMERGENCY STOP or an operating mode NCK error is
308. plane Function Manual 178 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 17 5 Data table 17 5 1 Machine data Identifier Name Channel specific 22360 TOOL_PARAMETER_DEF_MASK Definition of tool parameters 22550 TOOL_CHANGE_MODE New tool offsets with M function 17 5 2 Interface signals Number Bit Name S Channel specific DB2500 DBx0008 0 T function 1 change DB2500 DBX0010 0 D function 1 change DB2500 DBD2000 T function 1 DB2500 DBD5000 D function 1 DB2500 DBX1000 6 Me DB3200 DBX0013 Deactivate workpiece counter 18 Special functions 18 1 Multi language support for the machine manufacturer s HMI data In the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control the machine manufacturer s HMI data will support multiple languages in an easy way You can access the following HMI data screen with the operations SYSTEM 4s N p Sus BB8D lt SYSTEM gt operating area suier ARM gt F data l gt Em data HMI data folder gt Hame Type Length Date Time Customized bitmaps User cycle files jEasyxLanguage scripts CI0EM online help txt png bnmp Q Extended user text file falme txt C70EM HD description file md_descr txt CI0EM manual Coemmanual pdf3 CIPLC alarm texts falcu txt CI0EM slideshow bnp pnq C70EM R variable name file rparan_nanme txt 7S5ervice planner task name file svc_tasks txt There are the following three types of multi language support for the m
309. point SWITCH The SWITCH instruction describes a multiple choice A term is evaluated once and compared with a number of constants If the expression matches the constants the instructions are executed within the CASE instruction The DEFAULT instruction is executed when none of the constants match the expression Syntax lt SWITCH gt lt CONDITION gt Value lt CONDITION gt lt CASE walwe Constant 1 gt Instructions lt CASE gt lt CASE value Constant 2 gt Instructions lt CASE gt lt DEFAULT gt Instructions lt DEFAULT gt lt SWITCH gt THEN Operation if the condition has been fulfilled IF THEN ELSE Function Manual 216 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 ere Menng OOS FOR For loop for initialization test continuation instruction s Syntax lt FOR gt S NI TS lt 7 INE TS lt CONDITION gt lt CONDITION gt lt INCREMENT gt lt INCREMENT gt Instructions lt FOR gt The For loop is executed as follows Evaluation of the term initialization INIT Evaluation of the term test CONDITION as a Boolean term If the value is false the For loop is ended Execution of the following instructions Evaluation of the term continuation INCREMENT Continue with 2 All the variables used within the INIT CONDITION and INCREMENT branches should be created outside the FOR loop Example lt LET name count gt 0 lt LET gt lt FOR gt STNI T gt lt OP gt
310. process The flowchart for referencing gantry axes using an incremental measuring system is as follows Section 1 Referencing of the leading axis Axis specific referencing of the gantry axes is started by the active machine function REF when the leading axis interface signal is sent from the PLC user program DB380x DBX0004 7 6 traversing key plus minus The leading axis approaches the reference point operational sequence as for reference point approach The appropriate synchronized axis traverses in synchronism with the leading axis Interface signal Referenced synchronized of the leading axis is output to indicate that the reference point has been reached Section 2 Referencing the synchronized axis As soon as the leading axis has approached its reference point the synchronized axis is automatically referenced as for reference point approach The dependency between the leading axis and synchronized axis is inverted in the control for this phase so that the leading axis now traverses in synchronism with the synchronized axis IS Referenced synchronized of the synchronized axis is output to indicate that the reference point has been reached The gantry axis dependency then reverts to its previous status Section 3 Gantry synchronization Function Manual 44 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 Once all axes in the gantry grouping have been referenced they must be synchronized with the defined reference position The actual posi
311. program Reset is measured in the selected NC program The timer is reset with the start of a new NC program e Tool action time in seconds AC_CUTTING_TIME The runtime of the path axes is measured in all NC programs between NC START and end of program RESET without rapid traverse active and with the tool active The measurement is interrupted when a dwell time is active The timer is automatically reset to zero in the case of a Control power up with default values Display Ta Sett The contents of the timers are visible on the screen in the lt OFFSET gt operating area orrser_ gt SD data softkey gt Time counter softkey Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 99 Run tine HHH H BAM BAS Cycle time HHHH H BAM HAS Cutting time OHHOH HOM Bhs Setup time H128 H 41M Pover on time HAHAH 45M e Run time AC_OPERATING_TIME e Cycle time AC_CYCLE_TIME e Cutting time AC_CUTTING_TIME e Setup time AN_SETUP_TIME e Power on time AN_POWERON_TIME nee M Cycle time is also visible in the information line of the AUTO window of the lt MACHINE gt operating area M Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual 9 6 Workpiece counter Function The Workpiece counter function provides counters for counting workpieces These counters can be read and written by the program or by operation note protection level for writing Range of values 0 to 999 999 999 The fol
312. ption here In this case it is also possible to approach two fixed point positions with one setting MD30610 0 7 5 4 Programming System variables The following system variables that can be read in the part program and in the synchronous actions for the Approach fixed point function are available System variable AA_FIX_POINT_SELECTED lt Axis gt Number of fixed point to be approached AA_FIX_POINT_ACT lt Axis gt Number of the fixed point on which the axis is currently located Function Manual 68 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 7 5 5 Supplementary Conditions Axis is indexing axis The axis is not traversed and an alarm is output if the axis to be traversed is an indexing axis and the fixed point position to be approached does not match an indexing position Frames active All active frames are ignored Traversing is performed in the machine coordinate system Offset values active Active compensation values external work offset synchronized action offset AA_OFF online tool offset are also applied The fixed point is a position in the machine coordinates system An alarm is signaled if an offset movement external work offset synchronized action offset AA_OFF online tool offset is made during a fixed point approach in JOG The position of the fixed point to be approached in the machine coordinates system is not reached instead a position that would have been reached without active offset movement is reached T
313. r str1 string variable Syntax KLUNCELONM Name String crimrighe gt Strl lt TfuncetLon gt Example lt let name Strl1 type String gt test trim right lt let gt lt function name String trimright gt strl lt functron gt Result str1 test trim right The function calculates the sine of the value transferred in degrees Parameter double angle Syntax lt function name sin return lt double val gt gt double lt function gt Example lt let name sin val type double gt lt let gt lt TUNCULOM name TsIn rerturn sin vals 20 50 lt function gt The function calculates the cosine of the value transferred in degrees Parameter double angle Syntax lt function name cos return lt double val gt gt double lt function gt Example lt let name cos val type double gt lt let gt lt TUNCULOMN Neame COs Fe UEI E Cos VAL A0 lt s LUnCELONS The function calculates the tangent of the value transferred in degrees Parameter double angle Syntax lt function name tan return lt double val gt gt double lt function gt Example lt let name tan val type double gt lt let gt lt function name tan EeLUurn tan val 20 0 lt function gt Function Manual 242 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Function name Meaning arcsin arccos dil load Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 The function calculates the arcs
314. ram status running Table 9 5 Effect on program status ORN Aborted Interrupted Stopped Running is Reset FX S S is ncstop o d S S X IS NC stop at block limit FX 1S NC stop axes and spindles S X IS Read in disable 1S Feed stop channel sp fF KT 1S Feed stop axis sp PK Feed overide 0 fF S S X 1S Spindte stop ooo do d S S X M2inthe block XK umem o y I IS LIS Single block s s sSY block Auxiliary functions output to PLC but not yet acknowledged 9 3 7 Channel status Channel states The current channel status is signaled at the interface for the channel The PLC can then trigger certain responses and interlocks configured by the manufacturer depending on the status at the interface The channel status is displayed in all operating modes The following channel states are available e S Channel status reset DB3300 DBX0003 7 e IS Channel status interrupted DB3300 DBX0003 6 e S Channel status active DB3300 DBX0003 5 The effect of commands signals The channel status can be modified through the activation of various commands or interface signals The following table shows the resulting channel status when these signals are set assumed status before the signal is set gt Channel status active Function Manual 84 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 The Channel status active signal is obtained when a part program or part program block is being executed or when the axes are traver
315. rammed which exceeds the maximum encoder limit frequency MD36300 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT the maximum mechanical speed limit of the encoder must not be exceeded the synchronization is lost The spindle continues to rotate but with reduced functionality If a speed is then reached that is below the encoder limit frequency in MD36302 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW value of MD36300 the spindle automatically synchronizes with the next zero mark signal You can achieve this by programming a lower S value changing the spindle speed override switch etc Re synchronizing In the following case however the position measuring system must be re synchronized the position measurement encoder is on the motor a BERO distance sensor for synchronization signals is mounted to the spindle and the gear stage is changed The synchronization is triggered internally when the spindle is rotating in the new gear stage 15 4 Gear stage change Number of gear stages Five gear stages can be configured for the spindle If the spindle motor is mounted on the spindle directly 1 1 or with a non adjustable gear ratio MD35010 GEAR_STEP_CHANGE_ENABLE gear stage change is possible must be set to zero Motor speed rev min With automatic gear stage selection this speed range is not utilized in gear stage 1 Max motor speed 0 Le Spindle speed rev min Imax IN 2max l 94min J 4max I 2min IJ omax Definable by
316. rammed is output when the specified length for address extension of value is exceeded or when the wrong data type is used The following table shows some programming examples for H functions If the admissible number of auxiliary functions per block is exceeded alarm 12010 is issued Table 8 2 Programming examples of H functions Programming Output of H function to the PLC HO 5 0 H 5 379 H0 5 379 H17 3 5 H17 3 5 H5 3 21 Error alarm 14770 Block change A new auxiliary function output from the NCK to the PLC is only possible after the PLC has acknowledged all transferred auxiliary functions Auxiliary functions are present in the user interface for at least one PLC cycle A block is considered as completed when the programmed movement has been completed and the auxiliary function has been acknowledged To do so the NCK stops the part program processing if necessary to ensure that no auxiliary functions are lost from the PLC user program s point of view 8 3 Transfer of values and signals to the PLC interface Time of transfer In the case of auxiliary functions which are output at the end of a block e g M2 the output is only made after all axis movements and the SPOS movement of the spindle have been completed If several auxiliary functions with different output types prior during at end of motion are programmed in one motion block then they are output individually according to their output type In a block without ax
317. rating area N SHIFT ALARM lt ALT gt lt H gt Calls the online help system lt ALT gt lt L gt Enables input of lowercase letters with the following icon displayed in the tip area Calls the input method editor for entering Chinese characters Calls the pocket calculator Note that this function is not applicable in MDA mode lt CTRL gt lt B gt lt CTRL gt lt C gt lt CTRL gt lt D gt lt CTRL gt lt P gt lt CTRL gt lt R gt lt CTRL gt lt S gt Increases the screen backlight brightness Decreases the screen backlight brightness A II V Function Manual 46 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 N 19 Licensing in the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED licensing The PPU software on the CNC PPU has already been licensed in the factory before delivery Depending on specific requirements factory licensing is available for the following machining types e SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED T Turning e SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED M Milling You can also purchase the following optional functions for the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED control system To use the functions first activate them on the control via the HMI user interface only for a turning variant Transmit Tracyl Gantry BASIC Note You can obtain the corresponding licenses from the Web License Manager http www siemens com automation license 19 1 Web License Manager With the Web License Manager
318. reference point must be made for specific axes via the machine data e MD34080 REFP_MOVE_DIST reference point distance e MD34090 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR reference point offset absolute offset Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 47 Referencing direction selection The zero mark leveling function of the following axis can be defined using the following machine data MD37150 GANTRY_FUNCTION_MASK bit 1 Bit Value Meaning S O 1 The zero mark leveling function of the following axis is similar to MD34010 REFP_CAM_DIR_IS_MINUS The zero mark leveling function of the master axis is the same as the slave axis During referencing the reference point value of the leading axis is specified as the target position for all axes in the grouping for the synchronization compensatory motion This position is then approached without axis coupling The absolute encoders and distance coded encoders of the leading axis will be set to the current actual position of the leading axis or to the reference point value either of these options is set using the following machine data MD34330 REFP_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER distance coded linear measuring system without destination point If only one reference cam is used for the leading and synchronized axes then this must be taken into account in the PLC user program 6 3 2 Automatic synchronization Automatic synchronization can take place e In referencing mode see the section titled Introduction
319. reset etc You must save the CYCPE1MA SPF and CYCPE_MA SPF files under the cycle directory N CMA Table 18 2 Relevant parameters No Name Value Descriptions O 11450 SEARCHRUNMODE 7H 20106 _ PROG_EVENTIGN_SINGLEBLOCK 1FH fs 20107 _ PROG_EVENTIGNINHIBIT ehn fe PROG_EVENT_MASK Actual value Triggering modes for N CMA CYCPE1MA SPF and CMA CYCPEMA SPF Bit 0 activating the program event during the NC commissioning Bit 1 activating the program event at the end of a NC program Bit 2 activating the program event using the RESET key Bit 3 activating the program event after powering up the NC S 18 6 Fast I O Hardware description The FAST I O interface X21 provides 3 digital inputs and 1 digital output Illustration Pin _ Signal __ Description Cd Variable Fast input 1 with address DB2900 DBX0 0 A_IN 1 1 24V i 2 NCRDY Kt Fast input 2 with address DB2900 DBX0 1 A_IN 2 3 NCRDY_K2 6 DI3 Fast input 3 with address DB2900 DBX0 2 A_IN 3 SDI f 1 DO1 Fast output 1 with address DB2900 DBX4 0 A_OUT 1 6 DI 3 7DO 1 CW Ldi 9 CCW Le dj 10 M X21 FAST I O Relevant parameters MDNo Name Meaning Value 10366 HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTIN 0 Hardware assignment for the fast inputs 10101 10368 HW_ASSIGN_DIG_FASTOUT O Hardware assignment for the fast outputs 10101 PLC interface addresses DB2900 Signals from fast inputs and outputs Function Manual 192 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 DB
320. rigger actions e Single block fine With this type of single block all blocks of the part program even the pure computation blocks without traversing motions are processed sequentially by NC Start Single block coarse is the default setting after switching on caution In a series of G33 blocks single block is effective only if dry run feedrate is selected Selection activation The selection signal normally comes from a user machine control panel This function must be activated by the PLC user program via the IS Activate single block DB3200 DBX0000 4 The preselection whether Single block coarse or Single block fine type is made in the user interface in the Program control menu Display The checkback signal that single block mode is active is displayed in the relevant SBL field on the operator interface Because of the single block mode as soon as the part program processing has processed a part program block e The following interface signals are set IS Channel status interrupted DB3300 DBX0003 6 1S Program status stopped DB3300 DBX0003 2 e The following interface signals are reset 1S Channel status active DB3300 DBX0003 5 1S Program status running DB3300 DBX0003 0 9 4 4 Program processing with dry run feedrate DRY Functionality The part program can be started via IS NC Start DB3200 DBX0007 1 When the function is active the traversing velocities programmed in conjunctio
321. rms in the lt CUSTOM gt operating CUSTOM area on the HMI Use The defined XML instructions offer the following properties 1 Display dialogs containing the following elements Softkeys Variables Texts and help texts Graphics and help displays 2 Call dialogs by Pressing the corresponding softkeys 3 Restructure dialogs dynamically Edit and delete softkeys Define and design variable fields Insert exchange and delete display texts language dependent or language neutral Insert exchange and delete graphics 4 Initiate operations in response to the following actions Displaying dialogs Inputting values variables Selecting a softkey Exiting dialogs 5 Data exchange between dialogs 6 Variables Read NC PLC and user variables Write NC PLC and user variables Combine with mathematical comparison or logic operators 7 Execute functions Subprograms File functions PI services 8 Apply protection levels according to user classes The valid elements tags for the script language are described in Section XML identifier Page 208 Note The following section is not intended as a comprehensive description of XML Extensible Markup Language Please refer to the relevant specialist literature for additional information Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 205 18 10 2 Fundamentals of configuration Configuration files The defining data
322. rocesses a part program block by block Only when the functions of the current block have been completed is the next block processed Various requirements with respect to machining or positioning require different block change criteria There are two ways that the path axes can behave at block boundaries The first way is called exact stop and means that all path axes must have reached the set target position depending on an exact stop criterion before the next block change is initiated To be able to fulfill the criterion the path axes must reduce the path velocity at every block change which however delays the block change The second way is called continuous path mode and it attempts to avoid deceleration of the path velocity at the block boundary in order to change to the next block with as little change of path velocity as possible LookAheaa is a procedure in continuous path mode that achieves velocity control with LookAhead over several NC part program blocks Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 29 4 2 General Machine axes that are related interpolatively must have the same dynamic response i e the same following error at any given velocity The term path axes refer to all machining axes which are controlled by the interpolator calculating the path points in such a manner that e All the axes involved start at the same time e All the axes involved travel with the correct velocity ratios e All the axes reach the p
323. rogrammed spindle speed S value is reactivated Control mode gt positioning mode To stop the spindle from rotation M3 or M4 with orientation or to reorient it from standstill M5 SPOS SPOSA and M19 are used to switch to positioning mode Positioning mode gt control mode SPCOF M3 M4 M5 and M41 45 are used to change to control mode if the orientation of the spindle is to be terminated The last programmed spindle speed S value is reactivated Positioning mode gt oscillation mode If the orientation of the spindle is to be terminated M41 to M45 can be used to change to oscillation mode When the gear change is complete the last programmed spindle speed S value and M5 control mode are reactivated Positioning mode gt tapping without compensation chuck Tapping without compensation chuck thread interpolation is activated via G331 G332 SPOS must first be used to set the spindle to position controlled operation Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 153 15 2 2 Spindle control mode When control mode The spindle is in control mode with the following functions e Constant spindle speed S M3 M4 M5 and G94 G95 G97 G33 G63 e Constant cutting rate G96 S M3 M4 M5 Requirements A spindle position actual value sensor is absolutely essential for M3 M4 M5 in conjunction with revolution feedrate G95 F in mm rev or inch rev constant cutting rate G96 G97 thread cutting G33 Independent spindl
324. rogrammed target position at the same time The acceleration rates of the individual axes may vary depending on the path e g circular path Path axes can be geometry axes and special axes e g workpiece turning axes that are involved in the workpiece machining process Velocity for zero cycle blocks The term zero cycle is applied to blocks whose path length is shorter than the distance that can be traveled on the basis of the programmed set feedrate and the interpolator cycle time For reasons of precision the velocity is reduced until at least one interpolator cycle is required for the distance The velocity is then equal to or less than the quotient of the path length of the block and the interpolator IPO cycle Stop for synchronization Regardless of whether exact stop or continuous path mode is selected the block change can be delayed by synchronization processes which can stop the path axes In exact stop mode the path axes are stopped at the end of the current block In continuous path mode the path axes are stopped at the next block end point at which they can be decelerated without violating their deceleration limits The following synchronization processes cause axes to stop e PLC acknowledgment If acknowledgment by the PLC is required for an auxiliary function that is output before or after the end of motion the axes stop at the end of the block e Missing following blocks If following blocks are conditioned too slowly
325. rol has been activated The first movement of the spindle must be positioning SPOS Speed rev min Phase 1 to 4 MD 35300 SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO position control activation speed Start with SPOS Position reached as Synchronized with zero mark TL Brake application point Time s Figure 15 4 Positioning with stopped non synchronized spindle Sequence Phase 1 Programming SPOS accelerates the spindle with the acceleration in MD35210 GEAR_STEP_ POSCTRL_ACCEL acceleration in position control mode until the maximum speed entered in MD35300 SPIND_POSCTRL_VELO position control activation speed is reached The direction of rotation is defined by MD35350 SPIND_POSITIONING_ DIR direction of rotation during positioning from standstill if no input results from SPOS programming ACN ACP IC The spindle is synchronized with the next zero mark of the position actual value encoder Phase 2 When the spindle is synchronized the position control is activated The spindle rotates at the maximum speed stored in MD35300 SPIND_ POSCTRL_VELO until the braking start point calculation identifies the point at which the programmed spindle position can be approached accurately with the defined acceleration Phase 3 At the brake application point the spindle is braked down to standstill with the acceleration set in MD35210 GEAR_STEP_ POSCTRL_ACCEL acceleration in position control mode Phase 4 The spindle has reached
326. rsed must not be a synchronized axis of an active coupling e No ASUPs are executed Approaching a fixed point with G75 The process for approaching defined fixed points can be activated from the part program too using the G75 command For more information on approaching fixed points with G75 refer to the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Section Fixed point approach 7 5 2 Functionality Procedure Procedure in Approaching fixed point in JOG e Selection of JOG mode e Enabling the Approach fixed point in JOG function e Traversing of the machine axis with traverse keys or handwheel Function Manual 66 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 Activation The PLC sets the interface signal after the Approach fixed point in JOG function is selected JOG Approach fixed point DB380x DBX1001 0 2 The number of the fixed point to be approached is output using bit 0 2 in binary code The NC confirms activation with the following interface signal as soon as the function takes effect JOG Approaching fixed point active DB390x DBX1001 0 2 Sequence The actual traversing is started with the traverse keys or the handwheel in the direction of the approaching fixed point The selected machine axis traverses till it comes to an automatic standstill at the fixed point The corresponding NC PLC interface signal is sent on reaching the fixed point with Exact stop fine JOG Approaching fixed point reached DB390x
327. ry e g to calibrate the machine the leading and synchronized axes must be temporarily interchanged Note Generally the start of the function generator measuring functions and AM setup triggers the virtual axes to abort upon error recognition Special cases If individual axes have to be activated the gantry groups must be temporarily canceled As the second axis no longer travels in synchronism with the first axis the activated axis must not be allowed to traverse beyond the positional tolerance If the gantry grouping is canceled the following points must be noted e Always activate the traversing range limits and set them to the lowest possible values position tolerance e Synchronize the gantry grouping first if possible and then execute a POWER ON RESET without referencing the axes again This ensures that the traversing range limits always refer to the same position i e that which was valid on power ON e Avoid using the step change function Position step changes are only permissible if they stay within the permitted tolerance e Always use an offset of 0 for the function generator and measuring function in contrast to the recommendations for normal axes e Set the amplitudes for function generator and measuring function to such low values that the activated axis traverses a shorter distance than the position tolerance allows Always activate the traversing range limits as a check see above Function Manual 52 6FC539
328. s reached destination Position monitoring is active for axes and position controlled spindles Deactivation When the programmed Exact stop limit fine has been reached or a new setpoint has been output e g for positioning according to Exact stop coarse followed by a block change the position monitoring is deactivated Effect If the limit value for Exact stop fine has not yet been reached when the positioning monitoring time has elapsed the following action is performed e Output of alarm 25080 Positioning monitoring e The affected axis spindle is brought to a standstill using a rapid stop with open position control loop along a speed setpoint ramp The braking ramp duration is set in MD36610 AX_EMERGENCY_STOP_TIME braking ramp duration for error states e f the axis spindle is involved in interpolation with other axes spindles these are stopped using a rapid stop with following error reduction default for partial position setpoint 0 Cause of error Remedy e Position controller gain too low gt change machine data for position controller gain MD32200 POSCTRL_GAIN servo gain factor e Positioning window exact stop fine position monitoring time and position controller gain have not been coordinated gt change machine data MD36010 STOP_LIMIT_FINE exact stop fine MD36020 POSITIONING_TIME exact stop fine delay time MD32200 POSCTRL_GAIN servo gain factor Rule of thumb e Positioning window l
329. s informed of the position of the tool zero point in relation to the origin of the coordinate system declared for TRACYL The MD has three components for the three axes of the Cartesian coordinate system Assignment of axis components in MD24920 TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 0 Tx TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 1 Ty TRACYL_BASE_TOOL_1 2 Tz see following figure Tool zero YC Figure 11 10 Position of tool zero in relation to machine zero Example Machine data settings for TRACYL with a standard lathe General settings Axis names XM gt X1 ZM gt Z1 CM gt SP 1 e Machine axis name MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB O X1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 1 Z1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 2 SP1 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 3 SP2 MD10000 AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB 4 e Assignment of geometry axis to channel axis MD20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 0 1 MD20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 1 0 MD20050 AXCONF_GEOAX_ASSIGN_TAB 2 2 e Geometry axis names in channel MD20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 0O X MD20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 1 Y MD20060 AXCONF_GEOAX_NAME_TAB 2 Z e Machine axis number valid in channel MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 0 1 MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 1 2 MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 2 3 MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 3 4 MD20070 AXCONF_MACHAX_USED 4 0 e Name of channel axis in the channel MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 0 X Function Manual 132 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 MD20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB 1 2
330. s se ce medic E deen arene te eee ane ntact eee ced sede nasetseseses 9 2 2 Mode change srren A EE T a a T e a a a E 9 2 3 Functional possibilities in the individual MOCES cccccccceececeeece sees eeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeseeeaeeeaes 9 2 4 Monitoring functions in the individual MOCES cccccceeccceececeecceeeeeeceeceseuceseeeeeseeceseecessucesseeeeseeeseeeessaees 9 2 5 Interlocks in the individual modes cccccseecceeccseeceuecceeceeeceuecsaeesueceuecsueesaeeseuesseesaeecsueseueeseeeseunsaeeegas 9 3 Processing a part progra csicincosiserinssisteniainesiaanidansaudiaacsanaeaecualdieiuneedamiaadidadiadeatincadidiasanmtsaseaaiaadiuataticones 9 3 1 Program mode and part program SeIECTION ccceecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeesaeeesseeeeseeseseeeesaeeesueesneesaneesaaees 9 3 2 Start of part program or part program DIOCK ccccccecccceececeeceeeeeeceeeeseeeeseecesseeeeseeceseecesseeessneesseeeseeeeeaes 9 3 3 Part program interrUptON xii catecuneesscasexenaserteatonaetiacsedxnee Sines sadedereneeotandakiadindrdastioushetedstecteededeuehesere lt eseUeeosubeceneees 9 3 4 RESET CONTI I eee eer nes entre eee ny emetic eee yy ee E eee ere 9 3 5 Programi CONTON sennie raS Ear will dada muserivausdiadaaduwtanden wikia ARTE 9 3 6 FOO AN SC as EA T E T A EE TAE T E N E ET E E AA 9 3 7 Channel Stal US eee eee ESE EES 9 3 8 Event driven program calls sanedrcsiteaauncutaronptatdsioneelahancttecduvoetahductatain
331. sed in JOG mode Table 9 6 Effect on channel status a Reset Interrupted Active is ResetY XP S S as Nesto oo d d X S O IS NC stop atblock timi PX IS NC stop axes and spindles Jo X IS Read in disable OOo a O IS Feed stop channels PK IS Feed stop axissp PK Feedoveride 0 S S is spindie stop PK M2intheblook XP Momma intheblock EX Is singleblock o d d X S Auxiliary functions output to PLC but not yet X acknowledged 9 3 8 Event driven program calls Application In the case of certain events an implied user program is to start This allows the user to activate the initial settings of functions or carry out initialization routines by part program command Note The call of this user program in the SW version 4 6 in this manual is not compatible with that in the SW version 4 4 Event selection MD20108 PROG_EVENT_MASK event driven program call can be used to specify which of the following events is to enable the user program e Bit0 1 Part program start e Biti 1 Part program end e Bit2 1 Operator panel reset e Bit3 1 Power up of the NC control Request which start event In the user program the system variable gt _PROG_EVENT can be used to request the event which enabled the part program Event Part program start Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 85 Table 9 7 Seque Command 1 Channel selection Reset status Operating mode selection AUTO or AUTO an
332. services PI services in the NCK area e g asynchronous subroutine ASUP e Read variables from the NCK area e Write variables from the NCK area The activation of the respective service is performed via the global part of the interface The parameterization of the individual services is described below Job global part Only one service can run at a time The service is selected via DB1200 DBX0 1 and DB1200 DBX0 2 DB1200 DBX0 2 DB1200 DBX0 1 Start PI service in the NCK area O e ee eee Read variables from the NCK area a a Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 15 DB1200 DBX0 2 DB1200 DBX0 1 Write variables from the NCK area OO ee ee Start A job is started by setting the signal DB1200 DBX0 0 1 A new job can only be started if the previous job has been completed i e the acknowledgement signals Job completed DB1200 DBX2000 0 and Error in job DB1200 DBX2000 1 must be zero The execution of a job may take several PLC cycles and vary depending on the utilization thus this function is not real time capable Note A job already started cannot be cancelled If the Start signal is inadvertently reset before receiving the acknowledgement the result signals for this job are not refreshed the job however is executed Job global part The results are written by the PLC operating system therefore these signals can only be written by the user If the job was completed without errors the Job completed sign
333. sing of part programs Feedback signal The active operating mode is displayed by the interface signals in the DB3100 DBBOO000 Possible machine functions in JOG The following machine function can be selected in the JOG operating mode REF reference point approach The required machine function is activated with IS REF DB3000 DBX0001 2 The display is visible in the IS active machine function REF DB3100 DBX0001 2 Stop A stop signal can be issued with the following interface signals e IS NC stop DB3200 DBX0007 3 e S NC stop axes plus spindles DB3200 DBX0007 4 e IS NC stop at block limit DB3200 DBX0007 2 Depending on the interface signal used either only the axes or in addition the spindles of the channels are stopped or the axes at block end RESET The active part program is aborted by the IS Reset DB3000 DBX0000 7 The following actions are executed when the IS Reset is triggered e Part program preparation is stopped immediately e Axes and spindles are stopped e Any auxiliary functions of the current block not yet output are no longer output e The block indicator is reset to the beginning of the relevant part program e All Reset alarms are deleted from the display e The reset is complete as soon as IS Channel status Reset DB3300 DBX0003 7 is set Ready Ready to run is displayed by IS 808D Ready DB3100 DBX0000 3 Function Manual 78 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 9 2 2 Mode cha
334. ssignment operation automatically adapts the format to that of the variables which have been loaded e Pre assignment for a string variable Texts containing more than one line can be assigned to a string variable if the formatted text is transferred as a value If a line is to end with a line feed lt LF gt the characters n should be added at the end of the line lt LET name text type string gt F4000 G94 n Gl X20 y Z50 n M2 n lt LET gt gt Fields Arrays lt let name l1ist dim 10 3 gt 1 2 3 LEAO lt let gt slet Tanes ist ACEN dimne O yoe string text 10 text LL text 20 text 21 lt let gt Assignment Values made up of the machine data or subroutines can be assigned to a variable using the assignment operation A variable remains valid until the end of the higher level XML block Variables which are to be available globally should be created directly after the DialogGUi tag The following must be observed for a dialog box e The message processing opens the corresponding tag e The tag is closed after the message has been executed e All variables within the tag are deleted when closing MSG The operator component shows the message which is indicated in the tag If an alarm number is used the dialog box displays the text which is saved for the number Example lt MSG text my message gt Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 213 P
335. st name gt gt is programmed as follows lt DATA_LIST action read write append id my datalist gt Tag identifier Meaning BREAK Conditional cancellation of a loop CONTROL_RESET The tag enables one or more control components to be restarted Syntax lt CONTROL RESET resetnc TRUE gt Attributes e RESETNC TRUE The NC component is restarted Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 209 an Menng OOS DATA The tag enables the NC PLC and GUD data to be directly written to The Addressing components Page 219 section contains details on address formation Attribute e name Variable address Tag value All alphanumeric terms are approved as tag values If a value is to be written from a local variable directly the replacement operator preceding the name of the local variable should be used Syntax lt DATA name lt Variable name gt gt value lt DATA gt Example lt DATA name plc mb170 gt 1 lt DATA gt lt LET name tempVar gt 7 lt LET gt lt the contents of the local variables tempVar are written to bit memory byte 170 gt lt DATA name plc mb170 gt StempVar lt DATA gt DATA_LIST The tag enables the listed machine data to be saved or restored Up to 20 temporary data lists can be created Attributes e action read the values of the listed variables are stored in a temporary memory append the values of the listed variables are added to an existing
336. steps must be taken e RESET e Read off values in machine coordinate system e g X 0 941 Y 0 000 XF 0 000 e Enter the X value of the leading axis axis 1 with inverted sign in the machine data of the synchronized axis axis 3 MD34090 REFP_MOVE_DIST_CORR 0 941 Note This MD is effective after POWER ON To avoid having to perform a POWER ON in advance this value can also be entered in the following machine data MD34080 REFP_MOVE_DIST reference point distance The MD is then valid after a RESET e Start referencing again for axis 1 with the modified machine data e Wait until message 10654 Channel 1 Waiting for synchronization start appears e At this point the NCK has prepared axis 1 for synchronization and sends the same interface signal as shown in the image above e Examine actual positions of machine Case A or B might apply Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 57 Figure 6 8 Possible results of referencing the leading axis If Case A applies the synchronization process can be started immediately See step Start synchronization If Case B applies the offset diff must be calculated and taken into account e Measuring of diff e By using two appropriate right angled reference points R and R in the machine bed at the right of the image the difference in position can be traversed in JOG The diff offset can then be read as the difference in the position display The diff offset must be entere
337. t switches The control ensures that the traversing movement is aborted as soon as the first valid limitation has been reached Velocity control ensures that deceleration is initiated early enough for the axis to stop exactly at the limit position e g software limit switch Only when the hardware limit switch is triggered does the axis stop abruptly with rapid stop An alarm is output when the corresponding limit is reached The control automatically prevents further movement in this direction The traversing keys and the handwheel have no effect in this direction Note The software limit switches are only active if the axis has previously been referenced Function Manual 62 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 Note The function for retracting an axis that has approached the limit position depends on the 7 machine manufacturer Please refer to the machine manufacturer s documentation For further information on working area limits and hardware and software limit switches see Chapter Axis Monitoring Page 21 7 2 Continuous travel Selection When JOG mode is selected the active machine function continuous interface signal is set automatically e For geometry axes DB3300 DBX1001 6 DB3300 DBX1005 6 DB3300 DBX1009 6 e For machine axes spindle DB390x DBX0005 6 Continuous mode in JOG mode can also be selected via the PLC interface IS Machine function continuous The PLC defines via the INC inputs in mode group range active int
338. ta the generally applicable Activate MD or Reset should be observed 5 POWER ON warm restart 6 Now comparative measurements can be made using the laser interferometer 7 To further improve the compensation results it is also conceivable to correct individual compensation values in the program A POWER ON is no longer necessary when reading in the table again Note As described in step 5 the compensation table is downloaded into the program memory as an executable program and is then transferred into the previously configured memory area of the control using CYCLE start This procedure can be repeated for each table to ensure transparency However it is also possible to download all tables in an initialization step The compensation values become active after MD32710 lt AXi gt 1 and a mandatory power POWER ON Table parameters The position related compensations for the particular direction as well as additional table parameters in the form of system variables should be saved in the compensation table e AN_CEC lt t gt lt N gt compensation value for interpolation point lt N gt of compensation table lt t gt e AN_CEC_INPUT_AXIS lt t gt basic axis Function Manual 110 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 e AN_CEC_OUTPUT_AXIS lt t gt compensation axis Note For the direction dependent LEC the basis and compensation axis are identical e AN_CEC_STEP lt t gt interpolation point distance e AN_CEC_M
339. tail for a three axis machine in the fallowing example Configuring Number of compensation interpolation points MD18342 MN_MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS 0 11 Table 1 Axis X positive traversing direction MD18342 MN_MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS 1 11 Table 2 Axis X negative traversing direction Interpolation points Table lt t gt 0 lt N gt Number of MD18342 MN_MM_CEC_MAX_POINTSJ 0 11 interpolation points Interpolation point 2 3 7 lt N gt Measurement Setpoint Deviation Checking measurement position Comp No Measurement Direction Direction Direction Direction position mm mm mm mm 0 0004 0 0004 0 0000 0 0000 0 0011 0 0003 AN_CEC_MAX lt t gt 0 0012 0 0001 0 0012 Function Manual 112 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Error curve X axis 0 0080 0 0060 0 0040 0 0020 0 0000 E E 2 i gt Q 0 0020 527 469 411 353 295 237 179 121 0 0040 Position X X without compensation X without compensation X with compensation X with compensation Programming The following program BI_SSFK_TAB_AX1_X MPF includes the value assignments for the parameters of the two compensation tables positive and negative traversing direction of the X axis direction dependent LEC lst axis MX1 Table 1 positive traversing direction Table 2 negative traversing direction CHANDATA 1 SMA CEC ENABLE AX1 0 compensation OFF S
340. tax lt function name doc remove gt progname lt function gt Example lt function name doc remove gt T mpf test mpf lt funett ons Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Function name doc exist If the file exists the function returns the value 1 Parameter progname file name Syntax lt function name doc exist PECUrDS SIn Var gt progname lt function gt Example lt let name exist gt 0 lt let gt lt function name doc exist return exist Tmpi test mpi lt function ncfunc select The function selects the program specified for execution The program must be stored in the NC file system Parameter progname file name Syntax lt function name ncfunc select gt progname lt FUnCE1On Example lt EUunction name ncrunc select gt TT mpi trest mpr lt tUnCrIONn gt Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 245 18 11 Hot keys The following functions can be carried out with certain key combinations on the full PPU keyboard Key combination Opens the machining operating area lt ALT gt lt X gt lt ALT gt lt V gt Opens the program editing operating area _ lt ALT gt lt C gt Opens the offset parameters operating area lt ALT gt lt B gt Opens the program management operating area lt ALT gt lt M gt Opens the diagnostics operating area A e lt ALT gt lt N gt Opens the system data management ope
341. te cacti E E E E Seaceuentehoaeteeauce 18 7 Creating User GY LOS aa tcesecece cece tendenaececpenieecendatatieng E iaa Earias kiia Taaie 18 7 1 Creating the extended user text file cccceccccsececcesececceneeeceeseeeceuececseseeceeueesssaueessegeeessageeessessesseneeeess 18 7 2 Creating the user cycle softkey index fil ec cecccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeas 18 7 3 Creating the user cycle parameter file cccccceccccseececceseeeceeeceeceeececseeeecseeeessuesessegeeesseueeesseesessanseeses 18 7 4 Creating the user cycle file x ak eee ngncucesccaessaacien sotensces vacates dececutnusumen dence teases EEEN S EAEAN RENAE ERRA REER 18 7 5 Creating the user cycle alarm Fil 0 eeccccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeessaeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeeeesaeseeeas 18 7 6 Creating the user cycle bitmap fil ec ccecccceececceeeeecceeseeceeueeeceacecseeeecseueesseaeeesseeeessageesssssessneeeeas 18 7 7 Transferring the desired files to the control system ccccseeceecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaeeeesseaeeesaees 18 7 8 Call the created user cycle acccicniescasseccsedassndsebctenssadedaadsesnienendd exerdseautancduscssniisessislonsadebienedenvbededesavasdsenetdencadhcs 18 7 9 Editing the user cycle screens cccccsecccesceceseeceeececsececeuceseeeesaececeueeseecesaeeenseseseueessaeeeseesensaeensaessneetens 18 8 Loading machine manufact
342. ted together with the calculated total compensation value in the configured measuring system External conversions of position information are no longer necessary with a measuring system change Monitoring To avoid excessive velocities and acceleration rates on the machine axis as a result of applying sag compensation the total compensation value is monitored and limited to a maximum value The maximum possible total compensation value for sag compensation is defined on an axis for axis basis using the machine data e MD32720 MA_CEC_MAX_SUM maximum compensation value for sag compensation If the determined total compensation value is greater than the maximum value then a corresponding alarm is output Program processing is not interrupted The compensation value output as an additional setpoint is limited to the maximum value Further changing the total compensation value is also axially limited e MD32730 MA_CEC_MAX_VELO velocity change for sag compensation The specified value acts as a factor and is referred to the maximum axis velocity MD32000 MA_MAX_AX_VELO An appropriate alarm is signaled when the limit value is exceeded Program processing is not interrupted The path not covered because of the limitation is made up as soon as the compensation value is no longer subject to limitation Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 111 10 3 3 3 Example The direction dependent compensation tables of the X axis are shown in de
343. ted via the user interface in the menu Lt cont S Program test selected DB1700 DBX0001 7 is set on selection of the function The PLC user program must activate the function via the IS Activate program test DB3200 DBX0001 7 Display As a checkback for the active program test PRT is displayed in the status line on the user interface and the IS Program test active DB3300 DBX0001 7 is set in the PLC 9 4 3 Program processing in single block mode SBL Functionality The user can execute a part program block by block to check the individual machining steps Once the user decides that an executed part program block is functioning correctly he she can call the next block The program is advanced to the next part program block via IS NC Start DB3200 DBX0007 1 When the function single block is activated the part program stops after every program block during processing In this case the activated single block type must be observed Single block type The following different types of single block are provided e Single block coarse Function Manual 94 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 With this type of single block the blocks that initiate actions traversing motions auxiliary function outputs etc are processed individually If tool radius compensation is active G41 G42 processing stops after every intermediate block inserted by the control Processing is however not stopped at calculation blocks as these do not t
344. terruption 9 3 4 RESET command Function The RESET command IS Reset DB3000 DBX000 7 can be executed in every channel state This command is aborted by another command A RESET command can be used to interrupt an active part program or part program blocks After execution of the Reset command IS Channel status reset DB3300 DBX0003 7 and the IS Program status aborted DB3300 DBX0003 4 are set The part program cannot be continued at the point of interruption All axes in the channel are at exact stop The following actions are executed when the RESET command is triggered e Part program preparation is stopped immediately e All axes and if appropriate spindles are braked e Any auxiliary functions of the current block not yet output are no longer output e The block indicator is reset to the beginning of the part program e All alarms are cleared from the display if they are not POWER ON alarms 9 3 5 Program control Selection activation Prog The user can control part program processing via the user interface Under the E cont menu operating mode AUTO S M lt MACHINE gt operating area macue certain functions can be selected whereby some functions act on interface signals of the PLC These signals are merely selection signals from the user interface They do not activate the selected function These signal states must be transferred from the PLC user program to another area of the data block to activate
345. ters in a string Parameter str1 string Syntax lt function name Sstring length return lt int var gt gt Strid lt Funcc1on gt Example lt let name length gt 0 lt let gt lt let name strl type SsString gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt function name SsString length return length gt Str lt functeLon gt Result length 31 The function replaces all the substrings found with the new string Parameter string string variable find string string to be replaced new string new string Syntax lt function name lt string replace gt gt string find string new string lt function gt Example lt let name str1l type String gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt EUNCT LOM Name String replace gt strl ITa Pronn d g yz Ta big Salmon lt fru netirion gt Result str1 A brown bear hunts a big salmon 239 Function name Meaning String remove The function removes all the substrings found Parameter string string variable remove string substring to be deleted Syntax lt function name String remove gt string remove String lt function gt Example lt let name index gt 0 lt let gt lt let name strl type String gt A brown bear hunts a brown dog lt let gt lt EUNCEDOMN Dane Strings remove gt Str la brown dog lt 7 fLunekLon Result str1 A brown bear hunts Strings insert The function inserts a str
346. the selected functions With program control by the PLC the signals are to be set directly Table 9 4 Program control SKP skip block DB1700 DBX0001 0 DB3200 DBx0002 0 DRY dry run feedrate DB1700 DBX0000 6 DB3200 DBx0000 6 ROV rapid traverse override DB1700 DBX0001 3 DB3200 DBx0006 6 Preselection SBL single block coarse SBL single block fine Single block User specific DB3200 DBX0000 4 M1 programmed stop DB1700 DBX0000 5 DB3200 DBX0000 5 DB3300 DBX0000 5 PRT program test DB1700 DBX0000 7 DB3200 DBX0001 7 DB3300 DBX0001 7 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 83 9 3 6 Program status Program states The status of the selected program is displayed in the interface in the AUTO and MDA operating modes If the JOG operating mode is selected when the program is stopped then the interrupted program status is displayed there or on reset also aborted The following program states are available in the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED e S Program status aborted DB3300 DBX0003 4 e S Program status interrupted DB3300 DBX0003 3 e IS Program status stopped DB3300 DBX0003 2 e S Program status running DB3300 DBX0003 0 The effect of commands signals The program status can be controlled by activating different commands or interface signals The following table shows the resulting program state when these signals are set status before the signal is set gt Prog
347. the machine data setting data 16 1 2 Feedrate with G33 G34 G35 thread cutting Types of thread cutting G33 thread with constant pitch G34 thread with linearly increasing pitch G35 thread with linearly decreasing pitch Axis velocity With respect to G33 G34 or G35 threads the axis velocity for the thread length results from the set spindle speed and the programmed pitch However the maximum axis velocity defined in MD32000 MAX_AX_VELO cannot be exceeded The feedrate F is not relevant It is however kept in the memory The axis velocity e g for a cylinder thread results from the set spindle speed S and programmed pitch K Fz mm min speed S rev min pitch K mm rev Note For G34 and G35 the pitch change in mm rev2 is programmed under the F address Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual NC stop single block NC stop and single block are only active after completion of thread chaining Information e The spindle speed override switch must remain unchanged during thread machining tapping e The feedrate override switch is irrelevant in a block with G33 G34 G35 Programmable runin and runout path DITS DITE The run in and run out path is to be traversed in addition to the required thread The starting and braking of the axis both axes in case of a tapered thread are performed in these areas This path depends on the pitch spindle speed and the axis dynamics co
348. the parameters specified in the function call are copied to the transfer parameters listed return true If the attribute is set to true then the local variable return is created The function s return value which is forwarded to the calling function on quitting the function should be copied to this variable Syntax Function body without parameter lt PUNCTLON BODY mame lt funet Lon name gt lt FUNCTION BODY gt Function body with parameter lt FUNCTLON BODM Name STunetLon name paramever lt ply ip2 Pos lt LET name tmp gt lt LET gt lt OP gt tmp pl lt OP gt lt FUNCTION BODY gt Function body with return value lt FUNC TION BODY mame lt Func tlon name gt parameter pl pZ Po return true gt lt LET name tmp gt lt LET gt lt OP gt tmp p1 lt OP gt lt OP gt return tmp lt OP gt lt FUNCTION BODY gt FUNCTION_BODY Example continued lt function body name test parameter cl c2 c3 return true gt lt LET name tmp gt 0 lt LET gt lt OP gt tmp clt c2 c3 lt OP gt lt OP gt Sreturn tmp lt OP gt lt function body gt lt LET name my var gt 4 lt LET gt lt Tunction name rest return T omy var T gt 2p 37 4 lt function lt print text result d gt my var lt print gt Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 235 TAE Men OOOO REQUEST The tag is used to add a variable to the cyclic read
349. the static user memory and are active after POWER ON e Evaluation of the relevant compensation table has been enabled SD41300 SN_CEC_TABLE _ENABLE lt t gt 1 e The current measuring system of the base and compensation axes has been referenced DB31 DBX60 4 or 60 5 1 referenced synchronized 1 or 2 As soon as these conditions have been fulfilled the setpoint position of the compensation axis is altered in all modes with reference to the setpoint position of the base axis and the corresponding compensation value and is then immediately traversed by the machine axis If the reference is then lost e g because the encoder frequency has been exceeded DB31 DBX60 4 or 60 5 0 compensation processing is deactivated The activation of the compensation can be checked using a reference measurement e g using the laser interferometer or in the simplest case using the service display of the particular axis 10 3 3 2 Commissioning Measuring the error or compensation values When commissioning the direction dependent LEC just the same as when commissioning the unidirectional LEC direction dependent error curves for each axis are determined using a suitable measuring device e g laser interferometer A part program with measurement points and wait times should be generated in order to perform the measurement see section Example Page 112 Program BI_LSSFK_MESS_AX1_X MPF Because the various measuring devices
350. the type of interpolation valid in the target block This is not true to contour Only the axes programmed in the target block are moved e Block search without calculation Is used for a quick search in the main program No calculations are performed The internal controller values indicate the status valid before the search Whether the program can be executed subsequently depends on the program and must be decided by the operator This search run is suitable for a fast syntax check of a new program Interface signal In the PLC the following interface signals are set according to a time sequence see figure e Block search active DB3300 DBX0001 4 e Action block active DB3300 DBX0001 3 e Approach block active DB3300 DBX0000 4 Note The Approach block active is only enabled with Block search with calculation on contour because a separate approach block is not generated with Block search with calculation at block end point the approach block is the same as the target block e Last action block active DB3300 DBX0000 6 Function Manual 96 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 Block search Search target NC Start Last NC Start Target start found output action block approach block block in Action blocks output main run oy y y V V V Block search active DB3300 DBX0001 4 Action block active DB3300 DBX0001 3 Approach block active DB3300 DBX0000 4 Last action block active DB3300 DBX0000 6 Fi
351. ther all linear axes or all rotary axes Gantry axis grouping A total of one gantry connection can be defined Each gantry grouping consists of one leading axis and one synchronized axis The gantry axis grouping defines which synchronized axis is controlled by which leading axis based on machine data settings The leading axis and synchronized axis cannot be traversed separately Leading axis The leading axis is the gantry axis that exists from the point of view of the operator and programmer and thus can be influenced like a standard NC axis The axis name of the leading axis identifies all axes in the gantry axis grouping Synchronized axis Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 41 A synchronized axis is the gantry axis whose set position is continuously derived from the motion of the leading axis and is thus moved synchronously with the leading axis From the point of view of the programmer and operator the synchronized axis does not exist Conditions for a gantry grouping e A gantry grouping must not contain a spindle e A synchronized axis must not be addressed by a transformation e A synchronized axis must not be the slave axis in another type of axis coupling e A synchronized axis must not be defined as the leading axis in another axis grouping Note Each axis in the gantry grouping must be set so that it can take over the function of the leading axis at any time i e matching velocity acceleration and dy
352. this gear stage and the IS Programmed speed too high DB390x DBX2001 1 is enabled If a speed is programmed lower than the minimum speed of this gear stage the speed is raised to this speed The IS Setpoint speed increased DB390x DBX2001 2 is then enabled M40 M40 in the part program causes the gear stage to be selected automatically by the control The control checks which gear stage is possible for the programmed spindle speed S function If the suggested gear stage is not equal to the current actual gear stage the IS Change gear DB390x DBX2000 3 and the IS Set gear stage A to C DB390x DBX2000 0 to 2 are enabled The automatic gear stage selection function initially compares the programmed spindle speed with the minimum and maximum speed of the current gear stage If the comparison is positive a new gear stage is not defined If the comparison is negative the comparison is performed on each of the gear stages starting with gear stage 1 until the result is positive If the comparison in the 5th gear stage is also not positive no gear stage change is triggered If necessary the speed is limited to the maximum speed of the current gear stage or increased to the minimum speed of the current gear stage and the IS Setpoint speed limited DB390x DBX2001 1 or IS Setpoint speed increased DB390x DBX2001 2 is enabled Speed N revimin 5 amp amp 8 oO oO OD OD MD35100 SPIND_VELO_LIMIT maximum spindle speed
353. time constant the compensation value applies too long and results in an overcompensation at the next circular contour Counter 2 Counter 1 Figure 10 9 Time constant set too large Optimization of the compensation parameters To optimize the compensation parameters the circularity test must be repeated several times and the values changed in small increments It is recommended that the optimization be performed with different values for radius and path velocity that are typical for the machining operations performed on the machine Each effect of a parameter change should be checked with a subsequent circularity test and documented Mean value generation lf different parameter values result for different radii and path velocities the best values should be determined via mean value generation Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 119 Good friction compensation setting With a good friction compensation setting no contour violations can be detected at the quadrant transitions Counter 2 Counter 1 Figure 10 10 Good friction compensation setting Acceleration dependent compensation value If the compensation value proves to be acceleration dependent the friction compensation and adaptation described below can be injected in a following step 10 5 4 Friction compensation with acceleration dependent compensation value 10 5 4 1 Description of functions If the compensation value is highly dependent on the ac
354. tion This is signaled via the following NC PLC interface signal DB390x DBX1001 4 1 bit 3 5 2 Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 OBAO 08 2013 69 7 6 Data table 7 6 1 Machine data Number __iidentifier Name General information 11310 Defines movement in the opposite direction 11320 Handwheel pulses per locking position 11346 Handwheel path or velocity specification Channel specific 20060 Geometry axis in channel n geometry axis index 20100 Geometry axes with transverse axis functions Axis spindle specific 30600 Fixed point positions for the axis 30610 Number of fixed point positions for an axis 32000 Maximum axis velocity 32010 Rapid traverse in JOG mode 32020 JOG axis velocity 32300 Axis acceleration 7 6 2 Setting data Number identifier Name General information 7 6 3 Interface signals Number Bit Name Signals from HMI to PLC DB1900 DBX1003 Axis number for handwheel 1 DB1900 DBX1004 Axis number for handwheel 2 NCK specific DB2600 DBX0001 ie o INC inputs in operating mode range active Specific to operating mode DB3000 DBX0000 JOG mode DB3000 DBX0002 Machine function INC1 up to continuous in operating mode range DB3100 DBX0000 Active JOG mode Channel specific DB3200 DBX1000 1 Activate handwheel 2 1 for geometry axis 1 DB3200 DBX1004 1 for geometry axis 2 DB3200 DBX1008 1 for geometry axis 3 Function Manual 70 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO0 08 2013 Number
355. tion Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 rs 5 Press these softkeys in succession to open the USB window FS data gt ai USB 6 Use this hardkey on the PPU to select one or more machine manufacturer s manual files and 2 then copy the file s with the following SELECT Copy Hane Type Length Date Tine B 868scr17 png 18 67 KE 64 67 61 61 36 12 B 888scr18 png 32 36 KE 13 65 29 13 56 26 B 868scri19 png 32 31 KB 13 65 29 13 56 28 g 868scr2 png 26 33 KB 64 67 61 66 39 36 g 868scr3 png 15 21 KE 64 67 61 61 24 26 g 868scr4 png 26 93 KB 64 67 61 62 23 46 g 868scr5 png 18 66 KB 64 67 61 63 69 12 B 868scr6 png 16 65 KB 64 67 61 63 11 14 B 868scr7 png 24 68 KB 64 67 61 65 37 26 G 868scr8 png 14 38 KB 13 63 24 15 49 46 g 868scr9 png 14 36 KB 13 63 24 15 58 62 B Helpi txt HB 12 11 26 11 11 58 B Help2 png 21 67 KB 64 67 61 61 44 68 B SainunerikArchitectureT ppt 2H 8 HB 11 86 65 16 23 88 EZ alc txt HB 12 85 24 14 44 46 B alcu_eng txt 5 75 KE 12 11 26 16 43 12 B arc_product arc 36 696 KB 12 64 11 66 56 58 B keys bak 33 B 12 67 65 21 46 56 5 oennanual pdf 1 74 HE 12 H6 14 11 87 28 H geeD 7 Press this softkey and then access the HMI data folder with the following FE data l Then select the OEM manual folder by using keys A and v Hame Type Length Dat fea Customized bitmaps User cycle files CjEasyxLanguage scripts CI0EM online help txt png bnp Q Extended user text file falme txt
356. tion of each gantry axis is first compared to the defined reference position of the leading axis The next step in the operating sequence depends on the difference calculated between the actual values of the leading and synchronized axes e difference is smaller than the gantry warning limit Gantry synchronization is started automatically provided that IS Automatic synchronization locking has not been set The message Synchronization in progress gantry grouping x is output during this process All gantry axes traverse at a specific position value in the decoupled state at the velocity set in the machine data MD34040 REFP_VELO_SEARCH_MARKER shutdown speed The position value is defined by the leading axis MD34100 REFP_SET_POS reference point for incremental system The absolute encoders and distanced coded encoders of the leading axis will be set to the current actual position of the leading axis or to the reference point by the following machine data MD34330 REFP_STOP_AT_ABS_MARKER distancecoded linear measuring system without destination point For this operation the axes traverse at the same velocity as set for reference point approach MD34070 REFP_VELO_POS reference point positioning velocity As soon as all gantry axes have reached their target position ideal position IS Gantry grouping is synchronized is set to 1 followed by re activation of the gantry axis coupling The position actual value of all axes in the gantry
357. tion point 2 SAN CEC 1 3 0 0061 interpolation point 3 SAN CEC 1 4 0 003 interpolation point 4 AN CEC 1 5 0 0016 interpolation point 5 SAN CEC 1 6 0 0027 interpolation point 6 AN CEC 1 7 0 0043 interpolation point 7 SAN CEC 1 8 0 0026 interpolation point 8 SAN CEC 1 9 0 000 interpolation point 9 SAN CEC 1 120 0 0012 interpolation point 10 SAN CEC INPUT AXIS 1 AX1 basic axis SAN CEC OUTPUT AXIS 1 AX1 compensation axis SAN CEC STEP 1 58 interpolation point distance SAN CEC MINTI 565 0 compensation starts AN CEC MAX 1 5 0 compensation ends SAN CEC DIRECTION 1 1 Table applies for negative traversing directions AN CEC MULT BY TABLE 1 0 sno multiplication not relevant here SAN CEC IS MODULO 1 0 compensation without modulo function only for rotary axes SMA CEC ENABLE AX1 1 compensation ON SSN CEC TABLE ENABLE 0 1 enable Table 1 SSN CEC TABLE ENABLE 1 1 enable Table 2 NEWCONF M17 Additional tables can be set up e g for axes Y and Z MD18342 MN_MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS 2 90 Table 3 Axis Y positive traversing direction MD18342 MN_MM_CEC_MAX_POINTSJ 3 90 Table 4 Axis Y negative traversing direction MD18342 MN_MM_CEC_MAX_POINTSJ4 50 Table 5 Axis Z positive traversing direction MD18342 MN_MM_CEC_MAX_POINTS 5 50 Table 6 Axis Z negative traversing direction 10 4 Following error compensation feedforward control 10 4
358. tional character for defining output formatting Right justified or left justified for left justified Add leading zeros 0 Fill with blanks Width The argument defines the minimum output width for a non negative number If the value to be output has fewer places than the argument defined the missing spaces are filled with blanks Decimal places With floating point numbers the optional parameter defines the number of decimal places Type The type character defines which data formats are transferred for the print instruction These characters need to be specified d Integer value f Floating point number s String Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 215 Tag identifier Meaning OOS PRINTContinued Values Number of variables whose values are to be inserted into the text The variable types must match the corresponding type identifier for the formatting instruction and must be separated from one another using a comma Example Output of a text in the information line lt PRINT text Infotext gt Output of a text with variable formatting lt LET name trun_ dir gt lt LET gt lt PRINT text M d gt trun_dir lt PRINT gt Output of a text in a string variable with variable formatting lt LET name trun_ dir gt lt LET gt lt LET name Str type string gt lt LET gt lt print name str text M d gt trun_ dir lt print gt STOP Interpretation is cancelled at this
359. to 4 e Two dimensional field Index line 0 to 3 and index column 0 to 5 Attributes e name Variable name type The variable type can be an integer INT double DOUBLE float FLOAT or string STRING If there is no type instruction specified the system creates an integer variable lt LET name VARI type INT gt e permanent If the attribute is set to true the variable value is saved permanently This attribute is only effective for a global variable dim The following number of field elements must be specified For a two dimensional field the second dimension is specified after the first dimension separated by a comma A field element is accessed via the field index which is specified in square brackets after the variable name name index or name row column Single dimensional field dim lt Number of elements gt Two dimensional field dim lt Number of lines gt lt number of columns gt Non initialized field elements are pre assigned with 0 Function Manual 212 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 PAE Menng OOOO LET Continued Example Single dimensional field lt let name array dim 10 gt lt let gt Two dimensional field lt let name list_ string dim 10 3 type string gt lt let gt Pre assignment A variable can be initialized with a value lt LET name VARL type INT gt 10 lt LET gt If values comprising NC or PLC variables are saved in a local variable the a
360. ts execution of the next part program block t2 The spindle is stationary and oscillation starts oscillation via NCK The Oscillation speed interface signal should be enabled by the time t2 t3 The new gear stage is engaged The PLC user transmits the new actual Gear stage to the NCK and sets the IS gear changed t4 Atthis point the NCK cancels the Change gear interface signal terminates oscillation enables execution of the next part program block and accelerates the spindle to the new S value S1300 Figure 15 8 Gear stage change with stationary spindle Parameter set One parameter set each is provided for each of the five gear stages The appropriate parameter set is activated through the IS Actual gear stage A to C DB380x DBX2000 0 to 2 It is assigned as follows Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 161 Index n PLC interface Data of the data set Contents CBA coding oOo Data for axis mode 000 Data for 1st gear stage 001 Servo gain factor monitoring functions speed 4 jt00 Datta for sth gearstage 5B tot Datta for Sth gearstage The machine data included in a parameter set are marked specifically in Section Machine Data 166 The following machine data is added per gear stage for each parameter set index n n 1 gt 1st gear stage of the spindle etc e MD35110 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO n e MD35120 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO n e MD35130 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT n e MD35140 GEAR_ST
361. tween the axis acceleration curve within a block and at the transition between two blocks Advantages The deployment of axis specific machine data for the path offers the following advantages e Immediate allowance is made in the interpolation for the dynamic response of the axes which can then be fully utilized for each axis e Jerk limitation for separate axes is performed not just in linear blocks but also in curved contours Please refer to Chapter Acceleration Page 39 for more information on the subject of jerk limiting 4 5 Compressor functions 4 5 1 NC block compression Function COMPON COMPCURV The compressor functions COMPON and COMPCURV generate one polynomial block from up to ten consecutive linear blocks of the form G01 X Y Z F The polynomial blocks of the compressor functions have the following properties COMPON Continuous velocity block transitions COMPCURV Continuous velocity and acceleration block transitions Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 33 COMPCAD The compressor function COMPCAD can generate one polynomial block from theoretically any number of linear and circular blocks The polynomial blocks have constant velocity and acceleration at the block transitions Corners that are desirable are identified as such and taken into account The maximum tolerable deviation of the calculated path to the programmed points can be specified using machine data for all compressor
362. uccession to copy the file and then open the desired window In the opened window paste the file with the following gt Paste n ii cycle B CYCLE888 B MD_DESCR_CHS B E RPARAM_NAME_ENG 6 Open the file with this hardkey 2l Then you can view the change that you made NC CHASMD_DESCR_ENG TAT _MH_USER_DATA_HEX_IDX4 888 T_HN_USER_DATA_INT_IDXH 111 f f 31 T_HN_USER_DATA_INT_IDX1 888 OT T_HN_USER_DATA_INT_IDX2 User data CINT zz f eof 18 9 Loading machine manufacturer s R variable name files Perform the following operations to access the OEM R variable name file folder SYSTEM 4s I gt Sus BB8D lt SYSTEM gt operating area shm AARM gt S data gt FS data HMI data folder gt Hane Type Length Date E Customized bitmaps User cycle files CjEasyxLanguage scripts CI0EM online help txt png bnp CjExtended user text file falme txt CI70EM HD description file md_descr txt Cj0EM manual Coemmanual pdf3 g CIPLC alarm texts falcu txt GCDEH slideshow bnp pnq Oo C7Service planner task name file svc_tasks txt In the factory setting the R variable name files in the two default languages are prepared on the control but invisible to the machine manufacturer The machine manufacturer can load files of this type only after defining the name of at least one of their R variables The detailed procedure is as follows Fun
363. ude ontiadesesanelehsieasdeaeteaededsasaatenwesadieasuuedsteeetandeadtenets 13 2 EMERGENGY STOP SCCUe CC rirni cast ees ss ese seis ted N 13 3 EMERGENCY STOP acknowledgment cccccseecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseeeeessaeeeesaeeesseeeeeeseeeeesanees 13 4 MA UMN ade E ac seca sind eae re ob aie tee a ws E eee deena we tec eco ee aes 13 4 1 Machine dalier ensa E ESE E e ETEA sean nett esa wunntensteldswbeuusysenietioste EE 13 4 2 al g Fetes e gt 6 af cee Re E EE E E cree Te See ae ee ner ee ne Reference Point APProach ccceccsecseeceeceecaeceeceecaecceecaeeaneceesaeseneauecueeaeeeuecaesaneceesaesanenaeseesaeeeueneesaaeeeesansnsseees 14 1 FUndame 4 c Cee ms ere Ae ce ee ee ee eee cee eee ener 14 2 Referencing with incremental measuring SYSLEMS ccceecccceececeeeecaeeeeseeeeeeeeeceecesseeeeseeeeseeeessneetsneeees Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 14 3 Secondary conditions for absolute encoders cccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeaees 14 4 BAA 0 i ne ete a no ee E E rae Oe eae eta nae ee eee 14 4 1 Pees NS Cet cette EEES AAE AN E EAT N ENAS E AET A N EA E ATT 14 4 2 tenace Signal asa a er eee eee eee ee ere ee ee 15 ge ALS e egrets ces AAA cleats sages P EN ene E E E E E E E A 15 1 Brel d strip iOm siere eee eter ee ee eee ee er eee eae 15 2 S12 018 SW MOJE tenner EEE ee ane eee eee en eer ee ee 15 2 1 S70 Laro IC 08 10 0
364. until it is deactivated With the SPOS program function the spindle is in positioning mode see also Section Programming Page 182 Block change The block change is carried out when all functions programmed in the block have reached their end criterion e g axis traverse completed all auxiliary functions acknowledged by PLC and the spindle has reached its position IS Exact stop fine for spindle DB390x DBX0000 7 Requirements A spindle position actual value encoder is absolutely essential Positioning from rotation Speed Phase 1 to 5 rev min MD 36300 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT encoder limit frequency MD 36302 ENC_FREQ_LIMIT_LOW encoder limit frequency resynchronization 2 value of MD 36300 MD 35300 SPIND POSCTRL_VELO Se E i i ee a ee position control activation speed 4 5 Time s SPOS Figure 15 3 Positioning from rotation at different speeds Sequence Phase 1 Spindle rotates at a lower speed than the encoder limit frequency The spindle is synchronized It is set to control mode Process continues with Phase 2 Phase 1a Spindle rotates at a lower speed than the position control activation speed The spindle is synchronized It is set to control mode The rest of the sequence is possible via 4a Phase 1b not shown Spindle rotates at a speed higher than the encoder limit frequency The spindle is not synchronized initially but is then synchronized when the rotation s
365. ure 11 2 Direction of rotation for MD value 1 e MD24920 TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 The control is informed of the position of the tool zero point in relation to the origin of the coordinate system declared for TRANSMIT The MD has three components for the three axes of the Cartesian coordinate system Assignment of axis components TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 0 Tx TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 1 Ty TRANSMIT_BASE_TOOL_1 2 Tz see following figure Tool zero Tx Ty Tz axis components of position Figure 11 3 Position of tool zero in relation to origin of the Cartesian coordinate system center of rotation e MD24911 TRANSMIT _POLE_SIDE_FIX_1 0 Pole traversal continuous Traversal of pole The pole is defined as the center of rotation at point X 0 Y 0 of TRANSMIT plane X machine axis intersects the center of rotation In the vicinity of the pole small positional changes in the geometry axes X Y generally result in large changes in the machine rotary axis position exception path only results in a movement of the XM axis Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 125 Workpiece machining operations close to the pole are therefore not recommended since these may require sharp feedrate reductions to prevent overloading of the rotary axis Avoid selecting TRANSMIT when the tool is positioned exactly on the pole Ensure that the path of the tool center point does not travel through the X0 Y0O pole Examples Machine data settings for TRAN
366. urer s MD description fil S ccccccccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeneneeesaaes 18 9 Loading machine manufacturer s R variable name files cceccccceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseneeesaeeees 18 10 Generating user dialogs using customized EasyXLanguage scripts 1010 1 iS CONG Ol MUNG NOMS oeren yan cont santen Goan ose deeds ce nites two tier saseteid oc E bos oeteaas 18 10 2 Fundamentals of configuration ccccceececcssececceeececeeeeeccsececseueeecsaueeesauseecsaueeecsuueeesseeessaueeessegeeesaeees 18 10 3 Configuration files EaSyXLANQUAGE cccceeccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesseueeeseeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeesaeeeesaaeeeesaanees 18 10 4 Structure Of configuration file cee ccc cece ece ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaeeeeesaeeeesseeeesaaeeeeseeeeeeseeeesaenees 18 10 5 Language dependency cccccscccsscccssececeecccescesssecesececsucessueeeseeeenseeeseueesseessesessueeseaeeesaesensesensusensaess dfs Yagi 08 came 4 1 1 WER 9 gt 9 alee eee a nde en ee eee eee ee eee 19 10 61 General Sie Cae x occcoe ose a dence cece sasdeccaacesocensescenaaceieseeanongeceacuseieseasegosecanreesecsenesecas 18 10 6 2 Instruction identifier description ce ccceccccecceceeecceeeceeeeeecee ceca ceseeeeeseeesseeesseeeeseeeeseueessueeeseeeseeessueensaees gs a OTF oo GOO agree 9 iese ereren eae settee ent aviary Ret te evra E reat 18 10 64 Special XML SYMA csitces
367. ut per default at this time It should indicate to the operator that an NC start is still necessary to continue program processing Supplementary condition The approach movement Search with calculation to block end point is performed using the type of interpolation valid in the target block This should be GO or G1 as appropriate With other types of interpolation the approach movement can be aborted with an alarm e g circle end point error on G2 G3 Note For further information about the block search function refer to the SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 97 9 4 6 Skip part program blocks SKP Functionality When testing or breaking in new programs it is useful to be able to disable or skip certain part program blocks during program execution PROGRAM 1 Main program or subroutine Block being processed Skip blocks N40 and N50 during processing Figure 9 6 Skipping part program blocks Selection activation Prog The skip function is selected through the user interface in the menu L cont S Skip block selected DB1700 DBX0002 0 is set when the function is selected In addition a slash must be written before the blocks to be skipped see figure This however does not activate the function This function is activated via IS Activate skip block DB3200 DBX0002 0 Display The checkback signal that the Skip block function is act
368. vent and a measuring mode are programmed Two different measuring modes are available e MEAS Measurement with deletion of distance to go Example N10 G1 F300 X300 Z200 MEAS 1 Trigger event is the falling edge of probe 1 from deflected to non deflected status e MEAW Measurement without deletion of distance to go Example N20 G1 F300 X300 Y100 MEAW 1 Trigger event is the rising edge of probe 1 from non deflected to deflected status The measurement block is terminated when the probe signal has arrived or the programmed position has been reached The 4 measurement job can be cancelled with the key Reference SINUMERIK 808D ADVANCED Programming and Operating Manual Note If a GEO axis axis in the WCS is programmed in a measuring block the measured values are stored for all current GEO axes 12 3 2 Measurement results Reading measurement results in the program The results of the measuring command can be read in the part program via system variables e System variable AC_MEA 1 Query measurement job status signal The variable is deleted at the beginning of a measurement The variable is set as soon as the probe fulfills the activation criterion rising or falling edge Execution of the measurement job can thus be checked in the part program e System variable AA_MM axis Access to measured value in the machine coordinate system MCS Read in part program axis stands for the name of the measurement axis X Y
369. wance for the spindle speed tolerance MD35150 SPIND_DES_VELO_TOL there is a drive fault and IS Speed limit exceeded DB390x DBX2002 0 is set Furthermore the alarm 22100 is output and all axes and the spindle are decelerated 15 6 5 Minimum maximum speed for gear stage Max speed MD35130 GEAR_STEP_MAX_VELO_LIMIT defines the maximum speed for the gear stage In the gear stage engaged this set speed can never be exceeded When the programmed spindle speed is limited the IS Set speed limited DB390x DBX2001 1 is enabled Minimum speed MD35140 GEAR_STEP_MIN_VELO_LIMIT defines the minimum speed for the gear stage It is not possible that the speed falls below this set speed if an S value is programmed which is too small Then the IS Setpoint speed increased DB390x DBX2001 2 is enabled The minimum gear stage speed is operative only in spindle open loop control mode the speed of the gear stage can only fall below the minimum limit through e Spindle override 0 e M5 e S0 e S Spindle stop e Remove IS Controller enable e S Reset e S Spindle reset e S Oscillation speed e IS NCSTOP axes and spindle e S Axis spindle disable 15 6 6 Max encoder limit frequency The maximum encoder limit frequency of the actual spindle position encoder is monitored by the control the limit can be exceeded It is the responsibility of the machine tool manufacturer to ensure that the configuration of the spindle mot
370. wheel from the operator panel HMI This interface that the basic PLC program supplies for handwheels 1 to 2 contains the following information e The axis numbers assigned to the handwheel IS Axis number handwheel n DB1900 DBB1003 ff e Additional information on the machine or geometry axis IS Machine axis DB1900 DBB1003 7 ff The Activate handwheel interface signal is either set to 0 disable or to 1 enable by the PLC user program for the defined axis Function Manual 64 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Settings as path or velocity When the electronic handwheel is turned the assigned axis is traversed either in the positive or negative direction depending on the direction of rotation The general MD11346 HANDWH_TRUE_DISTANCE handwheel path or velocity specification can be used to set the setting type of the handwheel motion and thus adapted to the intended use e MD value 0 default The settings from the handwheel are velocity specifications When the handwheel is stationary braking is realized along the shortest path e MD value 1 The settings from the handwheel are path specifications No pulses are lost Limiting the velocity to the maximum permissible value can cause the axes to overtravel Particular care should be taken in the case of a high weighting of the handwheel pulses Further variants of the path or speed setting are possible with the value 2 or 3 Evaluation The traversing path velocity
371. wledge about the machine dynamic response e No sudden changes in the position and speed setpoints Optimization of control loop The feedforward control is set on an axis spindle specific basis First of all the current control loop speed control loop and position control loop must be set to an optimum for the axis spindle Parameter assignments The feedforward control parameters must then be assigned to the relevant axis spindle and then entered in the machine data see next section 10 4 2 Speed feedforward control In the case of speed feedforward control a velocity setpoint is also applied directly to the input of the speed controller see figure below NCK Drive Setpoint Speed reference controller value Position actual value MD 32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME Figure 10 4 Speed feedforward control Parameters In order to achieve a correctly set speed feedforward control the equivalent time constant of the speed control loop must be determined exactly and entered as machine data MD32810 EQUIV_SPEEDCTRL_TIME equivalent time constant of the closed speed control loop during commissioning Function Manual 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 115 10 5 Friction compensation quadrant error compensation 10 5 1 General function description In addition to the mass inertia and the machining forces the frictional forces in the gearing and guideways of the machine influence the behavior of a machine a
372. x DBX202 5 If the IS Oscillation speed is enabled without defining a new gear stage the spindle does not change to oscillation mode Oscillation is started with the IS Oscillation speed The setting of the IS Oscillation via PLC DB380x DBX2002 4 distinguishes between e Oscillation via NCK e Oscillation via PLC Oscillation time The oscillation time for oscillation mode can be defined in a machine date for each direction of rotation e Oscillation time in M3 direction referred to as t1 in the following MD35440 SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CW e Oscillation time in M4 direction referred to as t2 in the following MD35450 SPIND_OSCILL_TIME_CCW Function Manual 154 6FC5397 7EP40 0BA0 08 2013 Oscillation via NCK Phase 1 With the IS Oscillation speed DB380x DBX2002 5 the spindle motor accelerates to the velocity with oscillation acceleration specified in MD35400 SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO oscillation speed The starting direction is defined by MD35430 SPIND_OSCILL_START_DIR starting direction during oscillation Phase 2 If time t1 t2 has elapsed the spindle motor accelerates in the opposite direction to the speed defined in MD35400 SPIND_OSCILL_DES_VELO oscillation speed Time t2 t1 starts Phase 3 When time t2 t1 expires the spindle motor accelerates in the opposite direction same direction as phase 1 etc Oscillation via PLC With the IS Oscillation speed DB380x DBX2002 5 the spindle motor accelerat
373. xis During the acceleration of an axis from standstill especially the transition from static friction to the significantly smaller sliding friction has a negative affect with regard to the contour accuracy The sudden change in the friction force results in a briefly increased following error With interpolating axes path axes this results in significant contour violations For circles the contour violations occur especially at the quadrant transitions due to the standstill of one of the involved axis at the direction reversal Therefore an additional setpoint pulse is injected as a compensation value for this friction or quadrant error compensation when the axis accelerates from standstill i e at the transition from static to sliding friction In this way contour violations can be almost completely avoided at the quadrant transitions of circular contours Acceleration dependent friction compensation In most cases a compensation value independent of the axial acceleration with constant amplitude is sufficient for the quadrant error compensation However if the compensation value is dependent on the acceleration an adaptation characteristic can be activated via the friction compensation with adaptation in order to model this behavior Circularity test The easiest way to commission the friction compensation is with the circularity test A circle is traversed and the circular contour generated on the machine based on the actual position v
374. xk k Iki k k k k Ik k k k HW limit switch xdb x Ik x x k x x Ip hk k k xde x xd x x fx xk k p x analog spindle ol te TP ki ki k 2n CT Y ete et E S s A r a E xe fx fx fx x fx x x x x fx fx fx Spindle synchronized Sende swehonzed _ pot klk fe Pe Ee Te Speed in setpoint range Speen in sewontange _ pot klid ft tT yp d l Maximum permissible speed x x ix fx Fi fix k Encoder frequency imit bk bk l bk k il I bi bk Monitoring is active in this status Channel in reset Channel interrupted Channel active Channel interrupted JOG during AUTO interruption Channel interrupted JOG during MDA interruption Channel active JOG in MDA during MDA interruption Channel active JOG in MDA NOOB WN X Function Manual 80 6FC5397 7EP40 0BAO 08 2013 9 2 5 Interlocks in the individual modes Overview of interlocks Different interlocks can be active in the different operating modes The following table shows which interlocks can be activated in which operating mode and in which operating state Mode of operation lauro os ae eC o wi SS Functions d j2 ja f ja ja 3 s a 1 2 3 je 7 General interlocks so8D Ready Jepe p le x x x x x x x x ee Mode change disable dx x x x x x x x x x x x x x Channel specific interlocks Feed stop Sikil bki ki kil Il khkk NC Start disable ke bk fx k x k x px pe x x x Read in disable x Ee b dx e x x d x e a

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Montageanleitung  Samsung NP-R466 User Manual (FreeDos)      manuel utilisateur - Les pompes à chaleur pour piscines et les  HP Deskjet 9800  Kootenay (SEA440LX) Motherboard User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file